Research Journal of Social and Life Science Volume-14-1

RNI NO.
MP BIL 01034/12/1/2005-TC
ISSN 0973-3914
Research Journal of Social and Life Sciences

Half Yearly, Bilingual (English Edition) A National Registered Reviewed/ Refereed Research Journal
Indexed & Listed at: Ulrich's Periodicals Directory , ProQuest, U.S.A. Title Id : 715205
Volume- XIV-I English Edition Year- 07 June-2013
Chief Editor
Prof. Braj Gopal

Honoured wi th Prestigious Bhartendu Harishchand Award
Honorary Editor
Dr. S. Akhilesh
Honored with Prestigious Pt. G.B. Pant Award Govt. of Indi a 1997, 1998, 2000, 2004 & 2008 and Bhartendu Hari shchand Award i n 2006
Dr. Sandhya Shukla

Professor and H ead Depar tm ent of Poli ti cal Science Govt. T. R. S. Coll ege, Rewa (M.P .)
Editor
Dr. Gayatri Shukla

Joint Dir ector Centr e for Research Studi es
iya, Rewa-48 ichh 60 ,B
Research Stud for i es re
( 01
.) In M.P
dia Reg .N
o.
Journal of Centre for Research Studies

Rewa (M.P.) India
Registered under M.P. Society Registration Act, 1973, Reg.No. 1802 Year, 1997
www.researchjournal.in
02 18
Ce nt
Centre for Research Studies

Single Copy Rs. 500
Membership feeTerm Five years Life Member (15 years) For Individual Rs. 1200 Rs. 3000 For Institutional Rs. 2000 Rs. 5000
Mode of payment The DD be drawn in favor of GAYATRI PUBLICATIONS, REWA payable at SBI Rewa City Branch (IFS Code : SBIN 0004667). The amount may be deposited in the account number 30016445112 of GAYATRI PUBLICATIONS, SBI Rewa City Branch (IFS Code : SBIN 0004667). In this case please add Rs. 25 as bank charge. Please inform on Mobile (9425186437) after depositing money. If any member wants each vol. by reg. post please deposit extra Rs. 100 for one year, Rs. 500 for five years and Rs. 1500 for 15 years.
Subject Experts/ Advisory Board

01. 03. 05. 07. 09. 11. 13. 15. 17. 19. 21. 23. 25. Dr. O.P. Parmeswaran, Chandigarh Dr. A. P. Onkarappa, Karnataka Dr. Archana Ambhore, Akola Dr. R. C. Gupta, Bina Dr. A.P. Mishra, Rewa Dr. N.P. Pathak, Rewa Dr. V. L. Bhangdia, Amravati Dr. N.P. Tripathi, Rewa Dr. B.P. Badola, Dharamshala Dr. Bal Gopal Singh, Banshatli Dr. Prahlad Mishra, Jabalpur Dr. B.C.M. Patnaik, Odisha Dr. Narendrasingh, Ahmedabad 02. 04. 06. 08. 10. 12. 14. 16. 18. 20. 22. 24. 26. Dr. Rajesh Mishra, Lucknow Dr. Gautam Gyanendra, Bhopal Dr. Arvind Joshi, Varanasi Dr. Amita, Saudi Arabiya Dr. A.K. Shrivastava, Rewa Dr. L. S. Gajpal, Raipur Dr. G.K. Sharma, Ujjain Dr. R. S. Topandasani, Junagadh Dr. Minaxi Patel, Rajkot Dr. Suneeta Dwivedi, Gwalior Dr. N. Sundaram, Vellore Dr. Umesh Shukla, Agra Dr. Geeta Nair, Mumbai
GAYATRI PUBLICATIONS
41/42, Raghuwans Sadan, Shantikunj Bichhiya, Rewa 486 001 (M.P.) Phone - (07662) 255177, 9425186437 E-mail -gresearchjournal@rediffmail.com, gayatripublicationsrewa@rediffmail.com, researchjournal.journal@gmail.com
www.researchjournal.in
Opinions expressed in this journal do not reflect the policies or views of this organisation, but of the individual contributors. The authors are solely responsible for the details and statements in their Research papers.The Judicial Jurisdiction will be Rewa (M.P.)
EDITORIAL
India is one of the developing nations of the modern world. It has become an independent country, a republic, more than a half century ago. During this period the country has been engaged in efforts to attain development and growth in various areas such as building infrastructure, production of food grains, science and technology and spread of education. The life expectancy has increased and many diseases have been controlled. However, there are many areas in which Indian society is experiencing a variety of problems. Some of these problems have their roots in our colonial past while others are related to demographic changes, socio-political conditions and cultural processes. The Indian society consists of people from different religious, linguistic and ethnic backgrounds. Since long there has been cultural give and take between the people from India and other countries. Since 1947 when India gained Political Independence the country has been engaged in the gigantic task of nation building. Efforts have been made to put nation on the path of socio-economic development. The transformation of nation as a self sufficient and cohesive political entity has proved to be a difficult challenge. The colonial past, socio-economic disparities in the society and raised aspirations have culminated in a complex situation. Social evils in Indian society have become a serious concern in the present day world. It is gradually affecting the roots of our culture and is blocking its rapid growth on the global chart. Unemployment, illiteracy, corruption, urbanization, gender discrimination, domestic violence, poverty, population explosion, and lust for money are all social evils prevailing in the country. Moreover, decline of values and decline of community has further shaken the society. There are many factors and causes that have contributed in the creating as well as inflating these evils. In the recent years many pathological social conditions have arise due to which the social problems in India have become even worse. Some of the common causes of social evils are differentiation of interest, growth of civilization, challenges in social behavior and social systems, lack of required changes in religious beliefs, malfunctioning of economic system, defective execution of political systems, and an ever-increasing lust for money. Further to that, the biggest cause contributing to the increasing social evils in Indian society is a developed insight or an improved vision.
This caters to development of human in all fields of life. People today are becoming modernized leaving behind the facts and essence of society, culture, and religion. This approach towards life is becoming practical and scientific. Every phase of life is now judged by a developed insight to have a scientific and rational solution to all issues of life. India is a secular republic and the constitution guarantees equal rights to all its citizens without any discrimination. The Indian constitution provides many legal safeguards to the minority community and special provisions are made for their social and economic growth. Despite these, minorities in India face all types of inequity in the public sphere. Even the violence and human right violations of the minority community in India is a common phenomenon. In this context, the note of UN Special Report on Freedom and Religious Belief Ms. Asma Jahangir, is pertinent when she praised India's secularism, human right activism, and strong legal protection for religious minorities at the national level but also made the point that due to the federal structure of Indian state the implementation of law varies from states to states. She said, "Organized groups claiming roots in religious ideologies have unleashed an all-pervasive fear of mob violence in many parts of the country". Asma Jahangir, was making special reference to the violence in Orissa, where Hindu fundamentalists attacked Christian and tribal communities. The violence in Khandamal region of Orissa continued for a long period, despite massive protest by activists and secular organizations. Some of the grave issues related to the minority community are highlighted in the report. Considering the huge geographic size and vast population it is not possible to keep track of every issue. Still the figures and facts mentioned in the report are evidence enough to understand the present situation of the minority community in India. Things have changed from last decades, but a long road is ahead leaders behaviour needs attention.
Date:
Prof. Braj Gopal
Chief Editor
Contents
01. Female Foeticide : A Major Social Problem and Cause of Decline of Sex Ratio in India Akhilesh Shukla Feminism: A Comparative Perspective Bandana Gaur Women Empowerment: A Myth or a Reality Arvind Khanna, Parveen Kaur Khanna Adolescents Problems: A Comparative Perspective Priyanka Tiwari Psychoticism, Reinforcement and Vigilance Jago Choudhary Sexual Harassment of Women at the Work Place in IndiaAn Analytical Study Manisha Saini, Pinki Sagar Empowerment of Women in Indian Society Akhilesh Shukla Women Empowerment: The Educational and Social Reform Agenda of The All India Women's Conference (1927-1947) Amneet Gill Women Empowerment and Panchayati Raj Institutions in Haryana: A Sociological Study Sunita, Desraj Sabharwal Problems of Dowry among Muslim Families with Special Reference to Rewa City Akhilesh Shukla, Tajammul Hussain Mir Impact of RTI in Administrative Culture in India (With special reference to Punjab state) Rama Environmental Degradation Causes, Consequences and Preventive Measures B. P. Singh, Gulzar Qadir Ganaie Solid Waste Management Plan Ujjain Amita Singhal, Dinesh Singhal 09
02.
20
03.
27
04.
31
05.
36
06.
40
07.
45
08.
53
09.
58
10.
69
11.
74
12.
78
13.
82
14.
Eco-Tourism Status of Bandhavgarh National ParkA Case Study Neerja Khare, Shikha Dwivedi Adjustment Patterns of Scheduled Caste and Scheduled Tribe College Students Jago Choudhary The Price Rise and Senior Citizens' Perception: A Study of Aurangabad City I. M. Farooqui Ethics: Globalization and International Marketing Problems V. L. Bhangdia Role of Information Technology in Taxation Vinod Triapathi Dynamics of Passion: A Study of Shakespeares Othello P.K.Jain Ritualistic Drama: A Progressive Indian Tradition Apara Tiwari Life in Death in The Novels of Kurt Vonnegut Suman Chawla V. S. Naipaul India: The Homeland P. K. Sharma Role of Ideology in Translation Practice Alka Rani Agrawal Literacy in India Archana Singhal Regional Imbalances and Disparities in India: Natural Endowments or Man Made Meenakshi Chahal Teachers' Awareness and Attitude towards Information and Communication Technologies Mohsin Uddin A Study of Correlation among Emotional Behaviour, Communication Skill and Adjustment of Students on the Base of Different School Areas Rakesh Katara, Dhruva Kumar Mittal
85
15.
91
16.
95
17.
100
18.
112
19.
116
20.
120
21.
123
22.
135
23.
139
24.
143
25.
148
26.
155
27.
160
28.
Linking Higher Education with Regional Needs: The Dialogue of Universities with Society Ritu Bakshi The Comprehensive Study on the Placement Scenario of the Management Education Institute: A Case study in Guwahati City of Assam Safiqur Rahman, Binita Devi, Tarana Rafique, Rani Talukdar Role of Education in Preventing Skin Cancer Megha Das, Ratnesh Das, Kamlesh Das Status of Public Libraries in Karnal District Sandhya Rani Encouragement of Physical Education and Physical Fitness in Modern Society Hasan Mehdi, Lilly Pushpam Isaac The Development of Physical Fitness Through Yoga Training Parixitsinh D . Mandora Historical Study of Development of the Game of Volleyball in Indore Vijay Francis Peter Psychological Well-being A Study of P.T.C. and B. Ed. College Students Jignesh P. Panchal Antibacterial activities of Calotropis procera Linn Abhilasha Shrivastava Suchita Singh, Sanchita Singh Concept of Sustainable Development for Conservation of Environment Madhu Sthapak Transferrin Polymophism in Channa Punctatus Umesh Shukla Pond Fish Culture in Rural areas of Bhopal District Chourey Pratibha, Durga Meena, Geeta Saxcena, Alok Verma Assessment of the Indian species of Digenetic Trematodes of Plagiorchiidae Family in Vindhyan Region of
167
29.
179
30.
186
31.
193
32.
198
33.
203
34.
208
35.
211
36.
215
37.
219
38.
225
39.
227
40.
230
Madhya Pradesh Pushpa Singh, Pushpendra Singh 41. Mathematical Modelling: Applications Rupa Salhotra Science and Society S.K. Srivsatava, Reena Singh Impact of Age in Adoption of Diversified Farming Technology in the Development of Rural Community Jitendra Singh Bhadauria Effectiveness of Nutrition Education and Osteoporosis Risk factors in Premenopausal Women Daisy Abraham, Nanda Gurwara Status and Scope of Some Medicinal Plants in Madhya Pradesh Vishnu Kant Tiwari, Arpita Awasthi Phytogeography Observations of Dehradun District Chhaya Singh, Satish Garkoti, H. C. Pande 233
42.
235
43.
240
44.
247
45.
253
46.
257
Research Journal of Social and Life Sciences ISSN 0973-3914, Vol.-XIV- I, Y ear-07, June-2013
Female Foeticide : A Major Social Problem and Cause of Decline of Sex Ratio in India
* Akhilesh Shukla
========================================================== Abstract-Female foeticide is the act of aborting a foetus because it is female. This is a major social problem in India and has cultural connections with the dowry system that is ingrained in Indian culture, despite the fact that it has been prohibited by law since 1961. In India a strong preference for sons over daughters exists, unlike in Western cultures. People realise smaller family sizes with relatively greater number of sons through the use of medical technologies. Pregnancies are planned by resorting to 'differential contraception' - contraception is used based on the number of surviving sons irrespective of family size. Following conception, foetal sex is determined by prenatal diagnostic techniques after which female foetuses are aborted. Foetal sex determination and sex-selective abortion by medical professionals has grown into a 1,000 crore industry (US$244 million). Social discrimination against women and a preference for sons have been promoted. Since 1991, 80% of districts in India have recorded an increasingly masculine sex ratio with the state of Punjab having the most masculine sex ratio. According to the decennial Indian census, the sex ratio in the 0-6 age group in India went from 104.0 males per 100 females in 1981, to 105.8 in 1991, to 107.8 in 2001, to 109.4 in 2011. The ratio is significantly higher in certain states such as Punjab and Haryana (126.1 and 122.0, as of 2001). Key Words- Female foeticide, foetus ,Differential contraception. ========================================================== It is estimated that more than 10 million female foetuses have been illegally aborted in India. Researchers for the LancetjournalbasedinCanada and India stated that 500,000 girls were being lost annually through sex-selective abortions. Pre-natal sex-determination was banned in India in 1994, under thePre-conception and Prenatal Diagnostic Techniques (Prohibition of Sex Selection) Act. The act aims to prevent sex-selective abortion, which, according to the Indian Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, has its roots in Indias long history of strong patriarchal influence in all spheres of life. It is most prominent in Gujarat and the North Indian states, which according to ===========================
* Department of Sociology, Govt. T. R. S. College, Rewa (M.P.)
10
Research Journal of Social and Life Sciences, ISSN 0973-3914, Vol .-XIV- I, Year-07, June-2013
census data have an alarmingly low ratio of female children. Certain castes regularly practiced female infanticide and later female foeticide. The castes with a much lower proportion of female children to male children included lewa patidars and the rajputs in Gujarat; jats, rajputs, khutris and royal brahmins in undivided Punjab, rajputs and gujars in the Uttar Pradesh. This process began in the early 1990s when ultrasound techniques gained widespread use in India. There was a tendency for families to continuously produce children until a male child was born. This was primarily due to the large sexist culture that exists in India against women. This is reflected by literacy rates among women as well as economic participation, which are both particularly low in states where female foeticide is prominent and an unequal population ratio exists alongside. The government initially supported the practice tocontrol population growth. The Preconception and Prenatal Diagnostic Techniques (PCPNDT) Act was passed in 1994, making sex-selective abortion illegal. It was then modified in 2003 holding medical professionals legally responsible. However, the PCPNDT Act has been poorly enforced by authorities. Social Effects- Female foeticide has led to an increase in human trafficking. In 2011, 15,000 Indian women were bought and sold as brides in areas wherefoeticidehasledtoalackofwomen.Governmentresponsetotheproblem has been known to not have stopped female foeticide from occurring. Although several acts have been passed to combat the situation, many of them are not enforced strongly enough. This and the existence of several loopholes in the system means the practice of sex-selective abortion continues. An example of one of these loopholes would be on the pretext of checking for genetic disorders in the fetus, who can stop a doctor from examining the sex of the unborn child and informing the parents in secret. In 2001, the Supreme Court in India gave orders to five multi-national companies Philips, Symonds, Toshiba, Larsen and Toubro and Wipro to give them the names and addresses of all the clinics and persons in India to whom they have sold ultrasound machines in the last five years to enable the state government to find out if these machines were registered. Unfortunately, not much happened after this directive, although the companies were reported to have supplied all the information that was required.The Statesman, a leading newspaper reported on February 3, 2002 that not a single illegal ultrasound machine has been impounded in Delhi. Banning pre-conception sex-determination tests calls for new legislation. But the fact is that even the present PNDT Act is full of loopholes and cannot be effectively implemented. Law certainly empowers the government to act but the fundamental question is whether the government or Supreme Court can alone usher in social transformation in Indian society.Indias prime minister acknowledgesgendercideas a national shame, however, the police and judiciaries do not implement the law because they believe in the same thing. Authorities often let the unlawful parents and doctors off with light punishment.
11
Often, when the mothers disobey the husbands family decision to abort the female foetus and report it to the authorities, the suits are ignored or given a light sentence: The mother is targeted for bearing girls and disobeying the familys decision to abort the child. She may even lose her job, be expose to constant death threats, and be left with unresolved cases. In addition, others who give birth to girls are prone to violence. Even if she is able to give birth to the baby girls, the family is likely to not report the births and even murder them.[12] Increasing awareness of the problem has led to multiple campaigns by celebrities and journalists to combat sex-selective abortions.Aamir Khandevoted the first episode Daughters Are Precious of his showSatyamev Jayatetoraiseawarenessofthiswidespreadpractice,focusing primarily on Western Rajastan, which is known to be one of the areas where this practice is common. Its sex ratio dropped to 883 girls per 1,000 boys in 2011 from 901 girls to 1000 boys in 2001. Rapid response was shown by local government in Rajastan after the airing of this show, showing the affect of media and nationwide awareness on the issue. A vow was made by officials to set up fast-track courts to punish those who practice sex-based abortion. They cancelled the licences of six sonography centres and issued notices to over 20 others. ThefirstseasonofSatyamev Jayatewaspremieredfrom6May2012 on various channels within Star Network along withDoordarshans DD National.[1]It marked the television debut ofIndianBollywoodactor and filmmakerAamirKhan.Hisworksareremarkableandaregivenbelowinthe table.WhileHindiistheprimarylanguageoftheshow,itisalsodubbedand simulcast in several other Indian languages such as Bengali, Malayalam, Marathi, Tamil and Telugu.
Episode Title 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Daughters are precious Break the Silence Marriage or Marketplace Every Life is Precious Intolerance to Love Persons with disabilities Danger at home Poison on our Plate? Think before you Drink Dignity for All Sunset Years, Sunshine Life Every Drop Counts Idea of India Social Evils Female foeticide in India Child sexual abuse Dowry system in India Medical malpractice Love marriages and Honor killings in India Physical Disabilities Domestic Violence Pesticide poisoning and Organic farming Alcohol abuse Casteism and Untouchability Old age Water crisis and Rainwater harvesting We The People Song "O Ri Chiraiya" "Haule Haule" "Rupaiya" "Naav" "Ghar Yaad Aata Hai Mujhe" "Chanda Pe Dance" "Sakhi" "Maati Bole" Original Air date 6 May 2012 13 May 2012 20 May 2012 27 May 2012 3 June 2012 10 June 2012 17 June 2012 24 June 2012 TVR 3.02 2.63 2.95 3.20 2.86 2.48 2.55 1.94
9 10 11 12 13
"Ae Zindagi"
1 July 2012
2.40 2.10 2.10 2.20 TBA
"Kabir Vani" 8 July 2012 "Bahut Yaad Aate 15 July 2012 Ho" "Jal na Jaaye Jal" 22 July 2012 "Nikal Pado" 29 July 2012
This has been done on the smaller scale. Cultural intervention has been
12
addressed through theatre. Plays such as Pacha Mannu, which is about female infanticide/foeticide, has been produced by a womens theatre group in Tamil Nadu. This play was showing mostly in communities that practice female infanticide/foeticide and has led to a redefinition of a methodology of consciousness raising, opening up varied ways of understanding and subverting cultural expressions. In a recent landmark judgement the Bombay High Court upheld an amendment to the PCPNDT Act banning sex-selection treatment. The Court pronounced that pre natal sex determination would be as good as female foeticide. Pre-conception sex determination violated a womans right to live and was against the Constitution. The Beti Bachao, or Save girlscampaign,hasbeenunderwayinmanyIndiancommunitiessincetheearly 2000s. The campaign uses the media to raise awareness of the gender disparities creating, and resulting from, sex-selective abortion. Beti Bachao activities include rallies, posters, short videos and television commercials, some of which are sponsored by state and local governments and other organisations. Many celebrities in India have publicly supported the Beti Bachao campaign. Save girls,savethegirlchild,isacampaigninIndiatoendthegender-selective abortion of female fetuses, which has skewed the population towards a significant under-representation of girls in some Indian states. The Beti Bachao campaign is supported by human rights groups, non-governmental organizations, and state and local government in India. Alka Gupta reporter of UNICEF has published in her report that Eligible Jat boys from Haryana travel 3,000 km across the country to find themselves a bride. With increasingly fewer girls in Haryana, they are seeking brides from as far away as Kerala as the only way to change their single status. The girls have not vanished overnight. Decades of sex determination tests and female foeticide that has acquired genocide proportions are finally catching up with states in India. This is only the tip of the demographic and social problems confronting India in the coming years. Skewed sex ratios have moved beyond the states of Punjab, Haryana, Delhi, Gujarat and Himachal Pradesh. With news of increasing number of female foetuses being aborted from Orissa to Bangalore there is ample evidence to suggest that the next census will reveal a further fall in child sex ratios throughout the country. The decline in child sex ratio in India is evident by comparing the census figures. In 1991, the figure was 947 girls to 1000 boys. Ten years later it had fallen to 927 girls for 1000 boys.Since 1991, 80% of districts in India have recorded a declining sex ratio with the state of Punjab being the worst. States like Maharashtra, Gujarat, Punjab, Himachal Pradesh and Haryana have recorded a more than 50 point decline in the child sex ratio in this period. Despite these horrific numbers, foetal sex determination and sex selective abortion by unethical medical professionals has today grown into a Rs. 1,000 crore industry (US$ 244 million). Social discrimination against women, already
13
entrenched in Indian society, has been spurred on by technological developments that today allow mobile sex selection clinics to drive into almost any village or neighbourhood unchecked.The PCPNDT Act 1994 (Preconception and Prenatal Diagnostic Techniques Act) was modified in 2003 to target the medical profession - the supply side of the practice of sex selection. However non implementation of the Act has been the biggest failing of the campaign against sex selection According to the latest data available till May 2006, as many as 22 out of 35 states in India had not reported a single case of violation of the act since it came into force. Delhi reported the largest number of violations 76 out of which 69 were cases of non registration of birth! Punjab had 67 cases and Gujarat 57 cases. But the battle rages on. In a recent landmark judgment the Mumbai High Court upheld an amendment to the PCPNDT Act banning sex selection treatment. The Court pronounced that pre natal sex determination would be as good as female foeticide. Pre-conception sex determination violated a womans right to live and was against the Constitution, it said.While the boys from Haryana may have found a temporary solution to the problem of missing brides, experts warn that the demographic crisis will lead to increasing sexual violence and abuse against women and female children, trafficking, increasing number of child marriages, increasing maternal deaths due to abortions and early marriages and increase in practices like polyandry.There have been only two convictions a fine of 300 rupees ($7) and another fine of 4,000 rupees ($98) from over 400 cases lodged under the Pre-conception and Pre-natal Diagnostic Techniques Act. Bringing about changes in the demand for sex determination is a long process and has to be tackled through womens education and empowerment including the right to property and land rights. States in the North East and in Kerala where women have these rights show a comparatively better sex ratio.The battle against sex selection has proved to be long drawn out. But some signs are visible that demonstrate that the fight can be won. Lakhanpal, a small village in Punjab has turned the tide of male births for the first time. In a state that has the lowest sex ratio in the country, the village boasts of 1,400 girls for every 1000 boys. Arvind Kumar, the collector of Hyderabad district has illustrated the power of the Act. Hyderabad had the lowest child sex ratio (0-6 years) in Andhra Pradesh. After taking over in 2004 he tracked down all 389 diagnostic clinics in the city and took action. 361 ultrasound scan centres were issued notices for non compliance with the PNDT Act. Licenses of 91 centres were cancelled. 83 machines were seized and 71 released after an undertaking and fine. Three suppliers were prosecuted for supplying machines to clinics with no registration licenses. The Womens UN Report Program & Network (WUNRN) is a nongovernmental organization to implement the conclusions and recommendations of a United Nations Study on Freedom of Religion of Belief and the Status of Women From the Viewpoint of Religion and Traditions (E/CN.4/2002/73/
14
Add.2). This study is a major, universal, comprehensive U.N. approach to intolerance and discrimination against women based on religion and traditions. To strengthen the nexus between womens rights and freedom of religion or belief, it is important to build on the Juridical and Factual Aspects of this study by research, plans of action and practical projects. WUNRN, together with The Tandem Project, is committed to this objective through support for the dignity and fundamental rights of women everywhere, and by the promotion of tolerance and the end of discrimination against women based on religion and traditions. The WUNRN reports of 23 May 2011 says that Indias 2011 census shows a serious decline in the number of girls under the age of seven - activists fear eight million female foetuses may have been aborted in the past decade. The BBCs Geeta Pandey in Delhi explores what has led to this crisis. Kulwant has three daughters aged 24, 23 and 20 and a son who is 16. In the years between the birth of her third daughter and her son, Kulwant became pregnant three times. My mother-in-law said if I had a daughter, my husband would leave me. Thankfully, I had a son. Each time, she says, she was forced to abort the foetus by her family after ultrasound tests confirmed that they were girls.My mother-in-law taunted me for giving birth to girls. She said her son would divorce me if I didnt bear a son. Kulwant still has vivid memories of the first abortion. The baby was nearly five months old. She was beautiful. I miss her, and the others we killed, she says, breaking down, wiping away her tears.Until her son was born, Kulwants daily life consisted of beatings and abuse from her husband, mother-in-law and brother-in-law. Once, she says, they even attempted to set her on fire.They were angry. They didnt want girls in the family. They wanted boys so they could get fat dowries, she says.Indiaoutlaweddowriesin1961,butthepracticeremainsrampantand the value of dowries is constantly growing, affecting rich and poor alike. Kulwants husband died three years after the birth of their son. It was the curse of the daughters we killed. Thats why he died so young, she says. How girls are valued varies widely across India. Over the years, most states in the south and north-east have been kind to their girls, and sex ratios are above the national average.In the matrilineal societies of Kerala and Karnataka in the south and Meghalaya in the north-east, women have enjoyed high status and commanded respect. But the latest census figures show the good news even in these areas could be turning bad. A minor decline in the number of girls has begun in the three states which, campaigners worry, might be indicative of a trend.What is seen as most distressing is the steep decline in the number of girls under seven in the southern state of Andhra Pradesh and inSikkim,Nagaland,ManipurandTripurainthenorth-east.Eventhoughthese states have registered numbers much higher than the national average, the decline is too substantial to ignore.But all is not lost. Some states, such asPunjab,HaryanaandHimachalPradesh-whichsawthe gapbetween
15
numbers of boys and girls widen in 2001 - have shown an improvement. That is cause for some cheer, campaigners say. Her neighbour Rekha is mother of a chubby three-year-old girl.Last September, when she became pregnant again, her mother-in-law forced her to undergo an abortion after an ultrasound showed that she was pregnant with twin girls.I said theres no difference between girls and boys. But here they think differently. Theres no happiness when a girl is born. They say the son will carry forward our lineage, but the daughter will get married and go off to another family. Kulwant and Rekha live in Sagarpur, a lower middle-class area in south-west Delhi.Here, narrow minds live in homes separated by narrow lanes. The womens story is common and repeated in millions of homes across India, and it has been getting worse. In 1961, for every 1,000 boys under the age of seven, there were 976 girls. Today, the figure has dropped to a dismal 914 girls. Although the number of women overall is improving (due to factors such as life expectancy), Indias ratio of young girls to boys is one of the worst in the world after China. Many factors come into play to explain this: infanticide, abuse and neglect of girl children. But campaigners say the decline is largely due to the increased availability of antenatal sex screening, and they talk of a genocide.
The government has been forced to admit that its strategy has failed to put an end to female foeticide. In 1994, the Pre-Natal Determination Test (PNDT) Act outlawed sexselective abortion. In 2004, it was amended to include gender selection even at the pre-conception stage.Abortion is generally legal up to 12 weeks gestation. Sex can be determined by a scan from about 14 weeks.What is needed is a strict implementation of the law, says Varsha Joshi, director of census operations for Delhi. I find theres absolutely no will on the part of the government to stop this.Today, there are 40,000 registered ultrasound clinics in the country, and many more exist without any record. Ms Joshi, a former district commissioner of south-west Delhi, says there are dozens of ultrasound
16
clinics in the area. It has the worst child sex ratio in the capital - 836 girls under seven for every 1,000 boys.Delhis overall ratio is not much better at 866 girls under seven for every 1,000 boys.Its really sad. We are the capital of the country and we have such a poor ratio, Ms Joshi says.The south-west district shares its boundary with Punjab and Haryana, the two Indian states with the worst sex ratios.Since the last census, Punjab and Haryana have shown a slight improvement. But Delhi has registered a decline.Somethings really wrong here and something has to be done to put things right, Ms Joshi says. Almost all the ultrasound clinics in the area have the mandatory board outside, proclaiming that they do not carry out illegal sex-determination tests.But the women in Sagarpur say most people here know where to go when they need an ultrasound or an abortion.They say anyone who wants to get a foetal ultrasound done, gets it done. In the five-star clinics of south Delhi it costs 10,000-plus rupees ($222; 135), In the remote peripheral areas of Delhis border, it costs a few hundred rupees.Similarly, the costs vary for those wanting an illegal abortion.Delhi is not alone in its anti-girl bias. Sex ratios have declined in 17 states in the past decade, with the biggest falls registered inJammu and Kashmir.Ms Joshi says most offenders are members of the growing middleclass and affluent Indians - they are aware that the technology exists and have the means to pay to find out the sex of their baby and abort if they choose.We have to take effective steps to control the promotion of sex determination by the medical community. And file cases against doctors who do it, Mr George says.Otherwise by 2021, we are frightened to think what it will be like.
Female foeticede is now more widespread in the country than ever before.
17
The practice was restricted to few states a few years ago has now spread all over the country. Girls and women not only face inequity and inequality, they are even denied the right to born if their families do not wish so. In fact many families do not wish their women folk to deliver baby daughters. The Declining Sex Ratio: one of the sensitive indicators of boy preference is the sex ratio. The record shows that the sex ratio or the number of females for each thousand males has gone down consistently over the past decades. In this study I took the interview of 100 people of Rewa city and found that the following factors are resoponsible for female foeticide-Female foeticede is now more widespread in the country than ever before. The practice was restricted to few states a few years ago has now spread all over the country. Girls and women not only face inequity and inequality, they are even denied the right to born if their families do not wish so. In fact many families do not wish their women folk to deliver baby daughters. The Declining Sex Ratio: one of the sensitive indicators of boy preference is the sex ratio. The record shows that the sex ratio or the number of females for each thousand males has gone down consistently over the past decades. In this study I took the interview of 100 people of Rewa city and found that the following factors are resoponsible for female foeticide1. Social Security- Consequent upon the advances in medical science, the termination of unwanted children especially female foetuses through abortion has become common in families to satisfy their preference for sons. 2. Evil of Dowry- Some people think, a girl means accumulation of sufficient resources for the dowry the parents have to give away, when the girl gets married. Therefore, the parents think that the girl is a financial burden for them, where as the boy is an asset who fetches a fabulous dowry for the parents. 3. Financial Dependence of Females on Husband or In laws- In India socio-economic background has been the villain behind the tragic female foeticide. Certain communities want to get rid of female child compelled by the circumstances of dehumanizing poverty, unemployment, superstition and illiteracy. 4. Cultural Factors- the concept of Vanshodharak a male child to perform last rites in Hindus and carry forward Measures to Reduce Female Foeticide. However the national law against prenatal diagnostic technique (regulation and misuse) Act of 1994 is a positive step which enabled the National Human Rights Commission to direct the Medical Council of India to take action against doctors found abusing prenatal diagnostic techniques. There is a need for sustained campaigning and active monitoring of the act. State Governments should realize the importance and priority of the law and not merely treat it with their usual complacency. Structures for implementation of the 1994 law need to be created at the District level. Volunteers have to be actively mobilized to monitor registration and functioning of sex determination clinics at different
18
districts. Cases have to be filed against the violators and social consciousness has to be raised against the crime. Members of the society and the religious leaders have a positive role in creating a morally reformed society. However the national law against prenatal diagnostic technique (regulation and misuse) Act of 1994 is a positive step which enabled the National Human Rights Commission to direct the Medical Council of India to take action against doctors found abusing prenatal diagnostic techniques. There is a need for sustained campaigning and active monitoring of the act. State Governments should realize the importance and priority of the law and not merely treat it with their usual complacency. Structures for implementation of the 1994 law need to be created at the District level. Volunteers have to be actively mobilized to monitor registration and functioning of sex determination clinics at different districts. Cases have to be filed against the violators and social consciousness has to be raised against the crime. Members of the society and the religious leaders have a positive role in creating a morally reformed society. The long term task is to foster a culture of goodness and human dignity which inoculates individuals and institutions against the infection of this despicable human practice. The role of the Akal Takht in Punjab is worth mentioning. The apex religious organization of the Sikhs has issued directives to the community not to indulge in the inhuman and immoral practice of female foeticide and to take stern action against those who would violate this direction i.e. offenders would be ex-communicated. Almost all communities have organizations similar to the Akal Takht, if they made a concerted effort to educate their flock, and if need be boycott those guilty of this crime. a radical social change could come about.
====================== References1. Sabu M. George and Ranbir S., Female Foeticide in Rural Haryana, Dahiya Economic and Political Weekly, Vol. 33, No. 32 (Aug. 8-14, 1998), pp. 21912198http://www.jstor.org/stable/4407077 UNICEF India. UNICEF. Arnold, Fred, Kishor, Sunita, & Roy, T. K. (2002). Sex-Selective Abortions in India.Population and Development Review28(4):759785.doi:10.1111/ j.1728-4457.2002.00759.x.JSTOR3092788. http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/south_asia/4592890.stm The Pre-conception and Prenatal Diagnostic Techniques (Prohibition of Sex Selection) Act, 1994: Answers to Frequently Asked Questions. A Handbook for the Public] Female Foeticide and Infanticide L. S. Vishwanath Economic and Political Weekly, Vol. 36, No. 35 (Sep. 1-7, 2001), pp. 3411-3412 published by Economic and Political Weeklyhttp://www.jstor.org/stable/4411063 orissa gov. India. Dr. Krushma chandra. In Satyamev Jayate Aamir Khan deals with female foeticide - and how. India Today. Retrieved 26 June 2012.
2. 3.
4. 5.
6.
7. 8.
19
9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
Dr. S. Akhilesh, Female Foeticide in India , Women Empowerment, Centre for Research Studies, Rewa 2010 Page 118-127 Dube L (1983) Misadventures in amniocentesis. Economic and Political Weekly 40 (2): 279-80. Kollor T M (1990) Female infanticide: A Psychological analysis. Grass Roots Action, Special issue on Girl child April 3, and pp 3. Kumari R (1995) Rural female adolescence: Indian scenario. Social Change 25 (2): 177-88. Mane P N (1991) Socialization of Hindu women in their childhood: An analysis of Literature. The Journal of Family Welfare 52 (1): 81-96. Puri N (1998) The girl child in India. The Journal of Family Welfare 44 (3): 1-8.
ISSN 0975-4083 lsUVj QkWj fjlpZ LVMht] jhok }kjk fjlpZ tjuy vkWQ vkV~Zl eSustesUV ,.M lks'ky lkbalsl ds fo'ks"kkad ds :i esa fuEufyf[kr nks lanHkZ iqLrdksa dk izdk'ku uoEcj] 2013 esa fd;k tk jgk gSA
(vkbZ-,l-ch-,u- 978&81&87364&59&7)
Contemporary Indian Society and Culture

(ISBN 978-81-87364-60-3) mDr lanHkZ iqLrdksa esa izd k'ku gsrq vki viuk rF; ijd ,oa rdZ ;qDr 'kks/k i= Hkstdj bl vdknfed dk;Z esa lg;ksx dj ldrs gSaA fgUnh Hkk"kk esa 'kks/k i= ,e-,l- oMZ esa QkUV d`frnso 010] djsDVj lkbt 14] Mcy Lis'k_ vaxzsth Hkk"kk esa VkbEl U;w jkseu QkUV lkbt 14] Mcy Lis'k esa HkstsaA
izks- cztxksiky 'kqDy

41@42] j?kqoa'k lnu] fcfN;k] jhok (e-iz-)& 486001
Phone - (07662) 255177, 9425186437 E-mail - gresearchjournal@rediffmail.com gayatripublicationsrewa@rediffmail.com akhilesh_socio@rediffmail.com
Feminism: A Comparative Perspective

* Bandana Gaur
========================================================== Abstract-As far as India is concerned, despite the progress made by Indian feminist movement, women living in modern India still face many issues of discrimination. India's Patriarchal and culture has made the process of gaining land-ownership rights and access to education challenging. In the past two decades, there has also emerged a disturbing trend of sex-selective abortion. To Indian feminist's these are seen as injustices worth struggling against. ========================================================== Introduction- Nearly half of the human resource of a country is its women and a potent resource for nation development and progress. The UNO declare 1975-85 as the Womens decade emphasizing the utilization of this precious resource and to ensure that the benefits of development are equitably distributed between the sexes. At the end of the century, while women may not have attained the dreamed utopia of equality in all spheres of national life, the sensitivities of society regarding this issue has been shapened (Mittra, 2001:230). Today, the global community has accepted the need to empower women and give them their due status in economic, social and political development so that they can thrive harmoniously and live with equality and justice. It is now widely accepted that women have been victim of anti-female prejudice and sex discrimination and her condition is deteriorated. These all things contributed to the rise of womens Liberation Movement (Feminism). Feminism has now emerged as a great phenomenon, process, ideology, movement, etc which aims at providing equal rights for women. There are various ideologies behind it, has a history as well which is dealt here. Objectives1. To know the concept of feminism. 2. To identify the waves of feminism. 3. To study the various types of feminism. 4. To know how women empowered in various spheres of social, political, educational and political life. ===========================
* Associate Professor, Faculty of Social Sciences, Department of Sociology, Dayalbagh Educational Institute, Dayalbagh, Agra (U.P.)
21
Methodology- The present paper is based on secondary data like book, journal, net, internet etc. The diversity within feminism is now well established. The plural of feminism reflects both the contemporary diversity of motivation, method, and experience among feminist academics, and feminisms political commitment to diversity its validation of a multiplicity of approaches, positions, and strategies (Kemp & squires, 1997:3). Feminism is not easy to define because it includes a variety of political perspective and ideas (Andersen, 1983:7). Feminism is a term that has acquired a number of different meanings, many of which indicate key turning points in the history of feminist though (Cud & Andersen, 2005:7). Hole and Levine think that feminism by definition challenges the status quo. It questions the political, social and cultural institutions, way of thinking and the very articulation of those thoughts (Hole & Levine, 1975:225). According to Michele Barrett, feminism seeks to change not simply men or women or both as they exist at present, but seeks to change the relation between them Barrett adds that although the basics for this will be provided by an autonomous womens Liberation movement, the strategy must involve political engagement with men rather than a policy of absolute separatism (Bhagwat, 2004:29). Feminism is a collection of movement aimed at defining, establishing and defining equal political, economic and social rights for women. In addition, feminism seeks to establish equal opportunities for women in education and employment. A feminist is a person which belief and behavior are based on feminism. Feminist though is sometimes characterized as occurring in waves. Feminism as a whole, come in three waves each dealing with different aspects of the same issue. Feminism is a self-conscious ideology and systematic ideology beginning appeared first in France in the 1880s, Great Britain in 1890s, and the United States in 1910. Oxford English Dictionary lists 189 for Feminism, and 1895 for feminism. It was the London Daily News, that coined the term and importing it from France an omatically branded it as dangerous. What our Paris Correspondent describes as a feminist group in the chamber of Deputies. Waves of Feminism The first feminist wave: Votes for women- The First wave is often dated to the publication of Mary Wollstone crafts A Vindication of the Rights women (1792). Under the influence of nineteenth century liberal political philosophy, first wave feminism concerned itself largely with gaining equal political right and economic opportunities for women. Since at this time, the possession of rationality was taken to be the appropriate basis for the attribution of rights, liberal feminists argued for womens equality on the grounds that women have the same capacity to reason as men. Liberal feminist political action brought about many important changes in the situation of women. Not only did it result in womens suffrage in the 1920s, liberal feminists also won property rights for women, more reproductive freedoms, and greater access to education and the
22
professional realm (Cuss & Andresen, 2005:7). The Second Feminist Wave: The Personal Is Political- The term second-wave feminism refers monthly to the radical feminism of the womens liberation movement of the late 1960s and early 1970s (krolokke & Sorensen, 2006:7). Some scholars think that the second wave of feminism can most easily be dated to 1949 with the publication of simone da beauvoirs The Second sex. This movement is sometimes characterized by its efforts to move beyond the first wave and its focus on the political and legal source of womens inequality. Second wave Feminists maintain that, although important, political and legal equality is not enough to end womens oppression. On their view, sexist oppression is not simple rooted in legal and political arrangements as well as unquestioned norms, habits, everyday interaction, and personal relationships. Moreover, second wave feminists criticized first wave feminism for not going for enough in its economic reforms. They argued that feminism must demand full economic equality for women, rather than only simple economic survival. Third, Second wave feminists challenged the public private dichotomy by scrutinizing areas of human social life that were previously seen as political-such as the institution of marriage, motherhood, heterosexual relationships, womens sexuality and so forth. Thus, rather than trying to reform existing political structures, second wave feminists aim to radically & transform almost every aspect of personal and political life. The Third Feminist Wave: Transversal Politics- Third wave Feminism began in the late 1980s by feminists who wanted to make womens diversity or diversity in general more central to feminist theory and politics for example women of color maintained that their experiences, interests and concerns were not fully represented by second wave feminism. Part of the reason is that, historically, second wave feminism was largely represented by middle-class white women who tended to focus on the commonalities among women and their experiences of oppression without taking social circumstances into account. In response to this trend, Feminists of color argued that women from different social groups-social, economic, sexual and so forth-experience different types of oppression. They also questioned whether it makes sense to talk about women as a single unified phenomenon. Other third wave feminists have also questioned the category women. They challenge its very basisnamely. The division of people into sexes and genders and argue that feminism should no longer be viewed as a cohesive political and theoretical movement with common libratory aims for all women. Rather they maintain that we need a feminism that accepts diversity and allows for a multiplicity of feminist goals. Feminism constitutes the political expression of the concerns and interest of women from different region, classes, nationalities and ethnic backgrounds. There is and must be a diversity of feminisms responsive to the different needs and concerns of different women and defined by them for themselves. -
23
Participant at the Nairobi Conference (1985). There are so many types and ways of expressing feminism. They may be liberal feminist, radical feminist, Marxian (socialist) feminist, psychoanalytic feminist, Existentialist feminism, cultural feminist Eco Feminist, Postmodern feminist, black feminist etc. Out of these, liberal, radical and socialist feminist are important. These are described as follows: Liberal Feminist Theory- Liberal feminist theory is a traditional theory, which has evolved from liberation/ liberalism and seeks to copy the liberal principles of justice, liberty and equality to women, without questioning male power. Mary Woustonecrafts book A Vindication of the Rights of Wom, John Stuart Mills The subjection of women, Harriet Taylors Enfranchisement of women and Betty Friedans The Feminine Mystique and the second stage belong to this school. These feminists are visionary architects of liberal feminism who combine feminist ideals with humanist tenets, i.e. gender justice based on humanism. It sees sexism as dysfunctional because it deprives society of one half of its creative workforce (Tondon, 2008: 41-44). In short Liberal Feminism: Socialization is the origin of gender differences The goal-gender equality. Wolstonecraft believe that proper education, proper training in critical thinking, is the most important single item on the feminine agenda. There are some basic problems with liberal feminist theory the first is that a strictly liberal analysis left the private sphere untouched. Secondly liberal left the question whether there really are significant onthological differences between women and men unanswered. Radical Feminist Theory- Radical feminist theory is chiefly concerned with the issues arising out of pornography, prostitution, sexual harassment, rape and women beating. In order to be liberated from sexual abuse & oppression, radical feminists prescribe a strategy to Create an exclusively female sexuality through celibacy, auto- eroticism, or lesbianism. They are against heterosexuality and traditional roles of women as faithful house wives and child-bearing machines Shulamith Firestone, a radical feminist who has written the Dielectric of sex, argues that women can be liberated by a biological revolution. Kate Millet insists that the roots of womens oppression are deeply buried in gender system of patriarchy. In her book sexual politics, she says that women will be liberated only when gender discrimination is eliminated as its is constructed and fostered by patriarchy. This ideology is weak as it separates women from the mainstream rather than integrating them into it. Radical feminism seeks the oppression of womens as fundamental and the most basic form of oppression. All other forms of oppression stem from male dominance. The purpose of this oppression is to obtain psychological ego satisfaction, and strength and self-esteem. The radical Feminists conclude that womens
24
liberation requires a biological revolution. They believe that only through technology, women can be librated from the fundamental in equalities of the bearing and rearing of children. In short: Radical Feminism: Male power and privilege are viewed as the bases of social relations. The goal: the abolition of male supremacy. Focus on: establishing women- centered beliefs and system. Marxist (Social) School of Feminism- This type of feminism improves intellectual understanding of relations between class and sex. Friedrich Engels. The origin of the Family, Private property, and the state and Eli Zaretskys Socialist revolution point out that woman are often looked at and treated as property of man. As such a womens position is reduced to that of a commodity mean to be used and disposed. It advocates the economic independence of women. Marxist feminism is most appropriately called, socialist feminism to point up that is no longer presents as undiluted Marxism but a Marxism modified by radical feminism (Tondon, 2008:47). Socialist feminists believe that liberation of women will come from an equal role in production. But it ignores the fact that the sexual division of labour in the home not only discriminates against women on the job and in political life, but it also perpetuates one-sided development of human personality. In Short; Marxist Feminism: Class accounts for womens status and function in society. Monogamous marriage is about private property. The family is a microcosm of societys large class relation. Class and gender interest There are various other feminist. These are discussed in brief in the following lines: Multiracial Feminism Focus on the intersections of race, class and gender. How does the experience of domination shape the life experiences of people of color? Importance of human agency i.e. human beings as and creative. Postmodern Feminism Women as other- notes advantage of otherness. Feminist standpoint Theory suggests that the location the knower shapes what is known: not all perspective is equally valid or complete. Also called French Feminism. Cultural Feminism There are fundamental differences between and women, and womens differences should be celebrated. There is an attempt to recover lost or marginalized womens works and
25
traditions and create a culture that narrates and supports womens experiences. Lesbian Feminism Lesbian-Feminist politics is a political critique of the institution and ideology of heterosexuality as cornerstone of male supremacy. Eco-Feminism Eco-feminist theory rests on the basic principle that patriarchal ways are harmful to women, children and other living things. Creates new ways of thinking about the relationship between humans and nature, inducing animal, replacing the dualistic objectifying mode, characteristics of western science. Black Feminism This proceeds from the assumption that Black women experience a unique form of oppression in discursive and non-discursive practices alike because they are victims at once of sexism, racism and by extension classicism. They seek particularized methodologies to that might reveal the ways in which that oppression is represented in literary texts. They call into question a variety of standards of valuation that mainstream feminist and andocentric Afro-American Theory might naturalize. Feminism In Indian Scenario- Feminism in India is a set of movements aimed at defining, establishing, and defending equal political, economic and social rights and equal opportunities for Indian women. It is the pursuit of womens right within the society of India. Like their feminist counterparts all over the world. Feminists in India Seek gender equality: the right to work fro equal wages, the right to equal political rights. Indian feminists also have fought against culture-specific issues within Indians patriarchal society, such as inheritance laws and the practice of widow immolation known as sati (Wikipedia). Unlike western feminist movement, Indians movement was first initiated by men, and later joined by women. The efforts of these men included abolishing sati, child marriage, disfiguring of widows, and promoted widow remarriage, womens education and equal rights of women to own property and many more basic rights in matters such as abortion. Some important Indian feminist include lalitambika Altharhanan, Barnita Bagchi, Jasodhara Bagchi, Rita Benarji , Saroj Nalini Dutta, Padma Gole, Brinda Karat, Vina Mazumdar, Kamini Ray, tarabai Shinde (Wrote Stripurush Tulna) and many more. Conclusion- Feminism is a collection of movement and ideology aimed at defining, establishing, and defending equal rights-political, social and economic for women. Feminism seeks to establish equal opportunities for women in education and employment. There are various ethnically specific or multi-cultural forms of feminism. Feminist movements have resulted in the emergence of Pro-feminism and anti feminism reactions. As far as India is concerned, despite
26
the progress made by Indian feminist movement, women living in modern India still face many issues of discrimination. Indias Patriarchal and culture has made the process of gaining land-ownership rights and access to education challenging. In the past two decades, there has also emerged a disturbing trend of sex-selective abortion. To Indian feminists these are seen as injustices worth struggling against.
====================== References1. Mittra, Ranjana (2001). The Faminine Organization : will it help career women overcome Gender Bias?. In Abha Avasthi & A.K. Srivastava (Ed.), Modernity, Feminism and women Empowerment. Jaipur Rawat publications. Kemp, Sandra & Squires, Judith. (1997). Feminisms. New York : Oxford University Press. Cudd. Ann. E. & Andreasen, Robin o (2005). Feminist Theory: A Philosophical Anthology. Australia : Blackwell Publishing. Anderson, Margaret L. (2000). Thinking About women ; Sociological Perspectives of sex and gender. USB : Allyn & Bascon. Hole, Judith & Levine, Ellen. (1975). Rebirth of feminism, New York : Times Book Co. Bhagwat, Vidyut. (2000). Feminist Socail Thought : Jaipur : Rawat Publication. Krolokke, chalotte & sorensen, Ann Scott. (2006). Gender Communication Theories and Analyses : from silence to Performance. New Delhi : Sage Publication, Inc. Waves of feminism. (n.d.) Retrived on 12-11-2012. Retrived from WWW.d.uno.edu/~jwilson2/soc%20of%20women.ppt Feminist Perspectives on the family. (n.d.). Retrived on 12-11-2012. retrived from WWW.educationforum.co.uk/sociology_2/feminism%5b1%D.ppt Feminism in India (n.d.) Wikipedia, the free Encyclopedia. Retrived on 09-112012. Retrived from www.en.wikipedia.org/wiki/feninism_in_india. Tondon, Nehru. (2008). Feminism : A paradigm Shift. New Delhi: Atlantic publishers and Distributors (P) Ltd.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
8. 9. 10. 11.
Women Empowerment: A Myth or a Reality

* Arvind Khanna ** Parveen Kaur Khanna
========================================================== Abstract-From the middle ages to the recent times, women have been colonized by various forms of patriarchal domination; her sphere of life has been bound by the protective and prohibitive walls raised by the moralists. With the passage of time, womens lives are radically transformed by developmental change due to modernization of social values. Women emancipation and women empowerment have become the catchwords today but are these not just the illusions? Are the women of today really emancipated? Are they really empowered? ========================================================== I was that woman at whom the Vedas, the Avesta the Bible and the Quran were flung; their God was the bogeyman who kindly sent male prophets To keep me humble in my place Debjani Chatterjee: I was that woman Since times immemorial, ever since the legend of Eve and Pandora, woman has been accused of earning the wrath of God, has been continuously associated with folly and moral weakness and hence been subjugated in the society. As Simone de Beauvoir remarks: She (Woman) is defined and differentiated with reference to man and not he with reference to her; She is the incidental, the inessential as opposed to the essential. He is the Subject, he is the Absolute, she is the other. She further adds: One is not born but rather becomes a woman it is civilization as a whole that produces this creature describes as feminine. Ones sex, as we are aware, is determined by anatomy, but the prevailing concept of gender is largely a cultural construct, that was generated by ===========================
* ** Associate Professor, PG Department of English, Govt. Mohindra College, Patiala. Associate Professor, Department of Management and Humanities, SLIET, (Deemed to be university), Sangrur.
28
omnipresent Patriarchal biases of our civilization. From the middle ages to the recent times, women have been colonized by various forms of patriarchal domination, her sphere of life has been bound by the protective and prohibitive walls raised by the moralists. The purdah system which emerged from the feminine code of modesty has become akin to feet binding in China and chastity bell in Europe to keep women not only spiritually but also physically immobile. Sati Pratha, child marriages, maltreatment of girls, enforced widowhood, temple prostitutes - Devdasis and harem/ polygamy or polyandry are the different forms of subjugation and marginalization of women so much so that the term graha laxmi cunningly juxtaposes womens deification and her confinement in domesticity. In fact, in India, taboos laid down by Manu were tightened during the centuries that followed and consequently feminine in Indian culture has come to be identified as passive, timid, emotional and conventional. Time changes and it has changed. Gradually the murmur the protest, the roar inside the weaker sex, the other has been gradually becoming louder and louder and has been heard through her participation in the development process. Since, the gender based critique from the west, women everywhere have been resisting, fighting to assert their identities, subverting oppressive agendas to retain their anatomy and independence. Beginning with a focus on the rights of peasant women, on the rights of the working class where women did two third of work but received just ten percent of wages and own just one percent of property, on the right to vote and against violence against women, they have moved further and the arena has been widened to include literacy, eco feminism, political participation and reservation in the Parliament. As Betty Friedan remarks, We can no longer ignore that voice within woman that says I want something more than my husband and my children and my home. All their lived experiences, understanding of their physical and mental abilities everything that they know and experience about themselves is filtered through their situatedness and women all over the world have felt called upon to express their identity, to protest against the otherness. In Indian context, from the most legendary feminine archetypes of the male-authored texts, - the epic women Sita and Draupadi, Damyanti the suffering woman, Shakuntala the idyllic heroine, Savitri the Pativrata Indian women have traversed a long time and proved to the world that the hand that rocks the cradle can rule the world. Through an ideology prevailing such writings which have been considered great literature and which until recently have been written almost by men for men, they find a representation in womens writings where carefully avoiding the straight jacketed mould of images of Indian woman construct by imperialist and naturalist Patriarchy we find a protest against the patriarchal impositions and suppressions. Instead of being submissive, docile and subjugated objects, we find assertive and
29
aggressive subjects exploring different aspects of female sexuality. In a society where class and caste issues receive a greater critical appreciation, the power politics of dividing the subaltern category are now being questioned. In the modern society, women have figured as the professional career women often juggling work with domestic responsibilities of home and family. The concept of the faithful, patient, long suffering wife is slowly dying and the women of today apparently have moved ahead. The setting up of various women research centres, women corporations, the pioneering of feminist journals, the various forums against oppression of women, research on women histories and their writings, and the recognition of the women writers at the international level seem like an act of self-improvement. The female principle in the various mythical forms seems to be demystified so much so that in order to create a parallel identity the Post- feminist woman in todays globalized world is catering not only free and organizational professions but also ascriptive ones. These days, women are participating in the work force in large number, but also for the first time entering what was hitherto considered an almost exclusively male preserve. Womens lives are radically transformed by developmental change due to modernization of social values. Women emancipation and women empowerment have become the catchwords today but are these not just the illusions? Are the women of today really emancipated? Are they really empowered? A look into the reality seems to say otherwise. The explosion in forced trafficking and sexual slavery, the increasing number of rape victims, domestic violence, and female foeticide seem to tell a different story. Media texts these days project women as either mercenary, scheming shrews the home breakers or as a commodity, the object in the commercials. The image of woman as Claire Johnston remarks; operates in these texts as a sign which draws its meaning not from the reality of womens lives but from the desires and fantasies of men. Double standards are there as the Patriarchs of today on the one hand talk about free woman but at the same time tend to restrict her in the ideal image of free woman. On the one hand they support a break through the glass ceiling and on the other go for the retention of classic tropes of femininity. Further, as a protest against the male hegemony some women are indulging in girl power and deviant activities. In their effort to destabilize the hierarchical thinking, these women try to explore different aspects of female sexuality and hence advocate a redefinition of gender roles. Lesbianism, pornography and extra marital relationships are some of the diversifications. The way to progress lies not in making gender trouble but as Judith Butler has famously called it, in destabilizing the terms masculine and feminine , and on the contrary in making more room for the female alongside the male genesis. The need of the hour is not the hypocrisy, not just a myopic blinkered gaze but a vision in totality. Development is needed not only in the social set up
30
but also in the mind set ups of the male custodians of power and for a smooth journey into the skies, the haze has to be cleared. The need of the hour is not to promote the change through gender hostility but the social rearrangement that cuts across gender boundaries.
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Beauvoir, Simone de. The Second Sex. translated and ed. by H.M.Parshley. 1953 ; rpt. London: Pan Books, 1988. Braidoti , Rosi. Nomadic Subjects. New York: Columbia University Press, 1994. Butler, Judith. Gender Trouble: Feminism and the Subversion of Identity. London: Routledge, 1990. Friedan, Betty. The Feminine Mystique. New York: Norton, 1963.
ISSN 0975-4083
Volume-IX, Coming in September, 2013
A Registered Reviewed Research Journal

Six monthly Bi-lingual Journal (English/Hindi Editions)
Indexed & Listed at: Ulrichs International Periodicals Directory , ProQuest, U.S.A. Title Id : 715204
The Aims & Objectives-To provide a plateform for the publication of original unpublished Research Papers, Summary of Research Project, Thesis and Book review relating to all subjects of Social & Life Sciences and to promote interdisciplinary research work. Book Review can be published on receipt of two copies of concerned book. Guidelines & Member Ship Fee -Authors/ Researchers can contact in the Registered Office given below-
Please address all Communications -
Prof. Braj Gopal Shukla

Chief Editor
Research Journal Social and Life Sciences
41/42, Raghuwans Sadan, Shantikunj, Bichhiya, Rewa 486 001 (M.P.)
Adolescents Problems: A Comparative Perspective

* Priyanka Tiwari
========================================================== Abstract- The objective of the present study is to examine the problems faced by adolescents in the area of school & social life. Adolescence is a process of transition from childhood to adulthood. Adolescence has been regarded as a trouble some age-a time in life-span when the person is hard to live or work with.After a long period of relatively stable behaviour the child suddenly becomes unbalanced, unpredictable & unstable as he emerges into adolescent. In this process many challenges creep in & make it an age of problem demanding lots of adjustments on several fronts. The aim of this research is to know the influence of gender on school & social problem faced by youth. To negate the effect of extraneous variables, sample was restricted to students in the age group of 15 to 17. Sample was selected on the basis of Incidental-Cum-Purposive Sampling Method. Data was collected from 100 adolescents by using "Youth Problem Inventory" (YPI) of Verma M. The data was analyzed on the basis of scoring key of YPI. Two hypotheses were formulated: (i) Adolescent girl will have more school problem than boys. (ii) Adolescent boys will show more social problem than girls. As far as school problem is concerned most of the students had fear of teacher as well as of school activities. Male respondents showed their dissatisfaction on rejection & indifference shown by their teachers. In social context most of the respondents feel that their economic condition determines their social status. The article will focus on the other findings of the study in detail & will try to propose some suggestive measures in this regard. ========================================================== Introduction- Adolescence is the spring of life. Hurlock (1955) has defined it as: Adolescence is both a way of life & span of time in the physical & psychological development of an individual. It represents a period of growth & change in nearly all aspects of childs physical, mental, social, & emotional life. It is time of new experience, new responsibilities & new relationships with adult as well as with peers. The beginning of adolescence has been regarded as troublesome age a time in life span where the person is hard to live or work with. After a long period of relatively stable behaviour the child suddenly becomes unbalanced, unpredictable & unstable as he emerges into ===========================
* Assistant Professor, Amity Institute of Psychology and Allied Sciences, Noida
32
adolescent. During adolescence, there is movement away from the dependency of childhood towards the autonomy of adulthood. Adolescence is full of challenges for any child. The change is fast, everywhere & hard to keep up with. The body changes in response to increasing; levels of hormones: the thinking process, changes as the child is able to think more broadly & in an abstract way. The social life changes as new people & peers come into scope. Yet the child needs to deal with every single one of these changes, all at the same time. Adolescents yearn to develop a unique and independent identity, separate from their parents. They love their parents, but they dont simply want to follow their foot step, and sometimes even challenge their parents.The climate of home directly influences adolescents behaviour pattern & adjustments to life slowly. If the home climate is favourable the adolescent will react to all types of problems & frustration in a calm & philosophical manner & also in tolerant, happy & cooperative way. Purpose-The purpose of present research is to know the influence of sex on school and social problem faced by adolescent studying in different schools. Hypothesis-To obtain the purpose of the research following hypothesis has been formulated:1. Adolescent girl will have more school problem than boys. 2. Adolescent boys will show more social problem than girls. Method- Sample-A sample of 100 +2 students in the age ranging from 15 to 17 yrs. was selected on the basis of Incidental-Cum-Purposive Sampling Method. Tool- Youth Problem Inventory (YPI) of Verma M.was used for the collection of data. Discussion & Interpretation- Result was analysed by using the manual of YPI. The discussion is based upon table I, II, III, IV respectively. Hypothesis one is discussed on the basis of table I & II, hypothesis 2 is discussed on the basis of table III & IV. Table No. 1 Maximum Score Obtained & there %
Area Max. Possible Score by an individual 40 Max. Score obtained by Boys 526 Max. Score obtained by Girls 550 % of Score (Boys) 26.30 % of Score (Girls) 27.50 Diff. of %
B (School)
1.20
From the above table it can be said that adolescent girls had more social problem than boys. The maximum score achieved by any of the respondent in school area is 40. Boys scored 526 (26.30%) and girls scored 550 (27.50%). There is a difference of 1.20% between the two sexes. So the first hypothesis - Adolescent girls will have more school problem than boys is proved. Table No. II
33
No. Of Girls & Boys having problem in Sub-area & Score Obtained
Area Sl. No. SubArea No. of boys having problem in each SubArea 23 39 21 20 18 35 44 30 Scores obtained by boys in each Sub-Area 35 109 43 36 31 77 139 57 No. of girls having problem in each Sub-Area 26 41 26 20 22 26 44 29 Scores obtained by girls in each Sub-Area 30 120 43 47 41 48 163 56
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BF BFT BR BI BH BIS BS BHA
The above table revels the number of sample (girls & boys) having problem in different subgroup of school area (B). A comparative analysis will prove how adolescent girl have more school problem than adolescent boys. 23 boys had fear of college activities (BF) with obtained score of 35, whereas 26 girls scored 30 in this area. Number of girls having problem in this area is more than that of boys. Though, the intensity of this problem is higher among the boys. Girls had more fear of teacher (BFT) than boys as 39 boys scored 109 in this area compared to 41 girls scoring 120 in this area. Both girls & boys were some what equal in the area of rejection & indifference shown by teacher (BR). 26 girls & 21 boys obtained a score of 43 respectively. The problem of incompetence of teacher (BI) was same in both the sex but the intensity was more among girls. 20 girls obtained a score of 47 whereas 20 boys obtained a score of 36 in this sub-area.In the area of behaviour of teacher (BH) 22 girls showed problem in this area with a score of 41 on contrary 18 boys scored 31 in same area. In the area of isolation (BIS)boys reported to have more problem than girls 35 boys scored 77 while only 26 girls has problem in this area with obtained score of 48. The intensity of subject difficulties (BS) was much higher among girls than boys. 44 boys & girls scored 139 & 163 respectively in this area. In the last sub-area other handicaps at school / college (BHA) both 29 girls & 30 boys scored 56 & 57 respectively. Thus, table no II also supports hypothesis 1. On the basis of table I & II, it can be say that adolescent girls has more school problem than boys. Though the difference is just of 1.20% yet there are few sub-areas where adolescent girls lack behind the boys, like in sub area- fear of teacher, incompetence of teacher, behaviour of teacher & difficulty in college / school subjects. In all these sub areas the obtained score of girls were higher than of boys except in sub area BIS which is for Isolation. So our hypothesis Adolescent girls will have more school problems than boys, is supported by the study. Table No. III
34
Maximum Score Obtained & there %

Area Max. Possible Score by an individual 10 Max. Score obtained Boys 153 Max. Score obtained Girls 91 % of Score (Boys) 30.60 % of Score (Girls) 18.20 Diff. of %
C (Social)
12.40
From the above table it can be said that boys had more social problem than girls. The maximum score achieved by one respondent in social area is 10. Boys scored 153 (30.60%) and Girls sample scored 91 (18.20%). There is a difference of 12.40% between the two sexes. So, second hypothesis Adolescent boys will show more social problems than girls is proved. Table No. IV No. Of Girls & Boys having problem in Sub-area & Score Obtained
Area Sl. No. SubArea No. of boys having problem in each Sub-Area 41 39 Scores obtained by boys in each SubArea 86 68 No. of girls having problem in each SubArea 27 27 Scores obtained by girls in each Sub-Area 53 36
C Social
1 2
CS CI
The above table revels the number of sample (boys & girls) having problem in different subgroup of social area (C). A comparative analysis will prove how adolescent boys have more social problem than adolescent girls in social area. 41 boys had problem in sub-area CS (Social Inferiority) and total score obtained by them was 86 on the contrary 27 girls had problem in this area with total score of 53. Thus this indicates that boys had more inferiority related problem than girls. In the area of Social Isolation 39 boys reported to have problem in this area with a score of 68 as compare to 27 girls with obtained score of 36. Score indicate that boys found themselves to be more socially isolated than girls. All findings indicate that adolescent girls had less social problem compare to boys. So they are more adjustable to social environment than boys. Thus, table no. IV also supports hypothesis no.2. Conclusion & Suggestion- On the basis of above finding it can be said that adolescent girls had more school related problem than boys. Boys are found to be well adjusted to school environment compare to girls. Adolescent boys were found to be high on problems related to social environment. So we can say that girls are more adjustable to social environment than boys. One interesting finding of the present study is that adolescent boys found themselves
35
to be isolated in school as well as in social life. Approximately 70 % of boys faced problem of isolation in school & around 78% boys found to be socially isolated. As adolescence is a period of significant change & reorganisation in family & other relationship, one should handle these teens very carefully. The researcher has given few suggestions which can be beneficial to the teens as well as to other who are related to them.
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Baron A. Robery - Psychology 5th Edition 2007 Bengalee, M.D - Common Psychological problem in School children. Hurlock E. - Development Psychology, A Life Span Approach. Tata McGraw Hill Publication Co. Ltd., New Delhi 1981 Rogers D. - The Psychology of Adolescence. Appleton Century Crafts, New York 1962. Varma, V.P. - A Psychological study of Home, Job, Friendship & Personal Problems in late Adolescence. Unpublished PhD Thesis, University of London, 1968 Verma, M. - Youth Problem Inventory www. Education.nic.in www.indiaparenting.co.in
6. 7. 8.


Chief Editor
Psychoticism, Reinforcement and Vigil ance

* Jago Choudhary
========================================================== Abstract- The present experiment was designed to study vigilance as a function of psychoticism and reinforcement. Initially, Eysenck Personality Questionnaire was administered to 400 university girl students, to select the final sample of 20 subjects-high and low on Psychoticism. The subjects were selected to work under two conditions of reinforcement-positive and negative. Results indicated that subjects low on Psychoticism were supervisor in vigilance. There were no difference reinforcement conditions. The two factors interaction of Psychoticism and reinforcement also emerged significant. ========================================================== Personality has been recognised as a very important determiner of human behaviour both in the laboratory as well as in actual life. Eysenck (1960) defines personality as a more or less stable and enduring organisation of a persons character and temperament, intellect and physique which determine his unique adjustment to the environment. Eysenck posits three major dimensions of personality: Extraversion/Introversion (E/I), Neuroticism/Stability (N) and Psychoticism. Earlier Eysenck developed questionnaires to measures E/I and N dimensions. In 1975, Eysenck and Eysenck developed the Eysenck personality questionnaires (E.P, Q.) whose main advantage was the introduction of new variable, P for Psychoticism. Psychoticism refers to an underlying personality trait present in varying degress in all persons; if present in marked degree it may predispose a person to the development of Psychoticism abnormalities. A high P score may be described as being solitary, not caring for people; he is often troublesome, not fitting in anywhere. He may be cruel and inhumane, lacking in feeling and empathy and altogether insensitive. He is hostile to others, even his own kith and kin, and aggressive even to loved ones. He has a liking for odd and unusual things and a disregard for danger; he likes to make a fool of other people and to upset them. Socialization is a concept which is relatively alien to both adults and children who score high on Psychoticism. Empathy, feelings to guilt, sensitivity to other people and notions which are strange and unpredictable to them. The experimental and social ===========================
* Head, Department of Psychology Jagdam College, Chapra
37
correlates of Psychoticism reveal that high P scores are poorer in vigilance and attention, have abnormal perceptual judgements, are impulsive, aggressive, and hostile, are drugs addicts, alcoholisms and have more tough minded social attitudes (Eysenck and Eysenck, 1975). This description implies that behaviour of high P score is unpredictable as they are impulsive and not amendable to principal of socialization. Their responses to stimuli would probably be different and peculiar. Eysenck also maintains that the type of reinforcement which is most effective depends on the personality type of the individual. Many studies have been done in the personality dimensions of Extraversion/Introversion and Neuroticism. Extraverts outperform introverts in positive reinforcement. Neurotics are sensitive to both reward and punishment. As far as the Psychoticism dimension is concerned, very little work has been done in this area.Vigilance research has assumed greater importance and emphasis these days, considering its practical implications in performance of many tasks. Vigilance has been defined variously: as performance on monitoring tasks, as attention over extended periods of time and as a state of the organism-a readiness to respond to infrequent, low intensity signals occurring at unpredictable temporal intervals. Vigilance is required for successful performance in a variety of situations and jobs like air defence system, inspection of products in industry, and proof reading, all of which are examples of vigilance tasks. Vigilance has also been used as an experimental paradigm of attention and bears a close similarity to the requirements of the classroom. Both require that children sustain attention over a long period of time, sit quietly, watch for critical signals and ignore irrelevant events (Brackup and Knopf, 1978). Keeping in view the importance of the phenomenon of vigilance, the present experiment was designed to study the effect of Psychoticism and reinforcement on vigilance. Sample: Initially, the Eysenck personality questionnaire (Eysenck and Eysenck, 1975) was administered to 400 university girls. Mean was calculated for the sample and on the basis of mean SD, subjects high and low on Psychoticism were selected. They were controlled on E and N, only female subjects were used for this study. Material: Eysenck personality questionnaire (Eysenck and Eysenck, 1975) was used for studying. Vigilance was measured through a visual vigilance task involving signal detection. In this cognitive task, series of numbers 1 to 9 were written randomly on this paper. The signal was number 7. Design: The present experiment was designed to study vigilance as a function of Psychoticism and reinforcement. High and low subjects on Psychoticism were selected to work under two conditions of Reinforcement: positive and negative. Thus a 2 x 2 factorial design was employed. Number of subjects in each conditions were 5 and the total number of subjects were 20. The levels of reinforcement were manipulated through differential verbal instructions.
38
Procedure: The subjects were first administered EPQ after establishing a rapport with them. Then the visual vigilance task was administered for 5 minutes. There were of 1 minute each. Hundred percent reinforcement was used. Table-1 ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE FOR VIGILANCE TASK IN THE PSYCHOTICISM GROUP Sources of sum of varience squares Psychoticism 15568.20 Reinforcement 1.800 P x Re 38544.20 Error 62092.00 Total 116206.20 Mean sum F-ratio Level of of squares significance 1 15568.20 4.011 n.s. 1 1.800 0.00 n.s. 1 38544.20 9.93 .01 16 3880.75 16 6116.115 Table-2 CONTINGENCEY TABLE SHOWING INTERACTION BETWEEN PSYCOTICISM AND REINFIRCEMENT Positive Reinforcement Negative Reinforcement P+ 200.2 288.6 244.4 p343.8 256.6 300.20 272.0 272.6 Subjects in the positive reinforcement category were reinforced by the Experimenter who said good, or well done after trial. Subjects in the negative reinforcement category were told Bad, hopeless or No good. Results & Discution- Table 1 shows ANOVA for the Psychoticism group. It shows that F ratio for Psychoticism emerged insignificant, with means favouring subjects low on Psychoticism. F-ratio for reinforcement also emerged insignificant. However, F ratio for the 2 factor interaction emerged highly significant (F= 9.93, p < .01). Contingency table shows that highest mean scores were obtained by Ss low on Psychoticism in the positive reinforcement condition, followed by high P scores in the negative reinforcement condition. Contingency table also shows that low P scores performed better n the positive reinforcement condition whereas high P scorers performed better in the negative reinforcement condition. One may explain this by the fact that through generally positive reinforcement facilities vigilance in the Psychoticism group, the trend is reserved because of their unusual response patterns. Further research is, however required before one can give a plausible explanation for this phenomena. Df
====================== References1. Brackp, E.S., & Knopf, I.J. the effects of extraneous speech On visual vigilance
39
2. 3. 4.
performance of child. Child development, 1978,49, 505-508. Eysenck, H.J. Experiments in personality, vol. I and II. London: Routledge and Kegan Paul, 1960. Eysenck, H.J. & Eysenck, S.B.G. Manual of the Eysenck . Personality questionnaires. San Diego : Educational And Industrial Testing services, 1975. Eysenck, H.J. & Eysenck, S.B.G. Psychoticism as a Dimension of personality. London : Hodder and soughton Educational, 1976.
ISSN 0975-4083 lsUVj QkWj fjlpZ LVMht] jhok }kjk fjlpZ tjuy vkWQ vkV~Zl eSu stesUV ,.M lks'ky lkbalsl ds fo'ks"kkad ds :i esa fuEufyf[kr nks lanHkZ iqLrdksa dk izdk'ku uoEcj] 2013 esa fd;k tk jgk gSA
(vkbZ-,l-ch-,u- 978&81&87364&59&7)

(ISBN 978-81-87364-60-3) mDr lanHkZ iqLrdksa esa izdk'ku gsrq vki viuk rF; ijd ,oa rdZ ;qD r 'kks/k i= Hkstdj bl vdknfed dk;Z esa lg;ksx dj ldrs gSaA fgUnh Hkk"kk esa 'kks/k i= ,e-,l- oMZ esa QkUV d`frnso 010] djsDVj lkbt 14] Mcy Lis'k_ vaxzsth Hkk"kk esa VkbEl U;w jkseu QkUV lkbt 14] Mcy Lis'k esa HkstsaA

Sexual Harassment of Women at the Work Place in India- An Analytical Study

* Manisha Saini ** Pinki Sagar
========================================================== Abstract- Although sexual harassment of Women is very sensitive issue, and off late has had a lot of Prominence most workplace often fails to acknowledge sexual harassment as a concern. Overall more than 80 percent of the respondents reported the need for a separate law for dealing with sexual harassment work place it added. ========================================================== Introduction-The status of women in India has been subject to many great changes over the past few millennia, from equal status with men in ancient times through the low points of the medieval period of the equal right by many reformers, the history of women in India has been eventful. In modern India, women have adorned high offices in India including the President, Prime Minister, Speaker of the Lok Sabha and leader of the Opposition as of 2011, the speaker of the Lok Sabha and leader of the Opposition in Lok Sabha (Lower house of Parliament) both our women. However, women in India continue to face discrimination and other social challenges and are often victims of abuse and vialent crimes and according to global poll conducted by THOMSON REUTERS. India is the Fourth Most dangerous country in the world for women and the worst country for women among the G-20 countries. Women are routinely subjected to a variety of crimes. All of them sexual harassment at work place is gravest which destroys the victim mentally as well as physically and her family also suffers. Sexual harassment includes both physical violence and subtle forms of non physical violence, including economics and professional injuries. It is a demonstration of power and control and above all it exemplifies a form of gender discrimination or gender inequality. Objectives & Scope- The present study attempts to focus the attention on the womens search for self identity and their struggle for survival with dignity and development. A general understanding of the problem of sexual harassment of women at work place, the India approach to the problem and the initiatives taken by the National Human Right Commission (NHRC). Sexual harassment ===========================
* ** Lecturer, Meerut (UP) Research Scholar, Meerut (UP)
41
at the work place is on a rise in India due to social forces encouraging power based relationship between man and women. Women who are victims of sexual harassment at the work place have in extreme cases even quit their jobs. However, more women ignore sexual harassment hoping that it would be a one-time incident or avoid the harasser or avoid going to places where the harasser could be this affects her work performance. She may also shield herself by seeking protection of a senior or a powerful person with in or out side her work place. Which is some cases many also prove to be disadvantageous to the victim there are very few women who make a formal protest in the organization against the harasser. Women do not report cases of sexual harassment for fear of loosing employment or due to threats from the harasser. In many cases they might feel embarrassed, helpless and powerless. The victim might also feel that she would have misunderstood the situation or might blame herself for the situation. Also women might not complaint as they do not trust the system or feel that reporting will not change the system anyway. Crimes Against Women- Police records show high incidence of crimes against women in India. The National crime records Bureau reported in 1998 the growth rate of crimes against women would be higher than the population growth rate by 2010. Acid Throwing- The Thomas Reuters foundation survey says India is the fourth most dangerous place in the world for women to live in as women belonging to any class, caste or creed and religion can be victims of this cruel from of violence and disfigurement a premeditated crime intended to kill or main her permanently and act as a lesson to put her in her place in India. Dowry- In 1961, the governments of India passed the dowry prohibition act making the dowry demands in wedding arrangements illegal However, many cares of dowry related domestic violence, suicides and murdered have been reported. In the 1980s, numerous such cases were reported. In 1985, the Dowry prohibition (maintenance) of lists of presents to the bride and bride groom rules were framed. A 1997 report claimed that at least 5,000 women die each year because of dowry deaths, and at least a dozen dies each day in kitchen fires thought to be international. Child Marriage- Child marriage has been traditionally prevalent in India and continues to this day historically, young girls would live with their parents until they reached puberty. In the part the child widow were condemned to a life of great agong shaving heads, living in isolation and shunned by the society. Domestic Violence- The incidents of domestic violence are higher among the lower socio-economic classes (SECs) the protection of women domestic violence act 2005 came into force on 26 October 2006. Trafficking- The immoral traffic (prevention) act was passed in 1956, However many cases of trafficking of young girls and women have been reported. There women are either forced into prostitution, domestic work or child labour.
42
Female Infanticides and Sex Selective Abortions- India has a highly masculine sex ratio the chief reason being that many women die before reaching adulthood tribal societies in other caste groups. This is in spite of the fact that tribal communities have far lower levels of income, literacy and health facilities. Cause- So, there are so many safeguards available to a woman in India but most of womens are not aware about their rights due to so many reasons like illiteracy, poverty, dependency of males etc. resulted the exploitation of many women in every field of life. Many social institutions provides there for the improvement the condition of women by aware them about their rights along with this Govt. also. Constitutional and Legal Safeguards for Women- Sexual harassment of any women at the work place is a gross violation of the fundamental rights guaranteed under part-III of the constitution. It is a clear violation of the right under articles 14, 15, 21 of the constitution. Such violence therefore attracts the remedy under article 32. Apart from the above article 42 also provides for just and human condition of work and maternity relief. India is also a party of various International conventions and human rights instruments aimed at securing the right women. Along with this I.P.C. 1860 which contains laws for punishment for sexual harassment of women at work place. Section 294, 354, 375 and section 509 are the relevant for safety of women in (Vishakha V state of Rajasthan 1997 VII AD Sc 53) supreme court decided that sexual harassment of women at work place is human rights violation. Also in human rights Act 1993 sec2 (d) it is mandatory for every organization, Government Private, Industrial or educational to have a sexual harassment complaint committee pursuant to the Vishakha Judgment. The Central Civil Service (Conduct) Rules 1964 were aim amended in 1998 to incorporate Rule 3 which prohibits sexual harassment of working women. This rule invariable applies to all women whether working in a Govt. set up or coming in contract with Govt. offices. In order to consider and clarity the issues of sexual harassment of women at work place the National Human Rights Commission convened meetings with various department of the Govt. of India like the department of Personnel and Training (DOPT), educational department, institutions, like the department of secondary and higher education. Ministry of Human Resources Development, UGC, CBSE, Directorate of education, National Capital Territory (NCT) of Delhi etc. besides meetings with the legal fraternity. Some other Safeguards for women- The state is empowered to make special provision for women under article 15(3) consequently the state has introduced reservations for women in Public Employment, in admissions to Educational Institution and the legislatures atlest at the local self-Government level certain other organic laws as Industrial Dispute Act 1947;
43
Factories Act 1948; Plantation Labour Act 1951; Mines Act 1952; Maternity benefit Act 1961; Biri and sigar workers (conditions of employment) Act 1966; Equal remuneration Act 1976; Indecent representation of women (Prohibitation) Act 1987; Delhi Prohibitation Eve-Toasting Act 1988; Dowry Prohibitation Act 1961; The medical termination Act 1976; Commission of sati (Prevention) Act 1956; The indecent representation of women Act 1986; Domestic violence protection Act 2005; Indian Penal Code also contains a number of provision to safeguard the interest of women; So, there are so many safeguard available to a woman in India but most of womens are not aware about there rights due to so many reason like illiteracy, poverty, dependency of males etc. resulted the exploitation of women in every field of life. Many social institutions provides their services for the improvement the condition of women, by aware them about their rights along with this Govt. also. Some other steps to be taken by the Government- Further the Supreme Court in Apparel export promotion council V K Chopra (1991(1) SCC 759) stated that: Sexual harassment can take place even if there is no physical contact. Witness or documentary evidence is not always necessary to prove a sexual abuse charge. If the evidence provided by the victim inspires confidence the court would be obliged to rely on it. Ordinarily no sympathy would be shown in favour of the superior officer. Amendment to the Government Rules- No Government servant shall indulge in any act of sexual harassment of any women at her work place. Every Government servant who is incharge of a work place shall take appropriate steps to prevent sexual harassment to any women at such work place. Following a suggestion from the senior advocates of the Supreme Court a letter was written by the former chairperson to the than Chief Justice of India covering that the Vishakha guideline be implemented in letter and sprit at all levels of the judiciary as well. Conclusion- Although sexual harassment of Women is very sensitive issue, and off late has had a lot of Prominence most workplace often fails to acknowledge sexual harassment as a concern. Overall more than 80 percent
44
of the respondents reported the need for a separate law for dealing with sexual harassment work place it added.
====================== ReferencesBooks1. P.M. Bakshi, The Constitutional Law Of India 2. M.P. Jain, Indian Constitutional Law 3. J.N. Pandey, Constitutional Law Of India 4. V.N. Shukla, Constitution Of India 5. Ratan Lal, India Penal Code 6. Manta Rao, Law Relating To Women And Child 7. Dr. S.K. Kapoor, International Law And Human Rights Journals1. AIR 2. ILI 3. ILR 4. ILQ Newspapers1. Amar Ujala 2. The Hindu 3. Hindustan Times 4. Times Of India 5. Dainik Jagran Articles1. Gallop. Jane, Feminist Accused of sexual harassment Duke University 1997 ISBN-978-0-82223-1918
Empowerment of Women in Indian Society

* Akhilesh Shukla
========================================================== Abstract- A review of government's various programmes for women empowerment such as Swashakti, Swayamsidha, Streeshakti, Balika Samrudhi Yojana and another two thousand projects reveal that little has been done or achieved through these programmes. The discrepancy in the ideology and practice of the empowerment policy of women in India constitutes its continued social, economic and social backwardness. Women make up 49% of our country's population hence there can be no progress unless their needs and interests are fully met. Empowerment would not hold any meaning unless they are made strong, alert and aware of their equal status in the society. Policies should be framed to bring them into the mainstream of society. It is important to educate the women. The need of the hour is to improve female literacy as education holds the key to development. Key Words- Empowerment, Social and Cultural evils, Women Policy, Holistic Approach ========================================================== The meaning for women empowerment is to give rights & power to women to come up in life to challenge aginst it.Empowering Women aims to inspire women with the courage to break free from social and cultural evils of the society. When and where women are given power they can perform their role effectively, every where. The women empowerment in India is a preindependence concept. Empowerment refers to increasing the spiritual, political, social or economic strength of individuals and communities. It often involves the empowered developing confidence in their own capacities. Empowerment is probably the totality of the following or similar capabilities: * Having decision-making power of their own * Having access to information and resources for taking proper decision * Having a range of options from which you can make choices (not just yes/no, either/or.) * Ability to exercise assertiveness in collective decision making * Having positive thinking on the ability to make change ===========================
* Department of Sociology, Govt. T. R. S. College, Rewa (M.P.)
46
* * *
Ability to learn skills for improving one's personal or group power. Ability to change others' perceptions by democratic means. Involving in the growth process and changes that is never ending and self-initiated * Increasing one's positive self-image and overcoming stigma The principle of gender equality is enshrined in the Indian Constitution in its Preamble, Fundamental Rights, Fundamental Duties and Directive Principles. The Constitution not only grants equality to women, but also empowers the State to adopt measures of positive discrimination in favour of women. Within the framework of a democratic polity, our laws, development policies, Plans and programmes have aimed at women's advancement in different spheres. From the Fifth Five Year Plan (1974-78) onwards has been a marked shift in the approach to women's issues from welfare to development. In recent years, the empowerment of women has been recognized as the central issue in determining the status of women. The National Commission for Women was set up by an Act of Parliament in 1990 to safeguard the rights and legal entitlements of women. The 73rd and 74th Amendments (1993) to the Constitution of India have provided for reservation of seats in the local bodies of Panchayats and Municipalities for women, laying a strong foundation for their participation in decision making at the local levels. Goal and Objectives- The goal of Empowerment of Women Policy is to bring about the advancement, development and empowerment of women. The Policy will be widely disseminated so as to encourage active participation of all stakeholders for achieving its goals. Specifically, the objectives of this Policy include * Creating an environment through positive economic and social policies for full development of women to enable them to realize their full potential * The de-jure and de-facto enjoyment of all human rights and fundamental freedom by women on equal basis with men in all spheres - political, economic, social, cultural and civil * Equal access to participation and decision making of women in social, political and economic life of the nation and * Equal access to women to health care, quality education at all levels, career and vocational guidance, employment, equal remuneration, occupational health and safety, social security and public office etc. Social Empowerment of WomenEducation- Govt of India have announced in their policy that Equal access to education for women and girls will be ensured. Special measures will be taken to eliminate discrimination, universalize education, eradicate illiteracy, create a gender-sensitive educational system, increase enrolment and retention rates of girls and improve the quality of education to facilitate life-long learning as well as development of occupation/vocation/technical skills by women.
47
Reducing the gender gap in secondary and higher education would be a focus area. Sectoral time targets in existing policies will be achieved, with a special focus on girls and women, particularly those belonging to weaker sections including the Scheduled Castes/Scheduled Tribes/Other Backward Classes/ Minorities. Gender sensitive curricula would be developed at all levels of educational system in order to address sex stereotyping as one of the causes of gender discrimination. Health- A holistic approach to women's health which includes both nutrition and health services will be adopted and special attention will be given to the needs of women and the girl at all stages of the life cycle. The reduction of infant mortality and maternal mortality, which are sensitive indicators of human development, is a priority concern. This policy reiterates the national demographic goals for Infant Mortality Rate (IMR), Maternal Mortality Rate (MMR) set out in the National Population Policy 2000. Women should have access to comprehensive, affordable and quality health care. Measures will be adopted that take into account the reproductive rights of women to enable them to exercise informed choices, their vulnerability to sexual and health problems together with endemic, infectious and communicable diseases such as malaria, TB, and water borne diseases as well as hypertension and cardiopulmonary diseases. The social, developmental and health consequences of HIV/AIDS and other sexually transmitted diseases will be tackled from a gender perspective. To effectively meet problems of infant and maternal mortality, and early marriage the availability of good and accurate data at micro level on deaths, birth and marriages is required. The Constitution of India grants equality to women in various fields of life. While doing research in the field of rural leadership in Rewa district of Madhya Pradesh we found that yet a large number of women are either ill equipped or not in a position to propel themselves out of their traditionally unsatisfactory socio-economic conditions. They are poor, uneducated and insufficiently trained. They are often absorbed in the struggle to sustain the family physically and emotionally and as a rule are discouraged from taking interest in affairs outside home. Oppression and atrocities on women are still rampant in Princely India areas of Rewa State. Patriarchy continues to be embedded in the social system in many parts of India, denying a majority of women the choice to decide on how they live. The over-riding importance of community in a patriarchal sense ensures that women rarely have an independent say in community issues. Female infanticide continues to be common. Statistics show that there is still a very high preference for a male child in states like UP, MP, Rajasthan, Bihar, Punjab etc. The male to female ratio is very high in these states. Domestic violence is also widespread and is also associated with dowry. Leaving a meager number of urban and suburban women, Indian women are still crying for social justice.
48
Empowerment would become more relevant if women are educated, better informed and can take rational decisions. It is also necessary to sensitize the other sex towards women. It is important to usher in changes in societal attitudes and perceptions with regard to the role of women in different spheres of life. Adjustments have to be made in traditional gender specific performance of tasks. A woman needs to be physically healthy so that she is able to take challenges of equality. But it is sadly lacking in a majority of women especially in the rural areas. They have unequal access to basic health resources and lack adequate counseling. The result is an increasing risk of unwanted and early pregnancies, HIV infection and other sexually transmitted diseases. The greatest challenge is to recognize the obstacles that stand in the way of their right to good health. To be useful to the family, community and the society, women must be provided with health care facilities. Most of the women work in agricultural sector either as workers, in household farms or as wageworkers in Rewa district 40.4% agricultures labours are female. Yet it is precisely livelihood in agriculture that has tended to become more volatile and insecure in recent years and women cultivators have therefore been negatively affected. The government's policies for alleviating poverty have failed to produce any desirable results, as women do not receive appropriate wages for their labour in rural areas. There is also significant amount of unpaid or non-marketed labor within the household. The increase in gender disparity in wages in the urban areas is also quite marked as it results from the employment of women in different and lower paying activities. They are exploited at various levels. They should be provided with proper wages and work at par with men so that their status can be elevated in society. In recent years there have been explicit moves to increase women's political participation. The Women's reservation policy bill is however a very sad story as it is repeatedly being scuttled in parliament. In the Panchayati Raj system, however, women have been given representation as a sign of political empowerment. There are many elected women representatives at the village council level. However their power is restricted, as it the men who wield all the authority. Their decisions are often over-ruled by the government machinery. It is crucial to train and give real power to these women leaders so that they can catalyst change in their villages regarding women. All this shows that the process of gender equality and women's empowerment still has a long way to go and may even have become more difficult in the recent years. The main reason for the contradiction is that, targeted schemes tend to have only limited impact when the basic thrust of development is not reaching an average woman, making her life more fragile and vulnerable. To make a positive change basic infrastructure should be provided in every village and city. To begin with, providing safe drinking water supply and better sanitation not only directly improved the lives and health of women but also reduces their
49
workload in terms of provisioning and ensuring such facilities. An access to affordable cooking fuel reduces the need to travel long distances in search of fuel wood. Improved transport connecting villages with each other and with towns can also directly improve living conditions as well as unpaid labour time spent in transporting household items. It can also lead to access to a wider range of goods and services plus a better access to health facilities. Expenditure on food subsidy and better provisions for public distribution services directly affects the lives of women and girl children in terms of adequate nutrition. The patterns of resource mobilization by government also have significant effects on women that are usually not recognized. When taxes are regressive and fall disproportionately on items of mass consumption, once again these tend to affect women more. This is not only because the consumption of such items may be curtailed but also because the provisioning of such items is frequently considered to be the responsibility of the women of the household. Also credit policies reduce the flow of credit to small-scale enterprises thus reducing the employment opportunities for women. There is a need to have women-friendly economic policies that can enhance their social and economic position and make them self-reliant. There is no doubt about the fact that development of women has always been the central focus of planning since Independence. Empowerment is a major step in this direction but it has to be seen in a relational context. A clear vision is needed to remove the obstacles to the path of women's emancipation both from the government and women themselves. Efforts should be directed towards all round development of each and every section of Indian women by giving them their due share. We have to accept the fact that things are not going to change overnight but because of this we cannot stop taking action either. At this juncture the most important step is to initiate ground level actions however small it might seem. The ground level actions should be focused towards changing the social attitude and practices prevalent in the society which are highly biased against women. This can be initiated by working with the women at the root level and focusing on increasing women's access and control over resources and increasing their control over decision making. Further working on the aspect of enhanced mobility and social interaction of women in the society would positively influence all round development and empowerment of women in India. One of the major aspects of women empowerment in India is to change the attitude of society towards women. The problem in India is that the society never worked on the premise of gender equality from a long-long time. Atrocities and discrimination against women is a way of daily life in Indian society. There is an attitude which still prevails in India where women are considered to be only worthwhile of household activities and managing the children. The veil system, child marriage and dowry are testimonies to this truth. Women have
50
never been part of the mainstream society in India and they are still considered as a great liability. If we just look at the sex ratio it will show the plight of women in India. It is the lowest at around 933. Female literacy is just 54.16 % as per 2001 Census. In Indian parliament and assemblies women have never represented more than 10%. Most of the women workers in India are outside the organized sector. Administrators, managers, professionals combined together and technical workers on the other hand are the lowest at 2.3% and 20 % respectively. Now these figures gives the real truth of the actual mentality of the society which has restricted women, marginalized women and discriminated against women quite openly. Can we achieve women empowerment in India with these alarming and dismal figures? There are quite a large number of issues which need to be addressed to streamline the existing women empowerment programmes in India as well as initiating actual work at the ground level. Women make up to 48% of country's population but their living conditions are very tough and torturous. To initiate measurable actions at ground level, education of women should be given top priority and female literacy programmes need to be enforced across the country. Further to improve the socioeconomic conditions women need to be trained and better equipped for taking informed decisions. The real change will be only visible when social attitudes and norms change. Here inclusive programmes involving the men are the need of the hour. This will be helpful for working out adjustments and sharing of gender based specific performance or tasks which are currently overburdening the women to no end. Unless we improve the ground level living standards of women in India we might not be able to influence their empowerment in any other possible way. Various issues that need to be addressed for improving overall conditions of the women in India include making access to affordable coking fuel for rural women, providing safe drinking water, sanitation, increasing decision making capacity among women, providing equal wages as that of men, ending their exploitation, improving the political participation of women, eradicating poverty among women, increasing the security of women who are engaged in agriculture as daily wage workers, providing affordable healthcare and nutrition and managing the risk of unwanted pregnancies, HIV infections and sexually transmitted diseases. When we talk about women empowerment in India the most important aspect that comes into the mind is the attitude of the society towards women. in fact the society has yet not accepted the feeling of the preamble of the constitution ie we (Both men & women) the people of India. Women are still considered as burden and liabilities. They are also considered as properties. These kinds of attitudes give birth to the evil of violence against women. Women empowerment in India is not possible unless violence against women is eradicated from the society. National Commission of women was created in
51
1992 and Convention of elimination of all forms of discrimination against women was ratified in 1993. Apart from the laws and policy formulations the violence against women can be only tackled through attitudinal change that need to take place in the family, in the society and the female members of the society as well. Only this attitudinal change and proactive action against violence by every single individual will help in galvanising the slumbering structures of the government and society towards further concrete steps and action. Unless society accepts gender equality as a fundamental principle of human existence all efforts will only partially bear results. Gender sensitisation and gender training is primary need of the hour. The struggle of gender equality should be carried at every level and it should overcome the barriers of caste, class, race and religion. To reemphasize once again, women's empowerment cannot take place unless women come together and decide to self-empower themselves. Self empowerment should be all round in nature. Once this happens then we can think about galvanizing the system towards the direction of better health facilities, nutrition and educational facilities for women at a very large scale. Self empowerment can begin by addressing day to day issues faced by individual women and tackling them with a mindset of improving the overall living conditions of women at every level and strata of the society. A movement has to be build which awakens the individual self in each and every woman for creative and generative action. In this regard progressive and resourceful women in the society need to come forward to help their less privileged sisters in as many ways as possible. This shall help us sow the seed for real women empowerment in India. This site envisions the rise of womanhood in true sense that is the rise of the "essence" of womanhood in the physical, mental, intellectual and the spiritual planes. It calls for the beginning of a campaign for the true rise of women in all spheres of life for the restoration of the balance in nature. Somewhere we have to make a beginning and it's always better if we make the initiation at our own self. We can strengthen this mass movement for the "rise of womanhood" by bringing about the necessary changes in our own life as felt by our inner self. Further we can transmit the new thinking to others who care to listen. A small step today will definitely lead to a giant leap tomorrow.
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Kalyani Menon-Sen, A. K. Shiva Kumar (2001). "Women in India: How Free? How Equal?". United Nations. Pruthi, Raj Kumar; Rameshwari Devi and Romila Pruthi (2001). Status and Position of Women: In Ancient, Medieval and Modern India. Vedam books. Greenhalgh, S. (1991), 'Women in the informal enterprise: Empowerment or Exploitation'? World Bank, Washington D.C. Ahlawat, Neerja (2005), 'Domestic Violence against women: Emerging concerns in Rural Haryana'. Social Action. Vol. 55. www.azadindia.org/social-issues/female_foeticide.html
52
6. 7. 8. 9.
Dr. S. Akhilesh, Women Empowerment - A Reality or Myth", Women Empowerment, Centre for Research Studies, Rewa 2010 Page 11-18 Dr. S. Akhilesh, Empowerment of women ", Women Empowerment, Centre for Research Studies, Rewa 2010 Page 115-117 Report of the Sub-Group on Strategies for Empowerment of Women, Development of Children and Issues for Adolescents Govt. of India, Part III. National Policy for the Empowerment of Women, 2001 Govt. of India.
ISSN 0975-4083


Chief Editor
Women Empowerment: The Educational and Social Reform Agenda of The All India Women's Conference (1927-1947)
* Amneet Gill
========================================================== Abstract- In the Indian context, women have been treated as a soft power and the society hardly reacts to their needs. There is a compelling need to understand the concept of women empowerment. The question on the gap in the power between men and women is not an easy one. ========================================================== An analysis of the contextual position of women reflects that the present era needs to react sharply to empower women through an effective strategy which is the key to comprehensive social and economic development.The scattered, piecemeal or curative approaches to the advancement of women view women as passive subjects of protection or as recipients of marginal welfare and social services, unrelated to the policies and strategies for development or structural changes in societies that result from economic changes.1 These approaches should now be replaced by an integrated and participatory approach which relates the role of women in development, their aspirations and needs to the critical areas, issues and choices in the development strategy for economic growth, a more humane use of material and human resources and for equity in power relations at the national and international levels. In the Indian context, women have been treated as a soft power and the society hardly reacts to their needs. There is a compelling need to understand the concept of women empowerment. The question on the gap in the power between men and women is not an easy one. Facaulty relates power to individuals as follows: The individual is an effect of power, and at the same time, repressively to the extent to which it is that effect, it is the element of its articulation. The individual with power has constituted is at the same time its vehicle.(Ibidi.98) The empowerment approach which is predominant nowadays goes back to the International Workshop on Feminist Ideology and Structures in the First Half of the Decade for Women, organised by the Asian and Pacific Centre for Women and development in Bangkok on 1979. Going ===========================
* Research Scholar, Department of History, Punjab University, Chandigarh
54
deeply into the understanding of the Empowerment process, six stages are described as follows: 1. Awareness Building 2. Skill and Capacity Assessment 3. Capacity Building and Skill Development 4. Participation and Greater Control in Decision Making 5. Action for Change 6. Evaluation The empowerment of women and promotion of gender equality is one of the eight internationally accepted goals designed by United Nations. Gender equality is integral to a rights based approach to development.2 The dynamic concept that deals with women empowerment is concerned with developing the capacity of individuals to participate effectively in making and implementing decisions that directly or indirectly affect them. The condition of Indian women is not homogenous. There are various instruments at work as the Indian society is multilayered and women due to social and cultural conditions have not been able to organize themselves on a large scale. In such a scenario, the role of womens organizations in gender empowerment assumes importance. The first dynamic effort towards the empowerment of Indian women was the foundation of the All India Womens Conference in the year 1926 to discuss the agenda of womens education as literacy among women was appallingly low.It was founded by Margaret Cousins, an Irish revolutionary along with eminient women of India, such as Sarojini Naidu, Begum Saheba of Bhopal, Kamaladevi Chattopadhyay, Sarla Ray, Rajkumari Amrit Kaur, Muthulakshmi Reddy and others. The organization established in the colonial period today has nearly 500 branches all over the country with a membership of over 100000. The organizations established previously for the welfare of women were headed by men who were pioneers in the field of women reforms and tried to promote education though in a restrictive sense.3 Some thinkers view the efforts of male reformers to reform the plight of women as merely symbolic as their aim was to find suitable wives well groomed in western ways to facilitate the socialising of native elites with the Britishers. The All India Womens Conference was the pioneer organization whose rank and file comprised women. The organization made a concerted effort to push forward educational reforms among Indian women and in the process facilitated social reforms as well. As is well known, the twentieth century promoted the cause of gender justice by internalising struggles for equality by women and other oppressed people.4 Education reform being the major concern of the organization, it made a systematic analysis of the prevailing system. Primary education seems to be the main concern as is evident from the first conference in 1927
55
wherein it realised the significance of educating girls in schools and removing them from the forbidding restrictions imposed in their households. In the year 1929, the All India Womens Fund was established which was instrumental for setting girls schools, hostels, orphanages. In the year 1932, Home Science College was set up which became famous as Lady Irwin College, a pioneering institution which had a swelling membership of 25000 by the year 1940. Education was not seen as merely an urban phenomenon. 5 The organization made an effort as early as 1939 to stress for distinct education for rural girls with vocational training and instruction in vernacular languages. It took the agenda with British government which seemed to take no interest and instead emphasised the need to address crucial social issues affecting the condition of women by the organization without delving into the political ones. The agenda of a meticulously designed curriculum for girls which had been taken up by the meetings of the conference in the years 1935, 1940, and again in 1945 brings to the fore the seriousness exhibited by the members of the organization as each of them individually made an enquiry into the conditions in their respective constituent assemblies to finally arrive at a consensus at the annual session convened by the organization. Though it stressed the need for a uniform medium of language, the lingual diversity and the importance of mother tongue as a medium of instruction was acknowledged by the members of the organization. 6 The most significant step towards advancement of womens education seems to be the endeavour towards industrial and commercial training for young girls which was facilitated by the organization by setting up special training centres and working women hostels for young entrepreneurs in various parts of Karnataka.7 Thus there seems no aspect of womens education not deliberated by the organization. Its focus in educational reform remained primary education as is evident from the 1947 session of the conference wherein a primary teachers training institute was set up in Bombay under its auspicies and renowned educators were called from US to educate primary teachers.The most significant aspect of the organizations growth seemed to be the early realization of its members that women cannot be imparted education without tackling the inhibiting social conditions affecting them. Rajkumari Amrit Kaur, one of the prominient members of the organization identified three major social impediments of women namely Child Marriage, Polygamy and Pardah.8 A social reform committee was set up as early as the third session of the conference which pressed for raising the age of mariage for girls. Thus the members of the organization rejoiced at the passing of the Child Marriage Restraint Act of 1929 and in its
56
subsequent conferences resisted all conservative pressures to amend the same. As early as 1930, it stressed for reform in the Law of Inheritance and Women labor laws which inspired the British government to pass Industrial laws protecting women and children against exploitation. The year 1932 assumes special significance as though the body claimed to be apolitical, it nevertheless took a keen interest in the deliberations towards the framing of a new constitution for India. In the same year, it placed before the Franchise Subcommittee of the Round Table Conference matters pertaining to the equality for women wherein, it sought equality irrespective of sex, no disability with regard to public employment, adult suffrage and the right to fight elections. However, it is commendable that it never sought reservation of seats for women as such. Its members told the Constituent Assemblys committee on minorities that the primary duty of the committee was to suggest ways and means to eradicate the evils of searatism, rather than expedients or palliatives which might in the long run contribute to its perpetuation.9 But its vigorous campaign for women enfranchisement was defeated on the Governor Generals insistence of keeping wifehood as a condition of franchisement. The rigorous campaign for voting rights ultimately culminated in the enfranchisement of women soon after independence. In the year 1937, the Council of the League of Nations appointed the organization to be a correspondent member of its Advisory Committee on the social question. In the same year, the organization submitted a memorandum on Political, Legal, Social and Educational status of women in India to the League of Nations and Government of India. The Fifteenth Session of the Conference was successful in persuading the Government of India to appoint a committee to examine the injustice done to women under the Hindu Laws. The subsequent conferences engaged the serious attention of the Rau Committee appointed to review the Hindu Laws. These discussions formed the backbone to the passing of the Hindu Code Bill after independence.10 Persuing a wider reform agenda, the Conference started taking a special interest in the village upliftment work much before Indias independence in 1941. A special committee was appointed to prepare a model Village Scheme undertaken in all its branches. The scheme covered Health, Economics, Social reform, Education and Land problems. The stand of the Conference against untouchability and communal violence were addressed as early as 1936 itself.11 Instruction in the method of birth control to tackle the population problem was sought to be addressed with the help of prominient workers of US. Relief works were undertaken in connections with floods, famines and cyclones in Bihar in the year 1942. Thus its reform agenda was quite comprehensive
57
and advocated non violence in the turbulent period of the totalitarian war. In the above said period, the organization is said to have a three dimentional significance. Firstly, it epitomised the transfer of leadership of womens movement from men to women. Secondly, it seems the organization looked to west for role models given the fact that it was established by an Irish lady. Thirdly, it provided women with the opportunities to come out into the world outside their homes and to form public opinion related to the significant issues affecting women and the nation at large. It is interesting to note that the organization at the time of its initiation focussed only on the issues of education and how it could be made available to women in the light of inhibiting social and cultural conditions of the times. Over a period of time, it started addressing a plethora of issues and became the leading voice in espousing the cause of Indian women. Thus the All India Womens Conference played a crucial role in the empowerment of Indian women and was instrumental in organizing public opinion on all significant issues concerning women.
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. Singh, Sukanya, 'Prospectus for Women Empowerment, Dynamics for Enablement', Commonwealth Publishers, 2001 Shahay,Sushma,'Women & Empowerment Approaches &Strategies', Discovery Publishing House, New Delhi,1998 Aparna Basu, "Role of Women in the Freedom Movement" in B.R. Nanda, ed. Indian Women From Purdah to Modernity, Delhi, Vikas, 1976, p.71 Indu Agnihotri and Vina Majumdar, "Changing Terms of Political Discourse" in Mala Khullar(ed.) Writing the Women's Movement A Reader, Zubaan, New Delhi, 2005, p.78 All India Women's Conference, Annual Report, 1940, AIWC Publication,New Delhi,p.17 All India Women's Conference, Annual Report, 1942, AIWC Publication, New Delhi,p.36 All India Women's Conference, Annual Report, 1945, AIWC Publication, New Delhi,p.28 Amrit Kaur, Challenges to Women, New Literature Publishing House, Allahabad, 1946, p.91 Rajkumari Amrit Kaur, Selected Speeches and Writings, Archer Publications, New Delhi, 2006, p.95 All India Women's Conference papers File No. 209 "The Hindu Succession Bill and Socialist Pattern of Society", Teen Murti Library, New Delhi, p.5 All India Women's Conference, Annual Report, 1936, AIWC Publication, New Delhi, p.34
5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
Women Empow erment and Panchayati Raj Institutions in Haryana: A Sociological Study
*Sunita **Desraj Sabharwal
========================================================== Abstract- The present study shows that majority of women respondents do not have the affiliation with other political organizations and most of women representatives supported by their community people and spouse. It is also observed that majority of respondents never participated in any type of political activity. It was found that majority of elected women representative who belongs to higher caste are taking decision independently in panchayat. On the other hand women member belonging to Scheduled caste and backward classes are working on the advice of other people. The new Panchayati Raj Act created space for women leadership and has provided weapon to the powerless section of the society. Most of uneducated women are taking decision regarding panchayat matter on the advice of their husbands or other relatives. They are not in a position to exercise the power which is given to them. However some of the women representatives do find some space to put forward their views and agenda. Caste and class structure of the society does not allow the poorest section to assert their Constitutional rights through panchayats. ========================================================== Introduction- The democratic values such as freedom, equality and social justice are emphatically stressed in the developing nations of the world. The social and political movements emphasized the need for incorporation of such democratic values in the decision-making process of these countries. The growth models and development strategies of these countries are influenced by such consideration of the affairs of the state. Thus, the term empowerment i.e., giving power to certain underprivileged sections of society, came to be used. Liberalization and privatization of the economy and its integration with the global economy are being advocated on the ground of increasing production. Thus, the concept of empowerment has become essential and acceptable addition to the process of development and it has started to influence the ===========================
* ** Research Scholar, Department of Sociology, M.D. University, Rohtak. Professor, Department of Sociology, M.D. University, Rohtak (Haryana)
59
democratic discourse, which ultimately decide the growth models and development strategies of a state (Mohanti, 1995). The world summit for social development (1975) observed that empowering people, particularly women, to strengthen their capacities, is the main objective of development and its principal recourse. Empowerment requires full participation of the people in the formulation, implementation and evaluation of decisions determining the functions and the well being of our societies. It is a process, which strengthens the competence of people in general and of the oppressed sections of society in particular. The strengthening of capacities is the main objective of development process and it can be achieved through empowerment of the poor and downtrodden masses to enable them to help themselves and to manage their own affairs in the society. The underprivileged groups like the poor peasants, women, dalits, tribal and unorganized workers have been engaged in the struggle for power and these groups can be empowered by ensuring their participation in the development process of the country. It is an established fact that empowerment is used for ensuring social transformation and economic development of a society. It also includes political participation and acquiring the capabilities to influence the political decisions effectively. Participation as empowerment is related to redistribution of powers in the society. It is seen as an active process of involvement of the beneficiaries in assuming the responsibility of and contribution to their own needs and welfare as community. By participation, we mean sharing or taking part or involvement in the development process or role in decision making. It can be interpreted as empowering the poorer sections of society to take independent, collective and voluntary action in order to alleviate their poverty and improving their social status. There are several programmes for socio-economic development of alienated sections of the society. Therefore, it becomes essential to ensure their involvement in the development and decisions making process. The betterment of these sections can be expected only by their acquiring competence and creating adequate capacities to enable them to participate actively in socioeconomic and political affairs of the state. Empowerment of Women- Women constitute about 50 per cent of the population in India and 70 per cent population of women resides in the rural areas. Most of the rural women are engaged in the domestic and household activities. Even after 65 years independence, they have not been able to participate effectively in various occupations. The role differentials created by the culture in a specific society can be changed through educational development, change in social values and political will of the state. Some scholars evaluated the status and position of women in the society, especially in terms of political participation. Chafe (1972) finds that the discrimination against women is deeply rooted in the structure of society. Jahan (1987) points out that women generally participate in large number in voting, but their participation is very low in the
60
political activities. Kaushik (1989) states that the right to vote is the starting point in the struggle for womens political equality and their participation by way of voting has been growing but not steadily over the years. Mohanti (1995) reveals that it is necessary to create proper socioeconomic and political condition to enable women to participate effectively in the Panchayati Raj institutions without endangering the positive values of the prevailing family system. Mahipal (1998) experience of a training camp for elected women representatives in Saharanpur district of Uttar Pradesh indicates that the role of women in Panchayati Raj institutions is performed by their male family members and they face a number of problems in performing the roles inside and outside the household. Pai (1998) conducted the study of three villages from Meerut district of Uttar Pradesh warns that unless reservations are accompanied by female literacy, independent voting rights and change in status of family and society, women will continue to act as mere namesake representatives of the male members of their families. Buch (2001) has expressed satisfaction over the fact that there has been a qualitative improvement in the share of women in the Panchayati Raj Institutions as a result of the 73rd Amendment. She has also expressed the hope that it shall have far-reaching consequences in the long-run. Singh (1994) states that so far there has been substantial change in the status of women as a result of 1/ 3rd reservation conferred on them through the 73rd Amendment. The study suggests that in order to encourage a more active participation of women leaders in PRIs, they should be a provision for legal action against male relatives representing the female in council meetings. Chand (1997) states that women were able to get 1/3rd representation in PRIs but there has been no real change in the pattern of women leadership, as the old social, cultural, economic and political structures have remained unchanged. According to him, the role of women member in Panchayati Raj is controlled by the male members of their families, particularly by their husbands. He attributes the state of affairs to the lack of education and political and social awareness among women, on the one hand, and to the traditional feudal and male dominated social context of rural Haryana, on the other. Shanta (1999) has carried out a comparative study of women leadership in PRIs of three states, viz. Haryana, kerala and Tamil Nadu. She says that like other states, almost more than half of the women representatives in the PRIs of Haryana belong to the middle and upper age groups. But unlike other states, most of the women leaders in Haryana are from joint families instead of nuclear families. Further, while some women members in Tamil Nadu and Kerala are unmarried, no such instance is found in Haryana. The number of illiterates is also larger in Haryana than in other states and the proportion of members with higher education is significant in comparison to other states. The women members of Haryana also lag behind in reading habits, previous
61
experience, participation in social organization and political activities, and other responsibilities. The Panchayati Raj evolved primarily to ensure peoples participation in the governance of the country and emphasized the need of womens involvement in it. Womens participation in Panchayati Raj is essential as it helps to empower them and to develop their competence so that they may be able to influence and affect the development and decision-making processes independently at the grass root level. Several factors such as educational development, socioeconomic and cultural changes technological development and the efforts of NGOs have contributed in a significant manner to awaken a sizeable number of women. It is an established fact that reservation system has helped them to acquire political positions in the Panchayati Raj Institutions, but mere acquisition of position does not imply the effective participation. Methodology- To study the participations and empowerment of women in Panchayati Raj Institutions, We have take women representative in Panchayati Raj Institutions as our unit of study. For the present study random sampling was employed. There are 21 districts in Haryana. We have selected Jhajjar district by lottery method.Jhajjar District comprises of five blocks i.e. Jhajjar, Bahadurgarh, Beri, Salhawas and Matanhail. There are 249 Gram Panchayats in Jhajjar district. There are 71 panchayats in Jhajjar block, 36 panchayats in Salhawas block, 43 panchayats in Matanhail block, 63 in Bahadurgarh block and 36 panchayats in Beri Block. In the present study four women headed panchayats are randomly selected from each block. Thus, twenty women headed panchayat are selected in the present study. all the former elected members of panchayat samities and zilla Parishads are also interviewed. all the women who had been elected members of panchayati since a period of 1999, 2004, and 2009 are interviewed. So total 398 woman representatives have been selected as a sample. Therefore, an attempt has been made in this paper to assess the women empowerment in Panchayati Raj Institutions in Haryana. Association of Respondents with social and Political Organizations-It is generally believed that most of women are engaged in household activities and domestic responsibilities. the table 1 shows that there are few women leaders who have association with other social or political organization. Table 1, Association of Respondents in political Organization
Association with political organization Yes No Total Gram Panchayat Panch Sarpanch Panchayat Samiti Members 8(6.78) 110(93.22) 118(100) Zilla Parishad Members 5(27.78) 13(72.22) 18(100) Total
50(20.66) 192(79.34) 242(100)
3(15) 17(85) 20(100)
66(16.58) 332(83.42) 398(100)
*Figures in the Brackets Represent Percentage
62
It is evident from the table 1 that 16.58 per cent of respondents are associate with other political organization like Mahila Samiti, Mahila Mandal, which are common platforms to discuss their problem, while majority of 83.42 per cent respondents have worked only as a Panchayati Raj representatives. At Zilla Parishad level situation is different in comparison gram panchayat. 27.78 per cent respondents of Zilla parishad have the affiliation with other political organization. 79.34 per cent Panches, 85 per cent Sarpanches, 93.22 per cent respondents of the Panchayat Samiti and 72.22 per cent respondent of the Zilla Parishad have worked only as a Panchayati Raj representative. It is observed that majority of women respondents do not have the affiliation with other political organizations. Length of Experiences in Panchayati Raj Institutions- Political experience of Panchayati Raj Institutions leaders can also been seen on the basis of their length of political involvement in any form of organized activity that affects or seeks the power relationship. These activities being mainly intended to influence the attitude and behaviour of those, who have power for decision making. Table 2] Experiences of Respondents in Panchayati Raj Institutions
Experiences of respondents One Tenure Two Tenure Three Tenure Total Gram Panchayat Panch 206(85.12) 30(12.40) 6(2.48) 242(100) Sarpan ch 16(80) 4(20) 20(100) Panchaya t Samiti Members 85(72.03) 33(27.97) 118(100) Zilla Parishad Member s 15(83.33) 3(16.67) 18(100) Total
322(80.90) 70(17.59) 6(1.51) 398(100)
*Figures in the Brackets Represent Percentage The table 2 shows that 19.10 per cent respondents have earlier experiences of working in Panchayati Raj Institutions, while 80.90 per cent only have first exposure of working in Panchayat Raj. Similarly, 27.97 per cent of Panchayat Samiti members and 16.67 per cent Zilla Parishad members followed by 20 per cent women Sarpanches and 14.88 per cent Panches already worked in PRIs. To start a new thing, an individual wants to help other because man is a social being who lives in a society in which every individual is interdependent. In election, leaders get support of family members, husband, community or others. Table No. 3, Support Received during elections
Support Received Gram Panchayat Panch Family Member Spouse Relatives Community Total 29(11.98) 90(37.19) 26(10.74) 97 (40.08) 242(100) Sarpanch 4(20) 5(25) 3(15) 8(40) 20(100) Panchayat Samiti Members 9(7.63) 25(21.19) 4(3.39) 80(67.80) 118(100) Zilla Parishad Members 3(16.67) 4(22.22) 1(5.56) 10(55.56) 18(100) Total
45(11.31) 124(31.16) 34(8.54) 195(48.99) 398(100)
63
*Figures in the Brackets Represent Percentage Table 3 shows that 48.99 per cent respondents are supported by community, 31.16 per cent by their husbands, 11.31 per cent by family members, 8.54 per cent by relatives. Similarly, at the Gram Panchayat level, 11.98 per cent Panches are supported by family members, 40.08 per cent by community. Another 25 per cent women Sarpanches are supported by their spouse followed by 20 per cent from their family members. At the Panchayat Samiti level, 7.63 per cent supported by family members, while 21.19 per cent by their husbands. It is observed during the field work that most of women representatives supported by their community people and spouses. Table 4 Participation of Respondents in Different Political Activities
Political Activities Gram Panchayat Panch Sarpanch 3(15) Panchayat Samiti Members 18(15.25) Zilla Parishad Members 5(27.78) Total
Formed 17(7.02) Different Associations Rallies 57(23.55) Political 21(8.68) Parties campaign No 147(60.74) Participation Total 242(100)
43(10.80)
6(30) 1(5)
15(12.71) 18(15.25)
2(11.11) 2(11.11)
80(20.10) 42(10.55)
10(50) 20(100)
67(56.78) 118(100)
9(50) 18(100)
233(58.54) 398(100)
*Figures in the Brackets Represent Percentage The table 4 shows that majority of 58.54 per cent respondents have no experience of participation in any type of political activities, 10.80 per cent respondents have experience of working in association with Mahila Mandal, Mahila Manch, Mahila Sabha, followed by 10.55 per cent who take part in political activities like meeting, campaigning, canvassing and rallies. Lack of participation in political activity is regarded as burden because it conflict household activities. Similarly at the Gram Panchayat level 60.74 per cent Panches, 50 per cent Sarpanches, 56.78 per cent Panchayat Samiti members and 50 per cent Zilla Parishad members who did not take participation in any political activities. Further at the Zilla Parishad level, 27.78 per cent followed by 15.25 per cent Panchayat Samiti members, 15 per cent Sarpanch and 7.02 per cent panches have experience in functioning of association. It is observed that majority of respondents never participated in any type of political activity. Knowledge of the Panchayati Raj ActFor the successful working of the Panchayati Raj system, peoples participation is considered essential and important. an effort is made to educate the masses for their full participation and active involvement.
64
Table 5 Respondents Knowledge about Panchayati Raj Act

Response Gram Panchayat Panch Sarpanch 96(39.67) 4(20) Panchayat Samiti Members 67(56.78) Zilla Parishad Members 7(38.89) Total
Have heard about the Act Have read about the Act Husbands knows about the Act Dont know Total
174(43.72)
51(21.07)
8(40)
20(16.95)
5(27.78)
84(21.10)
59(24.38)
5(25)
19(16.10)
4(22.22)
87(21.86)
36(14.88) 242(100)
3(15) 20(100)
12(10.17) 118(100)
2(11.11) 18(100)
53(13.32) 398(100)
*Figures in the Brackets Represent Percentage The table 5 shows that only 21.10 per cent respondents have read the Haryana Panchayati Raj Act, whereas 43.72 per cent respondents reported that they have heard about the act. 21.86 per cent respondents stated that their husband have the knowledge about the act. as many as 13.32 per cent respondents reported that they have no knowledge and have neither heard about it. It seems that the introduction of democratic decentralization has become something like an imposition of democratic structures upon the traditional social structure. Majority of the women PRIs members have shown little commitment to development and to the democratic process. the present study shows that 13.32 per cent women do not have any knowledge about new panchayati raj act.It was also observed during the field work that educated women were more assertive and having knowledge about Panchayati Raj Institutions. Table 6 Respondents perception about Women Empowerment
Perception about women Empowerment Women developed their own identity Atrocity on women decreased Women started speaking for their rights No effect on women status Dont know Total Gram Panchayat Panch Sarpanch 77(31.82) 4(20) Panchayat Samiti Members 46(38.98) Zilla Parishad Members 4(22.22) Total
131(32.91)
25(10.33)
1(5)
2(1.69)
2(11.11)
30(7.54)
86(35.54)
13(65)
67(56.78)
10(55.56)
176(44.22)
37(15.29) 17(7.02) 242(100)
2(10) 20(100)
3(2.54) 118(100)
2(11.11) 18(100)
44(11.06) 17(4.27) 398(100)
*Figures in the Brackets Represent Percentage
65
Table 6 reveals that the women empowerment programmes have affected the womens status. Majority of 44.22 Per cent respondents admit that the women have started speaking for their rights. 32.91 per cent respondents are stated that reservations in PRIs have been able to develop womens identity. 7.54 per cent respondent states that the case of atrocities against women has decreased because of their participation in panchayati raj institutions. About 5 per cent respondents are enable to respond on the question of women empowerment.the present study shows that new panchayati raj act has provided weapon to the powerless section of the society. Table 7 Caste and awareness about the Meeting
Awareness about meeting Yes No Total Higher caste 175(59.73) 118(40.27) 293(100) Caste Backward class 13(54.17) 11(45.48) 24(100) Scheduled caste 53(65.43) 28(34.57) 81(100) Total
241(60.56) 157(39.44) 398(100)
* The bracket figures represent percentage The table 7 shows that 60.56 per cent women respondents admit that they know about the meeting among them 59.73 per cent belonging to higher caste, 54.17 per cent backward classes and 65.43 per cent scheduled caste women respondent respectively. 39.44 per cent women respondent did not know about the meeting among them 40.27 per cent belonging to higher caste, 34.57 per cent schedule caste and 45.83 per cent backward classes respectively. The study shows that majority of women were aware about meeting of Panchayati Raj Institutions. It is necessary for each woman to know about the system of decision making in the institution. Keeping this in mind the question was asked, How are decision taken in your Panchayat? Table 8 Caste and Decision making of women respondents
Process of Decision Making Consensus On advise of husband Independently Any other basis Total Higher caste 69(23.55) 55(18.77) 169(57.68) 293(100) Caste Backward class 14(58.83) 5(20.83) 4(16.67) 1(4.17) 24(100) Scheduled caste 20(24.69) 15(18.52) 40(49.38) 6(7.41) 81(100) Total
103(26.14) 75(18.89) 213(53.52) 7(1.76) 398(100)
* The bracket figures represent percentage The table 8 shows the relationship between caste and decision making of the respondents. Majority of the respondents i.e. 53.52 per cent of the
66
sample take decision independently among whom 57.68 per cent belong to higher caste, 49.38 per cent belong to scheduled caste and 16.67 per cent belong to backward class respectively. 18.89 per cent respondents of the total are taking decision on advice of husband. 26.14 per cent women respondents are taking decision regarding panchayat matter with consensus among them 23.53 per cent were belonging higher caste, 24.69 per cent scheduled caste and 58.83 per cent are from backward classes. Conclusion- Empowerment for women in India requires a crosscutting approach and one which addresses the diversity of social structures that govern womens lives. There are numerous social movements fighting for the rights of the marginalized, such as the Dalit and Tribal. These movements have achieved many gains in assuring representation of the traditionally marginalized communities into main stream society. Womens rights within these movements are largely unarticulated and thus reinforce inequalities within the very structures from which they are demanding inclusion. Empowerment approaches for women therefore is not only about providing services, but also about recognizing their lived realities of multiple layers of the discrimination that hinder their access to services. The present study shows that majority of women respondents do not have the affiliation with other political organizations and most of women representatives supported by their community people and spouse. It is also observed that majority of respondents never participated in any type of political activity. It was found that majority of elected women representative who belongs to higher caste are taking decision independently in panchayat. On the other hand women member belonging to Scheduled caste and backward classes are working on the advise of other people. The new Panchayati Raj Act created space for women leadership and has provided weapon to the powerless section of the society. Most of uneducated women are taking decision regarding panchayat matter on the advice of their husbands or other relatives. They are not in a position to exercise the power which is given to them. However some of the women representatives do find some space to put forward their views and agenda. Caste and class structure of the society does not allow the poorest section to assert their Constitutional rights through panchayats. The election of gram panchayats brings out the identity of caste. Caste identity is used for mobilizing voters at village and block levels. These processes have strengthened the caste based politics. It was also found that block and district panchayats representatives were more conscious about their political career. They all aspired to become MLAs or MPs. For them panchayat is a ladder for achieving their political aspirations. The present study shows that 88.94 per cent women respondent have awareness in terms of casting their vote in general election, while 11.06 per cent women respondent dont use their right to vote. During the study it is
67
found that they are not interested in politics but while working it Panchayat Raj Institution they have started realizing the importance of casting their vote. The data suggest that 49 per cent women respondents were supported by community people during elections and 31.16 per cent respondent are supported by spouse. It is observed that most of representatives are supported by their community and spouse. The present study also indicates that reservation of seats for women in Panchayati Raj institutions has encouraged them for active involvement in political process of the country. It has provided opportunity for them to participate in decision-making and implementation processes in rural society. Nevertheless, the Act has changed the concept of male dominance over rural local bodies after passing of the Haryana Panchayati Raj Act a number of women have come forward to contest elections and in some of Panchayats, they have contested and won general seats also. Their number in Panchayats, presence in meetings and involvement in the decision-making process proved the way for their entry into politics. as a result of this, the womens organizations and political parties have started demanding reservation of one-third for women in state assemblies and parliament. The study also shows that about of 60 per cent women representatives motivated for election due to 1/3 reservation in Panchayati Raj Institutions.
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Abraham, francis (1974), Dynamics of Leadership in Villages in India, Indian Internationa publication, Allahabad. Bakshi, Rajni (1985), The Womens Movement in India: A Historical Perspective, Lokayan publication, Delhi. Baviskar, B.S. and George Mathew (2009), Inclusion and Exclusion in Local Governance: Field studies from Rural India, Sage Publications, new Delhi. Buch, Nirmala (2001), Panchayats and Women, Kurukshetra, Vol. 49, No. 7. Chand,Pramod (1997), Impect of 73rd Amendment on Women Leadership in Haryana: A Study of Panchayat Samiti of Thanesar Subdivision, District Kurukshetra,Unpublished M.Phil Dissertation, Deptt. Of Political Science, Kurukshetra University, Kurukshetra. Chafe, W. H. (1972), The American Woman: Her Changing Social, Economic and Political Roles, New York: Oxford University Press. Garg, Nisha and Verma, Neera (2004), Women and Panchayati Raj in Haryana: A Review Article, In (ed.) Surat Singh, Decentralized Governance in India, Myth and Reality, Deep and Deep Publication, New Delhi. Jahan. R. (1987), Women in South Asian Politics, Mainstream, vol. XXV, No. 48, August. Mathew, George (1994), Panchayati Raj-From Legislation to Movement, Concept publication, New Delhi. Kaushik, Sushila (1989), Womens Issues in Ninth General Elections, Teaching Politics. vol. XV, No. 3 & 4. Mandal, Amal (2003), women in Panchayati Raj Institutions, Kanishka Publishers, New Delhi.
6. 7.
8. 9. 10. 11.
68
12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.
Malik, Shamser (2002), The New Panchayati Raj Rural Transformation, in the state of Haryana, Aleka publication, Jaipur. Mohanti, Bidyut (1995), Panchayati Raj, 73rd Constitutional Amendment and Women Economic and Political Weekly, vol. X\X, No. 52. December. Mishra, Sweta (1994), Democratic Decentralization in India, Mittal publication, New Delhi. Pai, Sudha (1998), Pradhanis in New Panchayats, Economic and Political Weekly, vol. XXXIII. No. 18, May. Pal, Mahi (1998), Women in Panchayats: Experiences of a Training Camp, Economic and Political Weekly, vol. XXXIII. No. 4. January. Reghunandan,T.R.(2012), Decentralization and local Governments. The Indian Experience, Orient Blackswan Publication, New Delhi. Reddy, G Ram (1977), Patterns of Panchayati Raj in India, Macmillan publication Delhi. Shanta,E.K. (1999), Political participation of Women in Panchayati Raj, Institute of Social Science, New Delhi. Sharma, S.S. (1979), Rural Elite in India, Sterling publication, New Delhi. Singh, Surat (1994), Women Participation in Panchayati Raj Institutions, Gramin Vikas Sameeksha, No. 17, Part II, July-December.


Chief Editor
Problems of Dowry among Muslim Families with Special Reference to Rewa City
* Akhilesh Shukla **Tajammul Hussain Mir
========================================================== Abstract- Dowry is both a practice and a problem associated with marriage. Dowry generally understood as money, goods, estate, ornaments or any other kind of wealth that a woman brings to her husband at the time of marriage and also it contrast with the bride price. Which is paid by the groom or hs family to the bride's parents and with dower, which is property given to the bride herself by the groom at the time of marriage? The same culture may simultaneously practice both dowry and bride price. Dowry is an ancient custom, and its existence may well predate records of it. Key Words- Marriage, Bride, Property, Groom, Money, Jahez ========================================================== Introduction- Dowry means any property or valuable Security given or agreed to be given either directly or indirectly by the party to a marriage to the other party to the marriage, or by the parents of the either party to a marriage; or by any other person to either party to the marriage or to any other person; at or before or after the marriage as consideration for the marriage of the said parties, but does not include dower or Mohr in the case of persons to whom the Muslim personal law [sharat] apllies.1 The practice of Dowry among Muslims as it has existed and continues to exit in different forms and in different regions. Dowry is an ambiguous word that does not have a uniform or standard definition, and there are wide ranging regional variations in peoples understanding of it. Technically, it is the property of the bride but, in practice, the husbands parents, brothers and sisters have access to it. Indian Muslims commonly use the Arabic word jahez1 for dowry and very often, justify the practice inters of jahaz-e-fatmi islamists classify jahez into two categories. The first comprise some essential articles for the outfit of the bride as well as for conjugal life. The other is made up of valuable goods, clothes, bargaining, and devish food and hospitality for the barat. They say the former is very old and established practice, while the later is a recent phenomenon among Indian ===========================
* ** Department of Sociology, Government T. R. S. College Rewa (M.P.) M.Phil, Sociology, Second Semester, Government T. R. S. College Rewa (M.P.)
70
Muslims and mostly prevalent in south India another words dowry may be as compensation for bride price. This May be the case in culture where the dowry and bride price are both customary. Many other authors believe that giving and receiving of dowry reflects social and even the effort to climb higher in a social hierarchy. A dowry may also have served as a form of protection for the wife against the possibility of ill treatment by her husband and his family providing and incentive for the husband not to harm his wife. Review of Literature- The rise of the dowry among Muslims to date back only some decades. 1. White (1992:102) and Razoria (1992;134) note that the prevalence of the system reflects a change over the last two generations. Dowry was previously practiced mainly in urbanized, more affluent classes. The Tyranny of dowry existed in urban areas since the late 1960s,but has now spread to rural populations (Atom and Martin) 2. Ansari (1978) some authors have tried to justify this system of dowry by reference to the practice of the prophet Mohammad; (saw) that is, sunna. Despite agreement that dowry payments are Not among the basic of Muslim marriage, there are contentions that it forms part of the sunna of the prophet, who gave certain items to his daughter Fatma at her marriage to Ali, the Prophet s cousin. 3. Sabzwari (1984) A dower (Mahr). A bridal gift from the groom which is generally intended to provide some insurance for her in the case of divorcee. 4. Ansari (1978:81) the second instance quoted by those who see dowry as Islamic in the marriage of zainab, another daughter of the prophet, who was given a costly necklace by her rich mother. Objectives1. To explore about the cause of Dowry and its impact on Muslim families. 2. To investigate and explore the impact of Dowry on society. 3. To explore the problem of woman caused due to dowry among Muslim families. 4. What measures should be taken to control the dowry. Among Muslim families. Methodology- When the fundamental matter of science are implemented in the field of social science. Then it is called study method of search a fixed and well organized study method has adopted, this method of study is called study method. Study method are the base of scientific research for being signification for that following study method has adopted, both primary and secondary developing the research problem. Methodology For study the dowry in Muslim families i have taken the sample of five respondents from the study area and i also use For this purpose self study, printed materials, internet and reference books has been consulted.
71
Study Area- Rewa is located at 240320 north 810 180 east 24.530 north 81.30 east 24.530, 81.360 it has an average elevation 275 meters (902 fed). The present study focuses on Problems of dowry among Muslim families in district Rewa (M.P.) So the sample of Dowry has been mostly taken from Rewa town. Rewa had population about 2,363,744 in census 2011 in which male are 1,2249,18 and female 1,38,8626, Rewa has an average literacy rate of 73.42% male literacy 62.49% Rewa City has population 235, 442 as per census 2011 male constitute 124,634 and females, 110,788. Rewa city has total 185291, literates in which male 103,599 and female 81,692 approx. average literacy 87.74% male 92.91% and female 81.95%. Analysis of Data- Clear and easy statics method has adopted for analysis of data provided by respondents through interview method, to present correct thoughts of respondents behaviors and mentality, that has made in the form of simple and under stable through of tabulation for the analysis of data. The whole research has divided into three chapters first reveals the introduction there for second chapter causes of dowry, third chapter related to evil effects of dowry and the last chapter is passed on the conclusion. The Description- Causes of Dowry1. Aspiration to establish marital Relation with Rich Family: Girls parents are always interested to giving their daughters in marriage to well to do families. Many of them do not want to take a risk in arranging the marriage of their daughter with a Boy who belongs to a poor family just because the boy is good. They look in to the future prospects of their daughter, her comforts, her pleasure, her satisfaction and so on. High market value of the boys belonging to rich and high social status families has caused the amount of dowry to go up.2 2. False conceptions of social status: - Many a time girls parents themselves offer huge amount of money as dowry gift just to exhibit there high social status and parade their economic capacity. 3. Impact of the vicious circle which Dowry has created: - The practice of dowry has become very dominant because many parents demand dowry on behalf of their sons just to compensate the dowry they have given while celebrating the marriage of their daughters. Sometimes, individuals who are against this system are also compelled to accept as few thousands or lacks of rupees in cash as dowry only because they have to spend an equal amount or more on their sisters or daughters marriage. Thus the vicious circle of dowry starts operating and individuals get entangled with it, whether they desire it or oppose it. Evil Effects of Dowry- Practice of dowry which assumed the form of an institution over the years has caused a lot of hardships to a large number of people in the Indian society, at one time, dowry was being given willinging by the brides parents, and it was being accepted by the grooms party as a kind
72
of voluntary gift. But today dowry has come to be demanded though the practice of dowry leads to various evil consequences.3 1. Economic Burden on brides family: Dowry has become a great economic burden to the middle and lower middle families. People belonging to these classes spend on maintaining the family standard, in providing the necessities of life, educating children, and meeting various social obligations. Hence to arrange the marriage of their daughters they have to borrow money or sell a piece of their property or mortgage valuable articles of the family. 2. Dowry Harassment and murders: - Women are ill treated disrespected man handled, tortured and subject to all sorts cruelties in the name of dowry. Very often, our daily papers flash news about the tragic results of the dowry system in which the newly married girls are always the victims of harassment, violence, murder and suicide. 3. Psychological crises and emotional disturbances In the family :(a) Girls with strong character and self dignity may refuse to marry a boy who demands dowry. Some of them may be forced to remain spinsters throughout their lives. Forcible suppression of sex urge may make them to become irritable, frustrated, disgusted and pessimistic. (b) Some courageous women resist the way in which they are treated at the house of their husbands even after the payment of dowry. This type of resistance may spoil their mental peace and cause continuous irritation.4 The following five responders have taken as a sample from the study area.
S.No. 1 2 3 4 5 Respondent Dowry Harassment Economic burden on brides family Child marriage Demand of dowry High Social status Total Percentage 30% 20% 20% 20% 10% 100%
Thus it shows that in Muslim Families in there are also huge demand of dowry which sometimes causes deaths, harassments, Divorce, suicide and also similar cases like that dowry has covered all the religions in its net. Conclusion- It is clear that the dowry system in our country has become a kind of business deal a big bargain in matrimony. It is unspiritual and is devoid of ethical values. It is a stigma associated with the Indian morital system; it has become equally rampant in the other religions communities of India. It has made a few young women to remain as spinsters, it is high time that is stopped. The successful abolition of the practice of dowry would be land mark towards social reform. But is not an easy task. Some of the highly educated and professionally well placed individuals including the foreign returned young men are clining on to it. Determined efforts should be made on all India basis to
73
combat this problem. Social and moral consciousness of the people, education and economic independence of women, effective enforcement of legislation against dowry system, civil marriage, community weddings, launching of the youth movements against the dowry system or some of the mean of countering this practice. The sooner it disappears the better it will be for the progress of this society.
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Shankar Rao C.N. 2011, Sociology of Indian society S.Chand and Company Ltd. Ram nagar, New Delhi, 7th edition.P.P.647 I Bid P.P. 648 Shankar Rao C.N. 1990 Principles of sociology, S. Chand and Company Ltd. Ram nagar New Delhi, 19th P.P. 856 I Bid P.P. 650 I Bid P.P. 650-651 I. Pathak 1990 Women and family violence, arihant publishers jaipur 1st edition R. Kumari 1989 Dowry vicious in India Radiant Publishers New Delhi.
ISSN 0975-4083 lsUVj QkWj fjlpZ LVMht] jhok }kjk fjlpZ tjuy vkWQ vkV~Zl eSustesUV ,.M lks'ky lkbalsl ds fo'ks"kkad ds :i esa fuEufyf[kr nks lanHkZ iqL rdksa dk izdk'ku uoEcj] 2013 esa fd;k tk jgk gSA
(vkbZ-,l-ch-,u- 978&81&87364&59&7)


Impact of RTI in Administrative Culture in India

(With special reference to Punjab state)
* Rama
========================================================== Abstract- The Main aim of R.T.I i.e. "Right to information" is Transparency in the Working of public Authorities. The Authorities are accountable to the pubic with regard to their aims, progrmmes, polices regarding administrative and financial decisions .The greater secrecy In working does not speak well rather reflects badly because it gives birth to corruption, whereas working in openness makes the administration sound to proceed on right line because it will have to face obstructive criticism of the public and will lose trust. ========================================================== It also strengthens the foundation of democracy because government has to work as per public views. The essential ingredients of a democratic government are its programmes and policies which must be known to the public. The secrecy of the same will lose public trust and there must not only be a hue and cry to oppose the same but country can face strikes and other ill attitude of the public. The Right to Information will help the public to get information /documents from the administration and will know about the functioning of govt. Thus they will become vigilant to the working of govt. and govt. Will also keep in mind the legitimate needs and grievances of public which will bring administration and public near to each other. This will further check the administration not to maintain secrecy in any functional decision which will improve quality of working. This will also strengthen the grassroots of democracy because people participation will be must in local governess in any kind of administrative, financial decisions. Thus mistakes, Frauds will be avoided. In India this Right to information issue attracted the attention of government during loke sabha election of 1977, but could not achieve any progress for a period of 12 years when in Dec 1989 the then primeminister sh. V.P singh assured the public for giving them this right so that there should be transparency and openness in the working of the govt. and the public must be aware of that. Instead of giving such like strong commitment by the primeminster the issue could not get speedy finalization because of political ===========================
* Research Scholar, Department of Public Administration, Kurukshetra University, Kurukshetra
75
change in the country. At last in Oct.2005; RIGHT TO INFORMATION ACT came in to existence in country. Punjab Govt. Right to Information Rules 2005- Punjab govt. framed rules for the implementation of RIGHT TO INFORMATION ACT. These rules came into force w.e.f. 12.10.05, making provision for submission of application for required information/ document under R.T.I., fee to be deposited, mode of deposit, time with in which application is to be disposed off, procedure for approaching appellant authority and procedure to be followed by them. The implementation of this Act in Punjab can be seen from the report of state information commission (SIC).some problems were highlighted in the reports on which survey was conducted by the research staff of the PGRS and major problem noticed by them were considered by the second A.R.C. They gave the recommendations and suggestions as under. The system of deposit of fees should be simplified to provide for acceptance of cash by the PIOS. Single window system at District Level to be declared as APIOS acceptance of all departments. The district unites of different department could be considered as separate public authority. Information to be made public for examination every year. These are summarized as under: a. Standardization of modules for mandatory disclosure of information- The information to be disclosed will be discussed and reviewed annually by the concerned department in consultation with SIC. b. Revisiting the present practice of appointment of RTI officialsTo minimize transaction costs, the following have been authorized to deal such application and appeals. APIOs : District Suvidha centers to be the single window APIOs for all govt. departments. PIOs: The District head of the department and one of the senior most persons in other public authorities to be the PIO in most cases. This will ensure speedy response, proper accountability and systematic feedback. Appellate authorities: Head of the department the CEO, the elected chairperson to be the appellate authority in case of departments, Autonomous bodies and rural and urban PRLs respectively. Structure of fees: To be accepted in cash and allowed to be utilized on RTI related work. District level monitoring of RTI implementation: District grievance committees should have a standing agenda on RTI implementation. Review of basic performance parameter, number of cases filled with in the year and
76
cases disposed of well in time. The current status of implementation of Act in Punjab can be seen from SIC report and state govt. website. The latest position as on 28th Feb. 2013 is given as under. Status of Complaints and Appeals- The status of Complaint/Appeal (cases) under the Right to Information Act, 2005 before the State Information Commission Punjab as on 28 February 2013 is as under:
Year Balance Received Total (Received + Balance of Last Year) 20 1103 3379 4804 6844 6402 6159 6956 Disposal 624 508 Disposed of 624 2429 3058 5543 5522 4870 5413 Balance
2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013
20 479 950 1746 1301 880 1289 Month January February
20 1083 2900 3854 5098 5101 5279 5667 Monthly Institution 868 542
20 479 950 1746 1301 880 1289 1543
For the information and benefit of the public, this information is updated every month on the Commissions website: www.infocommpunjab.com Because of implementation of this Act:1. Moga-kotkapura bypass which was in worst condition is now one of the best roads of Punjab with flyovers. 2. The highest penalty of 50.000 in two cases (Rs.25.000 in each case) for not supplying the information under RTI and then not attending to the appellate authority has been imposed on sh. Manjeet singh project officer of Punjab house fed society. Orders are also passed for deposit of penalty within ten days failing the same shall be recovered from his pay. The govt. should make aware the public about the various provisions of this Act through electronic media, paper media and other adds etc, because this is a revolutionary law and main institution for providing information/ documents on demands covering all major areas of citizen demands and interest. Last but not the least the administration should know that law is not only their commands but it is also command of the people because law is above all. Their corrupt practices are not only harmful for economy of the country but endangers national security. This Right To Information Act is weapon in the hands of public to check mall practices of the administration.
====================== References1. Anand,V. Eshwar,RTI under Attack, The Tribune, Jalandhar, August 17,2010
77
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
http:en. Wikipedia.org./wiki/right-to -information- Act-2005 http:/ www.right to information.gov. htt://rti.gov.in/rtiact.htmhttp://www.bank of baroda.com/right to information Act.asp http://www.th.gov.in/rti.-act http://www.gighttoinformation.org/punjab.html http://wikimediafoundation .org/wiki/donate/le-accessed on 20.01.2011. Kashyap, Rajan, its bank & its bite, The Tribune, jalnadhar, Augst 17,2010. Right to information Act, from Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia, Right to information from www.ndtv.com/rti/sucess-tories.asp-accessed on 25.01.2011. www.infocommpunjab.com
Volume-IX, Coming in September, 2013 ISSN 0975-4083


Chief Editor
Environmental Degradation Causes, Consequences and Preventive Measures

* B. P. Singh ** Gulzar Qadir Ganaie
========================================================== Abstract- The role of social, economic, industrial and natural factors on the degradation of environment in general is analysed. Social, economic and natural factors are playing a vital role in degrading the quality of environment. This article provides analyses of environmental degradation scenario under varying intensities of natural factors in general and anthropological factors in particular. ========================================================== Methodology- This paper is totally worked both out on both primary and secondary sources of data collection. The primary sources of data collection mostly consist of observation. Objectives- The main objectives of this paper are: 1.To asses the human impact on environment geographically. 2.To describe the various human activities causing environmental degradation. 3.To find out the strategies for the conservation or prevention of environment. Introduction- Environmental degradation is the deterioration of the environment through depletion of resources such as air, water and soil, the destruction of ecosystems and the extinction of wildlife. It is a process through which the natural environment is compromised in some way, reducing biological diversity and the general health of the environment. This can be entirely natural in origin or it can be accelerated or caused by human activities. Many international organisations recognize environmental degradation as one of the major threat facing the planet. Since humans have only been given one earth to work with, and if the environment becomes irreparably compromised, it could mean the end of human existence. Causes and consequences- In general the environment is degraded in two ways: Natural factors Human factors Natural factors- Many natural phenomena adversely affect the environment. ===========================
* ** Department of Geography, Government T. R. S. College Rewa (M.P.) M.Phil Geography, Second Semester, Government T. R. S. College Rewa (M.P.)
79
There is no role of man in this type of degradation. Some important agents of environmental degradation are as under: Volcanoes and earthquakes- volcanism plays a significant role in deteriorating the quality of environment. All though it has some positive effects, but the immediate effect is negative. The heart and burning lava with steam and many other types of burning material are ejected out from the interior of earth on to the surface of earth that is covered with fertile soil. The whole area is covered with ejected material thus eroding the soil layer. Floods and Droughts- Floods and droughts are natural hazards that are associated with the rainfall. Heavy rain falls leads to floods because the river valley is unable to hold the water on the other hand, a drought is caused by the failure of rainfall. The soil properties, plant and animal life and agriculture is the worst hit by these calamities. Soil Erosion- Soil erosion also plays an important role in environment degradation. The adverse effects of soil erosion are : a. Gullies and ravines are formed which make the area undulating and thus unsuitable for the human activity. b. Soil erosion also causes frequent floods. c. Plants are uprooted because of removal of topsoil d. Landslides bring heavy damage to the area. 2. Human factor: Role of human factors is more servers in affecting the environment. Damage caused by natural factors in recovered with the passage of time but damage caused factors is not easily recovered. Major human factors that cause environmental degradation are;a. Deforestation:- Environment is worst affected by deforestation. Vast areas of forests are cleared for various human activities like settlement, agriculture, pastures, industries etc. Deforestation severely affected the climate conditions of the whole earth. Soil erosion is the immediate effect of deforestation. Other adverse affect of soil erosion are decreased soil fertility, bad land topography, increase in temperature, destruction of animal habitats. b. Air pollution :- A large amount of fossil fuels is burnt by the Industries and the transport. After the burning of these fuels a verity of chemicals and particulate matter are realised in to the air. These pollutants together causes wide spread damage to the environment. It badly damages the trees and soil (acid rain and smog) and also affects the animal life of water. c. Water pollution:- Pollution of water is also one of the critical problems of 20th century. Main sources of river water contamination are sewage disposal and industrial waste disposal. Also pesticides leach down with water and contaminate the ground water. Polluted water severely affects the life in water bodies. Growth of fish and water animals is retarded. d. Ozone depletion:- Ozone sphere is the thin layer in the upper stratosphere, its major role is to block the harmful ultraviolet rays from reaching
80
earth. It has been proved that chloro fluoro carbons (cfcs) are realised from the refrigeration systems, air conditioning systems, spray cans etc. In the stratosphere the react with the ozone gas in this process the chlorine gas is realised which reacts with the ozone gas and breaks apart the ozone molecules thus reducing them in the stratosphere. As a result, the UV radiation is able to reach the surface of earth. These rays can cause skin cancer, cataract and affects the immune system of the body. Environmental degradation
Natural factors
Human factors
Volcanism Floods Soil Deforestation Air Water Ozone & & Erosion Pollution PollutionDepletion Earthquakes Droughts Prevention- Man must learn that earth does not have infinite resources. The limited resources of environment must be conserved. Efforts should be made to reuse the resources in a scientific and creative manner. Man is an intelligent creature therefore; he is capable of devising new strategies which can interlink the environmental conservation and economic development. Both can go hand in hand. The ministry of environment and forests (MOEF) is responsible for protection, conservation, and development of environment. The ministry works in close collaboration with other ministries, state, govts , pollution control boards and a number of scientific and technical institutions etc. Environmental (protection) Act 1986 is the key legislation governing environment management. Other important legislations include forest (conservation) Act, 1980 and the wildlife (protection) Act, 1972 in short people must be motivated towards the conservation of the environment. All rich and poor, literate and illiterate, young and old, man and woman must be involved to protect the environment. Conclusion- At last I may conclude this topic with these lines i request all people that we should join hands together so that we can protect our environment from future degradation. Dont be afraid to give your best to all small jobs. Every time you conquer one it makes you much stronger. If you do the little jobs well, the big jobs will tend to take care of themselves. For this purpose, the nations of the world particularly developed ones have to cooperate within each other in controlling and putting a check on environment degradation, so the need of the hour is to formulate and frame such laws, Which will not ensure only the future survival possible, but will make the present habitat Safe and sound.
====================== References-
81
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Rajaram K ,(2003), Geography spectrum books, New Delhi. Aggarwal R.N,(2000), "Pioneer refresher course in Geography" Dhanpat Roy and co, Delhi. Jeelani M, (2004), "Essentials of environment studies" Bismah books, bemina srinagr. Hussain M,(2005), "Geography of J&K" Rawat publications, jaipur. Wasil Farooq, (2009), "Environmental Education" evergreen publications new Delhi. Singh S, (1998) "Environmental Geography" prayag pustak Bhawan publications Allahabad. Chakravorty p .Bhatt, (2oo4) "Environmental awareness" M.P Hindi granth Academy publication, Bhopal.


Chief Editor
Solid Waste Management Plan Ujjain

* Amita Singhal ** Dinesh Singhal
========================================================== Abstract- Solid wastes can be defined as those wastes which have been rejected for further uses and which can neither be transported by water into streams nor can readily escape into the atmosphere. Any unwanted or discorted material from residential, commercial, industrial, mining and agricultural activities thus causes environmental problems may be termed as solid wastes. ========================================================== Ujjain is situated on the right bank of River Shipra. It is a very holy city for the Hindus, a site for the triennial Kumbh mela. There are many great mythological legend about Ujjain city. Apart from mythological legends, the city has a long distinguished history. It was governed by the likes of Vikramaditya and Ashoka. Kalidas wrote his souls stirring poetry here. Today, Ujjain represents an interesting blend of an age old legacy and the modern day lifestyle. The population of Ujjain city shown in table no.01 Table01 Papulation of Ujjain City.
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Census 1951 1961 1971 1981 1991 2001 2011 Population 1,29.817 1,44,161 2,08561 2,82,207 3,62,633 4,30,427 5,15,215 Decadal Growth 59.74% 11.00% 44.70% 35.31% 28.50% 18.69% 19.69
Solid waste management is an urban service that requires a log ot attention and is one of very important obligatory functions of any urban local body. The Ujjain municipal corporation estimates that 160T/day of solid waste is generated in the urban area, waste generation estimates. Suggest that about 83% of generated waste is removed. There is a strong decline in the standard of services with respect to collection, transportation and disposal. Presently ===========================
* ** Professor, Chemistry, Government Kalidas Girls College, Ujjain Professor Commerce, Government Kalidas Girls College, Ujjain
83
municipal waste is simply dumped at MR-V Agar Road trenching ground, about 4 km from the city Corporation data, discussion with UMC (Ujjain Municipal Corporation) authorities and visits to the disposal site all indicate inadequate solid waste management. Municipal waste as collected is mixed in nature including bio-waste, night soil waste and septic tank sludge. Storage facilities are inadequate. The overall waste generation and related available facilities and equipment with UMC are summarized in table No.02 Table02 Solid waste details (Ujjain City).
No. a b c d e f Waste generation source Domestic Commercial & Trade Industrial Hospital Construction and Demolition Others (Floating population) Total Waste tons 66.00 50.00 5.0 1.0 30.00 7.00 159.00 Proportion 41.51% 31.45% 3.14% 0.63% 18.87% 4.40%
The above table shows that the major contribution of solid waste are domestic and commercial. Which combinable account for more than 70% of solid waste . The city has adequate dustbins covering nearly 85% of the city area. The average dustbin spacing is nearly 500 mts the expenditure per capital on conservancy comes out to be Rs. 2.5 for every meter. One of the most important functions of city of Ujjain is to cater to religious pursuits. A large number of persons come to the city during religions fairs such as Simhastha and Cultural functions like Kalidas Samaroh. The current rate of solid waste generation in UMC is about 150 tones per day. The waste generation rate in 2021 is estimated to be about 456 gpcd. The total municipal solid waste generated in 2021 by a projected population of 6,88,000 is estimated to be about 300 tons per day. Suggestions- The day-to-day management of solid wastes is a complex and expensive activity. Solid waste management is important to health, environmental protection natural resources management and sustainable development. Developed countries have adopted sophisticated management practices importing the same in low-income countries is not economically, and technically viable and socially acceptable. 1. To Implement proper solid waste management, various aspects have to be considered such as - a) Source reduction b) On site storage c) Collection and transfer d) Processing technique f) Disposal. The flow chart shows the interrelationship between the functional elements in solid waste management
84
Waste generation Storage Collection
Transfer and transport Disposal
Processing and recovery
2.
Management strategies should be in such a) Protection of environmental health and quality. b) Supporting the efficiency and productivity of economy. c) Generation of employment and income. 3. Proper incentives should be given to the staff to treatment of SWM. 4. Proper maintenance of vehicles and other equipments. 5. Old vehicles should be replaced. 6. The corporation should involve NGOs and community groups, to strengthen SWM system in the city. Conclusion- Economic development is an important factor affecting the solid waste generation. Over population is a major cause of environmental imbalance, Growing population, fast urbanization, industrialization and consumption patterns combine the waste management problem in India and World.
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. H.Y. Jadhav 'Environmental pollution' Sterling Pub. House, Mumbai. P.A. Koli and V.V. Mahamuni 'Environmental Economics of Solid Waste Management', University Book House, Jaipur. M. Karpagam 'Environmental Economics' Sterling Pub. Pvt. Ltd., Delhi. City Development Plan, Ujjain Page 75, 76, 151 H. Kaur 'Environmental Chemistry' Pragati Prakashan Meerut. B.K. Sharma, Environmental Chemistry Goel Publ. House Merrut.
Eco-Tourism Status of Bandhavgarh National Park A Case Study

* Neerja Khare ** Shikha Dwivedi
========================================================== Abstract- Bandhavgarh National Park is one of the most famous parks and widely sought after destinations to wildlife lovers. Because of its unique nature and easy sightings of Tigers. Every year a number of Indian as well as foreign tourists visit Bandhavgarh. In 2005-06 seasons about 28300 Indian and 4500 foreign tourists visited Bandhavgarh. The income generated uses 1.53 park for betterment of Tourists facilities and Implementation of management activities. Present studies deals with Manage and Eco-tourism status of Bandhavgarh national park, around 25000 tourists visit his park every year. However, Eco-tourism in Bandhavgarh is subordinated to the main objective of wildlife conservation. The management believes that the visitors should be provided a meaningful exposure to the protected Area so that they can appreciate India's magnificent natural heritage and conservation benefits. Key words- Eco-tourism, Bandhavgarh, National Park. ========================================================== Introduction- Bandhavgarh National Park is one of the most sought after wilderness destinations in India. Tourism in Bandhavgarh had its modest beginnings in the late seventies. Present day wildlife tourism or Eco-Tourism is a result of evolution and not a result of revolution. Subsequently, it received an impetus with the improved facilities and publicity. In tune with the objectives of wildlife conservation and project tiger, tourism is allowed on a limited and regulated basis in the National Park. Bandhavgarh has the unique distinction of having highest density of tigers in wilderness probably anywhere in the world. Eco-tourism in the Bandhavgarh is a balance of conservation education and entertainment with the active participation of local people. The under laying principle is that the tourism should be ecologically and socio-culturally sustainable. Objective- Consistent with the four broad objectives of the Ecotourism that primarily lay emphasis on protection and conservation of natural resources ===========================
* ** Department of zoology Govt. P.G. College, Satna (M.P.) Department of Zoology Govt. College Nagoud Dist. Satna (M.P.)
86
but not in the utilization or exploitation of national heritage, the objectives of tourism set for Bandhavgarh National Park. (a) To enhance the Eco-Tourism experience among the visitors by preventing informed wilderness experience. (b) To promote conservation awareness among the visitors and the local masses through conservation education to elicit their support to the cause of conservation in general and of management of the protected area in particular by enabling them to view a cross section of protected area values. (c) To promote the interest of indigenous communities who are the major stakeholders, relating to tourism linked economy. Material and Methods- The study was carried out to a certain the status of Eco-tourism in Bandhavgarh National Park in relation to a wild life and tourist and impact of ecotourism. The study involves collection of data from primary and secondary sources. To collect the data, investigators visited various Tourists interest places of Bandhvgarh National Park in year 2000-01 to 2005-06. Table 1 Tourists Influx and Proceeds during 2000-01 2005-06
Year Indian Tourists 9994 13803 15795 16373 21494 28300 Foreign Tourists 2299 1729 1965 3221 3812 4520 Total Tourists 12293 15532 17760 19594 25306 32800 % of foreigners 18.70 11.13 11.06 16.43 15.06 13.71 Proceeds (Rs. Lakh) 33.20 39.87 46.64 55.32 127.67 153.00
2000-01 2001-02 2002-03 2003-04 2004-05 2005-06
Fig. 1-Number of Indian & Foreign Tourists Visiting Bandhavgarh (During the last 6 years)
30000 25000 20000 15000 9994 10000 5000 0 2000-01 2001-02 2002-03 2003-04 2004-05 2005-06 Indian Tourists Foreign Tourists 2299 1729 1965 3221 3812 4520 13803 15795 16373 21494 28300
87
Result and DiscussionTourism zone- It is only 105 Sq. km. of Tala ranges, which constitutes around 24% of the total park area. It has very rich in floral and faunal diversity and retained it pristine beauty because of the protection it enjoyed since long. The area with hills and the valleys scattered all around interspersed with green valleys and marshes while in plains meadows are dotted through out the area with freely wandering wild animals is a paradise for and wildlife lovers. There are 23 spots of tourists interest including Bandhavgarh fort. Eco-Tourism status in Bandhavgarh National Park - Though Ecotourism is an important aspect it is only subordinate to the main objective of wildlife conservation. Every year the park remains open for tourist from Ist Octobers to 30th June or rains whichever is earlier. The average annual tourists influx is around 25000. During peak i.e. in the months of November and December nearly 4000 tourists visit the park in a month and during weekends and holidays the number some times goes more than 300 visitors/day. Foreigners constitute around 16% of total visitors. They are mostly from Great Britain, France, Germany and USA. Their best preferred season to visit is winters November to mid March to avoid the wrath of the sun and enjoy the pleasant weather of India. Bandhavgarh received the National Tourism award of the Ministry of Tourism, Govt. of India for the year 2003-04 as the best maintained Tourists Friendly National Park. It is highlighted that very tourists destination has an off day in a week but there is no such provision here and the park is opened continuously for 9 months. Therefore, it is very much essential to declare a day off in a week so that the staff and departmental elephants engaged in tourism as well as the tourism zone get some respite. Timing for the park visit- Timings for the Park excursions will very with seasons considering the sunrise and sun set as visitors are not allowed, before down and beyond dusk. The timing being followed are as under : 1. 1st November to 15th February 06-30 hrs to 11.00 hrs 14.30 hrs to 17.30 hrs. 2. 15st February to 31st March 06-00 hrs to 10.30 hrs 15.30 hrs to 18.30 hrs. st th 3. 1 April to 30 June 05.30 hrs to 10.00 hrs 16.00 hrs to 19.00 hrs. The above timings should be displayed at entry paints for the convenience of the visitors and to regulate the park entry and exits. Places of tourists interests - Some of the places of Tourists interests are as under : 1. Siddha Baba : The Holy Meadow . The marshy meadow is the merger of hills, grassland and riparian zone creates
88
an edge, which results in good sighting of wild fauna especially Sambar and Chital. 2. Chakradhara : The sprawling Meadow. Surrounded by the hillocks, this marshy meadow is rich in both flora & fauna. A proliferating fern, availability of food, water and cover makes it an ideal place for the sighting of wild animals including Tigers. 3. Gopalpur : A place for Bird watching. Approach with a slow drive may give moments of memorable sighting of avian fauna like Kingfishers, Storks, lapwings & Stilts. 4. Shesh Shayya : Origin of River Charanganga. The Statue of Lord Vishnu, the preserver, reclining on the seven-hooded serpent dating back to 10th century AD, is the classic example of the architectural treasure of the past. The vicinity around is rich in fruit bearing trees. The life line of the park is well named as Charanganga as this river originates and flows through the feet, charan of Lord Vishun. A species of cane brakes is present on the slopes of Bandhavgarh hillock at Shesh shayya. 5. Bari Gupha : Ancient Monument of Past. This is the biggest man made cave of the Park dating back to 10th century A.D. Apart from its archaeological importance this cave is the abode of a variety of bats. 6. Ketkiha : Pendanus Point. This wet patch of aromatic plant Pendanus (Kewra) in the shadow of lofty Jamun and Arjun trees is the real treasure of floristic wealth of the Reserve. 7. Bhitari Bah : Tranquility in Wilderness. A drive along the meadow induces thrills of jungle. An important medicinal plant Bunch (Achorus calamus) is found here. 8. Three Cave Point : The Archeological Remains . These caves, visible from Ganesh hillock road, are the mute testimony of rich historical past. Wild animals for shelter especially by Sloth Bear now use these caves. 9. Sita Mandap : Natures creation. This rock intact over a stream in the shape of a bridge, gives an impression of a Mandap (arch). The famous tigress Sita got her name after this place. 10. Ghorademon : The Deep Gorge. This narrow and deep gorge is the creation of geological process. 11. Rampur Hillock : Also called Photographers point. Panoramic view of undulating terrain of the Tiger Reserve is clear from this point. Photographers may capture the Sylvan beauty of Sal and Bamboo forests. 12. Andhyari Jhiriya : Sparkling Stream in Darkness. Reward by lofty Mango Arjun and saptaparni (Alstion scholaris) trees this strean gives of a feeling of awesome wilderness. 13. Rajbehra : The BandhainiView .
89
This marshy meadow is the origin of River Damnar. One can have the clear view of Bandhaini hillock from here. Sprawling meadow with water overflowing over the stop dam almost through out the year abours many vultures & herds of Chital, Sambar and Wild Pigs. 14. Climbers Point : Natures Beauty Woody climbers of Butea superba and Bahunia wahlii amidst the lush green Sal tress offer spectacular view for the tourists. 15. Sehra : The Fort View : This is the biggest meadow of the Reserve. In the month of June breeding pair of Saras, Crane can be seen in and around this meadow. It harbours the insectivore plant Drosera. One captures the majestic view of Bandhavgarh hillock from here. 16. Mahaman Pond : Place to Quench the Thirst. This waterhole surrounded by dense bamboo clumps is an ideal place to watch variety of herbivores and as well as some carnivores. 17. Charger Point : In memory of Charger. Charger the beloved male tiger of Bandhavgarh, dominated the tourism zone for a decade. He died on 29th Sept. 2000 & rests here in peace. 18. Dinosaur Rock : Natures Wonder Rocky outcrop surrounded by greenery. Reminds the Jurassic Age Bandhavgarh Fort : The fort of brother. It is a treasure of archeology and history. Its history remains obscure with only sparse but tantalizing glimpses in to the past afforded by the fascinating inscriptions written in Brahmi script in the excavated caves one can climb the fort on foot from shesha Shayya. Bamera Dam : A scenic place in Panpatha Sanctuary, 12 km. from Tala. It is place to watch variety of birds. Approach/Access to Badhavgarh (Gohdi Gate) : Entrance to the park is located near Tala. It is a small village located on UmariaRewa State Highway. During 2004-05, another existing gate at Gohdi, the other end of the tourism zone has been opened for entry to reduce pressure from Tala side. However, it has been noticed that only few visitors have entered through this gate so for. The Park management should encourage and work out some modalities so that entry from Gohdi gate increases and pressure from Tala side is eased out. The approach to Gohdi is as under. By Road : Private transport buses are available from Umaria Distt. Head Quarter (27 km), Amarpatan (75 km), Shahdol (92 km) and Rewa (155 km). By Rail : Nearest railway station are Jabalpur (159 km). Katni (97 Km) and Satna (115 Km.) on West Central Railway and Umaria (27 Km ) on South Eastern Railway. By Air : Jabalpur (159 km) and Khajuraho (232 km) are the nearest airports. From Khajuraho it is a 5 hrs. drive to Tala via Satna-Barhi and Khitoli.
90
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Frame, M. (1981). The National Parks- A plan for the future. National Parks. Nov/Dec. 1981. 10-13. Gilbert, V.C. (1976). Biosphere reserves and National Parks 1 (2) : 12-14. Haber, W. (1971). Bayerischer wild National park. fedral Repulic of Germoney, Biological Conservation. 3: 313-314. Jain, D.K. (1977) Bandhavgarh National park in Madhya Pradesh Tourism and Wild life. Shukla, S.M. (1981). Bandhavgarh National park : A case Study, M.Phil. Dissertation, A.P.S. University, Rewa (M.P.)
ISSN 0975-4083 lsUVj QkWj fjlpZ LVMht] jhok }kjk fjlpZ tjuy vkWQ vkV~Zl eSust esUV ,.M lks'ky lkbalsl ds fo'ks"kkad ds :i esa fuEufyf[kr nks lanHkZ iqLrdksa dk izdk'ku uoEcj] 2013 esa fd;k tk jgk gSA
(vkbZ-,l-ch-,u- 978&81&87364&59&7)

(ISBN 978-81-87364-60-3) mDr lanHkZ iqLrdksa esa izdk'ku gsrq vki viuk rF; ijd ,oa rdZ ;qDr 'kks/k i= Hkst dj bl vdknfed dk;Z esa lg;ksx dj ldrs gSaA fgUnh Hkk"kk esa 'kks/k i= ,e-,l- oMZ esa QkUV d`frnso 010] djsDVj lkbt 14] Mcy Lis'k_ vaxzst h Hkk"kk esa VkbEl U;w jkseu QkUV lkbt 14] Mcy Lis'k esa Hkst saA

Adjustment Patterns of Scheduled Caste and Scheduled Tribe College Students

*Jago Choudhary
========================================================== Abstract- The present investigation aims to explore the variations in adjustment-patterns of the most depressed classed of our society-the scheduled caste (SC) and the scheduled tribe (ST) college students of Bihar. The study was conducted on a sample of 200 degree level male students (100 SC+100 ST) belonging to both urban and rural areas. Mohsin-shamshad adaptation of Bell Adjustment inventory was applied to measure adjustment pattern. A separate personal data sheet was also used to assess background factors. Analysis of data by using t-ratio indicates significant statistical differences on home, health, social, emotional and overall adjustment scores of the SC & ST respondents. Some implications of the finding have also been discussed. ========================================================== Introduction:Adjustment is the core of all human interactions. The variable and adaptive behaviour by which the organism and its environment are kept in balance is known as adjustment. Development of adjustment-patterns within an individual or group is influenced, apart from other thing, by the social-cultural factors namely, caste, social-economic status (SES) of the family, parental education, cultural norms, urban and rural background etc. The social-cultural background may be either advantageous or disadvantageous. There are studies which support that the persons or group belonging to the advantageous and the disadvantageous groups differ markedly in their adjustment patterns. Apparently scheduled caste (SC) and scheduled tribe (ST) people are extremely backward and disadvantageous in respect of family situations, education, economic condition, social status and political power, but they, too, differ significantly on certain cultural points and consequent adjustment patterns. The SC people, though having the heritage of Hindu culture, have to suffer the caste inferiority. They are kept alienated from the general mass, living still at the outskirts of village without land and job. The social-economic conditions of the tribals too are no better than the SC people. They are also alienated from the general mass, living in forest area and holding the aboriginal characteristics with taboos ===========================
* Assistant Professor, Department of Psychology Jagdam College,Chapra
92
and totams of Adimanav. This restricts their mobility to modern changes as compared to the SC people. Thus, differences in the cultural background make the SC and ST people behave and adjust differently to the demands of their society. Very few studies have attempted to highlight this point. The present study intends to fill this gap, Methodology: Tools used(i) In order to measure adjustment pattern, Mohsin-shamshad adaptation (Hindi) of bell adjustment inventory (modified vision, 1987) was used. (ii) in order to assess the background factors of the respondents, a personal information, especially prepared for the purpose was used. Sample :-200 college students belonging to SC and ST from Siwan chapra, Gopalgang, Ranchi, Daltonganj and Hazaribagh districts were purposefully selected and approached for the study. All respondents were male degree collage students. Initially three hundred collage students were approached but the final responses complete in all respects were available in 200 cases only (100 SC+100ST). Distribution of SC and ST sample area-wise is as follows: SC (100)
Rural (50) ST (100)
Urban (50)
Rural (50)
Urban (50)
Hypothesis:-The following hypothesis was framed. It was hypothesis that SC and ST collage students would differ markedly with respect to their home, health, social, emotional and over-all adjustment. Results & Discussion- After the careful administration of the tests on the sample above, the obtained data were analysed by using t-ratio. The results (area-wise) are shown in the tables below: Table-1 Comparison of ST and ST respondents on Home Adjustment
Group SC St
N 100 100
Mean 10.00 7.51
SD 6.24 4.44
df
Sig. level
3.28
198
.01
93
Higher mean scores of respondents (10.00) indicate poor adjustments in respect of home as compared to ST counterparts (7, 51). The difference may be explained due to the fact that the home situation of SC respondents is not able to provide conditions lending to better relations and satisfaction. All SC people suffer from inferior caste prejudices embedded in Hindu system, whereas ST people are free from caste humiliation. Table-2 Comparison of & ST respondents on Health Adjustment.
Group SC St
N 100 100
Mean 9.43 7.07
SD 4.95 3.99
df
Sig. level
8.14
198
.01
As pre table, poor adjustment of SC respondents speak of their impoverished health conditions, e.g., dwelling in slum areas of the city or in outskirts of the village Further, the food in-take of the SCs are found to be inferior to the tribals (Singh, 1982). On general habits of cleanliness, bathing, clothing etc. We find tribals relatively superior. Thus, on health conditions the difference between SC and STs is significant at .01 levels. Table-3 Comparison of SC and ST on social adjustment scores.
Group SC St
N 100 100
Mean 11.32 12.75
SD 5.16 4.35
df
Sig. level
2.10
198
.01
As is evident from the table, SC respondents are found to be superior to STs in respect of their social adjustment; Socio-political participation of SCs in Bihar has profoundly increased in recent years as compared to the tribals. Table-4 Comparison of SC &ST on Emotional adjustment scores.
Group SC St
N 100 100
Mean 10.51 12.75
SD 4.74 6.45
df
Sig. level
5.00
198
.01
94
Table indicates that SC respondents are better adjusted emotionally St Counterparts (.01 level). In face of crisis SCs Do not feel as much do not feel as much depressed as the STs Feel. Manifestations of extremist behaviours among SC people are contrary to Depression. Table-5 Comparison of the SC & ST s on overall adjustment scores
Group SC St
N 100 100
Mean 40.10 47.19
SD 12.14 8.18
df
Sig. level
4.88
198
.01
As per the table it is clearly established that SC respondents have superior adjustive patterns in matters of over-all adjustment (.01 level). Conclusion- It may finally be concluded that SC and ST student thought backward and depressed, show overall difference in respect of their adjustive responses. The reasons are mainly social-cultural variations. Frustrating conditions of the SC make them more prone to maladjustive behaviours as compared to the tribals. The present study, therefore, alerts the social and political leaders to take note of this while preparing policy for future welfare of the depressed class.
====================== References1. 2. 3. Moshin, s.m.- shamshad Hussain (1987)- Hindi adaptation of bell Adjustment Inventory,1934. Singh, R.B. (1982)-Food habits of the tribals, jr.of Applied psychology. Vyaktigat Suchna (1985)- postgraduate department of psychology, Ranchi University, Ranchi.
The Price Rise and Senior Citizens' Perception: A Study of Aurangabad City
* I. M. Farooqui
========================================================== Abstract-The rising prices always directly or indirectly affect the behavior of consumers. The present paper attempts to gauge the affect of rising prices and their impact on buying decision of senior citizens a very important segment of consumers. The perception of this class of consumers has been studied considering different aspects like price level, price control etc.The analysis show significant details about the perception of consumers during these days of inflationary trend. Keywords- Buying Behaviour, Senior Citizen, Rising Prices. ========================================================== Introduction- The consumer is rightly the king in this set up of global business and borderless economies. The term consumer behavior is the action of consumer with regard to purchase of a product. It is a sub-set of human behavior, it is the total process by which an individual interact with the environment. It includes attitude, action, and motivation for buying a product for satisfaction of wants. The buying behavior is the result of many interacting elements and factors. The buying decision process passes through five stages problem recognition, information search evaluation of alternatives purchase decision & purchase behavior. The present study deals with analyzing the consumer behavior of a segment of consumers referred as senior citizens with regard to rising prices. Objectives of the Study: 1) To analyze the perception of senior citizens about price level and its impact. 2) To understand the behavior of senior citizens in times of inflationary trends. 3) To analyze the perception of senior citizens on different factors associated with rising prices Research Methodology-The present study is mainly based on primary data collection method. A structured questionnaire with close ended options were ===========================
* Assistant Professor, Department of Commerce & Management Science, Maulana Azad College, Aurangabad (MS)
96
provided to the respondents who are having age of more than 60 years. A target of 100 senior citizens was set but due to limitations the researcher could collect 96 responses. The respondents were selected randomly and hailed from Aruangabad City. Limitations-The study is limited to the selected respondents form Aurangabad only. The study is also limited to target consumer i.e., senior citizens Data Analysis and Discussion: Analysis on the basis of Age of respondents and substitutes they prefer due to price rise.
Age 60-65 65-70 70 & Above Total Percentage YES 27 9 3 39 40.62 NO 30 9 18 57 59.38 TOTAL 57 18 21 96 100.00
Buying behavior of customers influenced by many factors. As a result of continuous increase in price rise consumers could shift to some other substitutes. A cross analysis on the basis of respondents and their opinion about shifting to some other substitutes revealed that even though prices increased the buying behavior of majority of respondents (59.38%) was not affected and they have not shifted to substitutes. On the other hand 40.62% respondents replied positively that due to price rise they had shifted to substitute products. Out of this majority of respondents were found to be in the age group of 60-65 years. Analysis of Income of respondents with opinion about rate of price rise is highest in this decade.
Income 1 To 2 Lakh 2 To 3 Lakh More than 3 Lakh Total Percentage YES 45 39 12 96 100.00 NO 0 0 0 0 0.00 TOTAL 45 39 12 96 100.00
Prices are continuously rising. Senior citizens compare the present circumstances with the earlier times. They compare the current price level with earlier decades. In order to know the opinion in this regard respondents were classified into three categories of income. All the senior citizens irrespective of income group responded that the price rise is highest in this decade. Majority of the respondents who were of the opinion that price rise is comparatively highest in this decade fall in the income group of 1 to 2 lakh rupees. On the other hand not a single respondent gave opinion that the price rise is not highest in this decade.
97
Analysis of Age with the opinion of respondents about in which decade they were more comfortable.
Age 60-65 65-70 70 & Above Total Percentage 1980 33 18 15 66 68.75 1990 18 0 0 18 18.75 2000 6 0 0 6 6.25 2010 0 0 6 6 6.25 TOTAL 57 18 21 96 100.00
Senior citizens usually talk of their experiences at different stages of their life. In order to obtain their opinion on inflationary trend a question was asked them as to in which period they felt comfortable. A cross analysis of age of senior citizens with their opinion on price rise in the last four decades revealed that majority of respondents (68.75%) had given the opinion that as compared to current trends in 1980s they felt more comfortable. Only 6.25% of the respondents each were of the opinion that comparatively they were more comfortable in last two decades. Majority (33) of respondents who felt more comfortable during 1980s belonged to the age group of 60-65 years and they constitute nearly 35% of the total senior citizens. Analysis of Income of respondents with their opinion about the products which they expect at concessional rate.
Income 1 To 2 Lakh 2 To 3 Lakh More than 3 Lakh Total Percentage GOOD S OF DAILY NEEDS 30 36 12 78 81.25 COMFORT S 9 0 0 9 9.38 LUXURIE S 0 0 0 0 0.00 MEDICINE S 6 3 0 9 9.37 TOTA L 45 39 12 96 100.00
Senior citizens generally dependent on others or retirement benefits. The expect some sort of help from society or government for their living. A question was asked to the respondents that at this stage of life which products they expect to receive at concessional rate. They were given four opinions. i.e. goods of daily needs, comforts, luxuries and medicine. In response to this question majority (81.25%) of the senior citizens replied that at this age they expect goods of daily needs to receive at concessional rate. A total of about 10% respondents who fall in the income group of 1 to 2 lakh rupees replied that they expect comfort articles at concessional rate. However not a single respondent expected to receive luxurious items at concessional rate whereas about a total of 10% senior citizens wanted medicines to be available at concessional rate to them out of which majority belonged to lower income group.
98
Analysis of Age with opinion of respondents to control rising prices.

Age CONTROL ON FUEL/LPG PRICE 48 18 21 87 90.62 CONTROL THROUGH TAXATION 9 0 0 9 9.38 CONTROL THROUGH BANK RATE 0 0 0 0 0.00 TOTAL
60-65 65-70 70 & Above Total Percentage
57 18 21 96 100.00
There are different measures to control inflation. In order to obtain their opinion a question was asked and three opinion were provided to respondents. A cross analysis of age with opinion about measures to control price rise revealed that more than 90% of the senior citizens were of the opinion that there should be control on rising fuel / LPG prices. Out of this majority of respondents belonged to the age group of 60-65 years. On the other hand about 10% respondents only were of the opinion that price rise should be controlled through taxation measures. However, not a single senior citizen under study was of the opinion that rising prices to be controlled through bank rate. Analysis of Age of respondents with their opinion about reduction in general price level.
Age 60-65 65-70 70 & Above Total Percentage 10% 0 0 3 3 3.12 20% 6 0 0 6 6.25 30% 18 9 6 33 34.38 40% 33 9 12 54 56.25 TOTAL 57 18 21 96 100.00
People in general feel that the price level in general should go down. Senior citizens under study were asked to give their opinion about how much general price level they expect to be reduced. The respondents were provided four opinions ranging from 10 to 40%. A cross analysis of age of senior citizens with their opinion about reduction in general price level revealed that majority of them who belonged to the age group of 60 to 65 years were of the opinion that the general price level to be reduced by 40%. In all the age groups such respondents who were of this opinion constitute 56.25% of the total senior citizens under study. Those who were of the opinion that general price level to be reduced by 10% were lowest. Conclusions1. Irrespective of inflationary trend the respondents under study did not preferred to shift to the substitute products. 2. All the senior citizens belonging to lower income group under study
99
3.
4.
5.
6.
were of the opinion that the present price level is the highest in this decade. In general majority of senior citizens with reference to rising prices replied that in last four decades from 1980 to 2010, they felt more comfortable in 1980s. The consumer confidence was found to be good among senior citizens of Aurangabad city during 1980s. Senior citizens expect some sort of help from Society/Government for their peaceful living. Majority of respondents falling in the income group of upto 3 lakh rupees expected to receive goods of daily needs at concessional rate. Out of this majority of senior citizens belonged to the income group of upto 3 lakh rupees. The senior citizens belonged to lower income group expected medicines to be supplied to them at concessional rate. More than 90% of the senior citizens were of the opinion that control on fuel/LPG prices should be used as a measure to control inflationary trend. All the respondents were silent on bank rate as a measure to control inflation. Majority of the senior citizens opined that general price level to be reduced by 40%. The highest number of respondents who were of this opinion belonged to the age group of 60 to 65 years.
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Philip Kotler & others, "Marketing Management", Pearson, 13th Ed., A South Asia Perspective. Economic Survey 2011-12, "State of Economy & Prospects", Southern Economist, Vol. 50, No. 24, April, 15, 2012 . Economic Survy 2012-13, "Budget Speech of Union Minister of Finance", Mr. Pranab Mukherjee, Part-A. A.C. Kavitha & Paravathy P., "High Food Inflation: A Cause for Worry?", Southern Economist, Vol. 50, No. 23 . Joel Dean, "Managerial Economist" PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2010. D. N. Dwivedi, "Managerial Economics", Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. 6th Ed. 2001. Datt & Sundaram, "Indian Economy", S. Chand & Co. Ltd. 63 Ed., 2011. Dr. C. B. Gupta, Dr. N. Rajan Nair, "Marketing Management", Sultan Chand & Songs, 12th Edn. 2009. V.S. Ramaswamy, S. Namakumari, "Marketing Management", 4th Edn. 2009.
Ethics: Globalization and International Mark eting Probl ems

* V. L. Bhangdia
========================================================== Abstract- Due to the globalization of markets and production processes, an ever increasing number of marketers and business people have to deal with ethical issues in cross-cultural settings. In this article, main approaches in marketing ethics have been reviewed for ethical analysis and decision making in international settings. The purpose of this article is to present some guidelines that can serve as a guide for global marketers in the important areas for marketing ethics. It is supposed to assist marketers in their efforts to behave in an ethical fashion. It is assumed that, local conditions of international markets may be different; but the some global marketing ethics principles should be applicable to all markets. It is proposed that a uniform code of ethics should be created by WTO and UN organizations to solve diverse cultural differences to arrive at cooperative strategies in international marketing. ========================================================== I. Introduction- Globalization and International Marketing Ethics Problems are closely related to each other. Increased globalization resulted in many problems including ethical ones. From 1950 to 2000, world trade expanded almost 20-fold, far outstripping world output, which grew by six and a half times (WTO, 2001). In this expansion, exports and foreign direct investment has played an increasing role in the global economy. Even small businesses are increasing their cross border investments. In general, the average yearly outflow of FDI increased from about $25 billion in 1975 to a record $1.3 trillion in 2000 (UN, 2001). These mean that millions of business people working abroad in different geographical, political, International Research Journal of Finance and Economics - Issue 26 (2009) 94 legal, social and cultural environments. It is easy to guess that different environments have created many problems, including ethical problems, for international marketing personnel at home and abroad. Especially during the past 55 years, technological improvements in transportation, communication and information processing and internet made great contribution to the development of globalization. If this trend continues, the prophesies of Levitt, about globalization, in 1960s, ===========================
* Principal, Smt.Kesharbai Lahoti Mahavidyalaya, Amravati M.S.
101
will become reality in 2020s. To manage this trend fairly, it is advisable to create universal ethical norms, rules and regulations. A. Dimensions of Globalization- Globalization is an umbrella term and has some dimensions. It can be related to every fields of daily life. For instance, a marketing staff versus an engineer could interpret globalization in different ways. Dimensions are as follows (www.globalpolicy.org) Economics related to globalization in trade, money, corporations, banking, capital, Political science, governance, wars, peace, IGOS, NGOS, and regimes, Sociology-communities, conflict, classes, nations, agreements, Psychology-individuals as subjects and objects of global action, Anthropology- cultures overlapping, adapting, clashing, merging, Communications- information as knowledge and tools-internet, Geography- Everything provided it can be anchored in space. Each of these social sciences looks at a special aspect of the whole system of interdependent parts that constitutes our world system. Each discipline constructs a concept of globalization that reflects its special point of view: Consider how it relates its focal concerns to the contemporary world System (www.kongar.org). According to Kongar, globalization has three dimensions. These are political, economic, and Cultural aspects of globalism (www.kongar.org). Political dimension denotes that after collapsing of the Soviet Union, the U.S. of America has become the superpower and the single authority of the new world order and security. On the other 95 International Research Journal of Finance and Economics - Issue 26 (2009) hand, economic dimension of the globalization denotes the economic sovereignty and domination of international capital globally. As the third dimension of globalization, cultural aspect, denotes two unrelated results of this phenomenon: One of them is globalism of the consumer behaviors, such as. Consuming similar food, clothes, entertainment and similar products in any aspects of daily life. The second dimension is the micro-nationalism; too much freedom for citizens results in destruction of the unitary structures of independent states, such as Yugoslavia and Iraq. B. The Emergence of Global Institutions- In international business, globalization has several facets, including the globalization of markets and globalization of production (Hill, 2004: 7-8). The globalization of markets refers to the merging of historically distinct and separate national markets into one huge global markets. On the other hand, the globalization of production refers to the sourcing of goods and services from locations around the globe to take advantage of national differences in cost and quality factors of production (such as labor,energy, raw materials, land, and capital). As markets globalize
102
and an increasing proportion of business activity transcends national borders, institutions need to help manage, regulate, and police the global marketplace, and to promote the establishment of multinational treaties to govern the global business system. During the past 55 years, a number of important global institutions have been created to help perform these functions. These institutions include the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade(GATT) and its successor, the World Trade Organization (WTO); the International Monetary Fund (IMF) and its twin sister, the World Bank ; and the United Nations (UN). All these institutions were created by voluntary agreement between individual nation-states, and their functions are enshrined in international treaties (Hill, ibid: 9). These organizations have many important roles in creating international business ethical rules and regulations. Especially, The World Trade Organization is primarily responsible for policing the world trading system and making sure nation states adhere to the rules laid down in trade treaties signed by WTO member states. Now it has over 145 nations, and the last member is the Republic of China. The WTO is also responsible for facilitating the establishment of additional multinational agreements between WTO member states (www.imf.org). C. Drivers of Globalization- From the economical point of view, two macro factors seem to underlie the trend toward globalization (Frankel, 2000). The first is the decline in barriers to flow of goods, services and capital that has occurred since the end of World War II. The second factor is technological change, particularly the dramatic developments in recent years in communication, information processing, and transportation technologies. Everybody knows the importance of the role technological innovations and developments in globalization; on the other hand, declining trade and investment barriers with the help of GATT and WTO is as important as the first one. During the 1920s and 30s, many nations erected formidable barriers to international trade and foreign direct investment. International trade occurs when a firm exports goods or services to consumers in another country. Foreign direct investment occurs when a firm invests resources in business activities outside its home country. Many of the barriers to international trade took the form of high tariffs on imports of manufactured goods. The typical aim of such tariffs was to protect domestic industries from foreign competition. Ultimately, this practice depressed world demand and contributed to the Great Depression of the 1930s (Hill, ibid: 11). Having learned from this experience, the advanced industrial nations of the West committed themselves after World War II to removing barriers to the free flow of goods, services, and capital between nations (Bhagwati, 1989). This goal was protected and realized in the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade. Under the umbrella of GATT, nine rounds of negotiations among member states have worked to lower barriers to the flow of goods and services. The impacts of GATT agreements on average tariff
103
rates for manufactured goods were formidable. If we give a figure, average tariff rates International Research Journal of Finance and Economics Issue 26 (2009) 96 have been fallen significantly since 1950, from average 30-40 percent to 3.9 percent in 2000 (The United Nations, 2001). In order to nullify this tariff rate, Regional economic integrations have been created. Such as, European (EU), North American Free Trade Area (NAFTA), Free Trade Area of the America (FTAA), Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN), and Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) are important attempts to achieve economic gains from the free flow of trade & investment between neighboring countries. The most successful regional economic cooperation is the EU. The Single European Act sought to create a true single market by abolishing administrative barriers to the free flow of trade and investment between EU countries. In the near future, it is expected that the EU will become a political union like the USA (Swann, 1990). II. Ethical Issues in International Marketing A. History of Ethics- Ethics is a branch of philosophy that studies morals and values. Interest in ethics and ethical codes has been around for a long time. Centuries ago, Aristotle referred to character, which he called ethos, as the most potent means of persuasion (Lane Cooper, 1960). He also identified elements of virtue as justice, courage, temperance, magnificence, magnanimity, liberality, gentleness, prudence, and wisdom. In Roman times, the emperor Justinian was the first to incorporate ethics into the legal system and to establish schools to educate lawyers concerning ethics morality, and law. Napoleon established a code of thirty-six statutes based on the concept that all citizens, regardless of circumstances of birth or social stature, should be treated fairly and equally. Indeed, every civilization has recognized the need for establishing laws and codes to guide human relationship and behavior (Metcalfe, 2003: 74). Ethics studies the differences between right and wrong, and through these studies philosophers have developed several theories. Some major ethical theories are egoism, intuitionism, emotivism, rationalism, and utilitarianism. Egoism is the belief that people should only look at how the consequences of an action affect them. Intuitionism is the belief in an immediate awareness of moral value. Emotivism is the belief that ethical decisions are expressions of emotion. Rationalism focuses on the metaphysical aspects of ethics. Utilitarianism in ethics considers how moral actions produce the greatest overall good for everyone (www.questia.com). B. Ethical Perceptions and Culture- A research conducted by Armstrong reveals that there is a relationship between the cultural environment (Australia, Singapore and Malaysia) and the perceived ethical problems. In another study, Armstrong finds out the most frequently cited problem of Australian International Business Managers is gifts/favours/entertainment and that this problem may
104
be related to the culture where the international business is being conducted. And the most important ethical problem to Australian international managers is large-scale bribery (Armstrong, 1992). Although, different cultural environments result in different ethical perceptions in international marketing, for the sake of ethical consistency, it is necessary to generate internationally applicable ethical rules and regulations. As a matter of fact, a finding of an empirical research conducted by Armstrong proposes that The Australian general managers disagreed that it is necessary to compromise one`s ethics to succeed in international marketing(Armstrong, ibid: 161). C. Ethical Approaches in International Marketing- Due to the globalization of markets and production, ever increasing number of international marketing personnel has to deal with ethical issues in cross-cultural settings. Murphy and Laczniak (1981: 58) asserted two decades ago that as more firms move into multinational marketing, ethical issues tend to increase.Actually, international marketers are often criticized for ethical misconduct (Armstrong et al., 1990: 6-15). In a cross-cultural environment, marketers are exposed to different values and ethical norms (Nill, 2003: 90-104). Which ethical position should marketers take when acting in a foreign culture? In other words, whose ethics do we use in international marketing? is very important to be answered. DeGeorge answers this question as our ethics; our ethical values are not like a coat that we put on in certain seasons and places throw off elsewhere. We cannot leave our ethics behind as we venture around globe. If we think we can, or if we have no ethics, then, of course, the question is beside the point (DeGeorge, Business Credit, and 2000: 50). In International Marketing, ethical decision- making process can be influenced by many ethical approaches. These approaches can be classified descriptive-prescriptive and communicative approach (Nill, 2003: 90), and normative (prescriptive), and descriptive (positive) theory of marketing ethics approach (Hunt and Vitel.1986: 5-15). 1. Descriptive Approach- Descriptive ethics describe the values and moral reasoning of individuals and groups and attempt to provide an understanding of the ethical decision-making process (Schopenhauer, 1979). It is assumed that the ethical decision-making process affected by a variety of individual, situational, and contextual factors such as personal experiences, opportunity, the organizational environment and the cultural environment (Nill, ibid: 91). 99 International Research Journal of Finance and Economics - Issue 26 (2009) 2. Normative Approach- Normative ethics suggest an answer to the general moral question of what ought to do (Schlegelmilch, 1998; Murphy and Laczniak, 1981, Chonko, 1995). These researchers are concerned with the justification of moral norms and ethical values. It has been debated for many years whether moral responsibility can be attributed to business organizations. Some years ago, ethics have nothing to do with international business; then, normative
105
ethics cannot be a concern for business corporations. Some scholars discuss that business organizations cannot assume moral responsibility. Only individuals acting on behalf of the corporation are morally motivated, have intensions, and can be held accountable (Ranken, 1987: 633-37). On the other hand, some scholars argue that some aspects of the organization are not Reconcilable with moral responsibility. Organizations serve a purpose and in that sense are not entirely autonomous. Organizations can never end in themselves; they have been created for a specific purpose. The organization cannot be held responsible for actions that go beyond or against that purpose (Wilmot, 2001: 161-169). Normative approaches can be classified as deontological theories and teleological theories.One of the purposes of these theories is to develop guidelines or rules to assist international marketers in their efforts to behave in an ethical fashion (Hunt and Vitell, 1986: 5-15). Fundamental difference between these theories is that deontological theories focus on the specific actions or behaviors of an individual, whereas teleological theories focus on the consequences of the actions or behaviors. a. Deontological Evaluations- Deontologists believe that certain features of the act itself other than the value it brings into existence make an action or rule right (Frankena, 1963). Deontological views have a rich intellectual history dating back at least as far as Socrates. For them the problem has been to determine the best set of rules to live by. Examples proposed have been the golden rule of doing unto others as you would have them do unto you (Sidgwick, 1907). According to Laczniak; international marketers have certain duties, under most circumstances, constitute moral obligations that include the duties of fidelity, gratitude, justice, beneficence, self-improvement and noninjury. b. Teleological Evaluation- Teleologists suggest that people ought to determine the results of various behaviors in a situation and evaluate the goodness or badness of all the consequences. A behavior is then ethical if it produces a greater balance of good over evil than any available alternative (Nill, Ibid). Teleology can be divided into two subcategories as egoism and utilitarianism (Ferrel et al., 1989: 55-64). (1). Egoism- Egoism defines rightness in terms of the consequences for the individual (Meng, 1998: 333-352). It postulates that one should choose actions that result in the maximum of good for oneself (Rosen,1978). (2). Utilitarianism- In contrast to the egoist,the utilitarian does not minimize bad or maximize his/her own good in general. Ethical universalism (utilitarianism) holds that an act is right only if it creates the greatest good for the greatest number. Hobbes and Nietzsche were ethical egoists but such philosophers as G.E. Moore and John Stuart Mill were ethical universalists. If we explain these theories with an example; deontologists do not tell a lie and they do not consider the results of the action, on the other hand, teleologists could tell a lie if they save a life, or when telling the truth hurts another person.
106
3. Dialogic Approach- As a third approach proposed by Nill and Shultz (1997: 4) is communicative approach as an alternative ethical framework for macro marketers. Dialogic idealism combines moral universalism with moral International Research Journal of Finance and Economics - Issue 26 (2009) 100 relativism by suggesting universally valid rules that prescribe how an ideal dialogue is to be conducted without imposing moral core values or hyper norms. Thus, the actual outcome of the dialogue will depend on its participants. Only the way in which the dialogue should be conducted can be seen as a universal obligation for everyone who is truly motivated in participating in the dialogue. Depending on the nature of the ethical problem and specific situational requirements a dialogic approach could be a helpful tool for marketers. Nill (2003: 92-97) argues that more work is needed to find out how a communicative approach can be implemented as a real-world corporate ethical responsibility approach. D. Ethical Problems in International Marketing- The moral question of what is right or appropriate poses many dilemmas for domestic marketers. Even within a country, ethical standards are frequently not defined or always clear (Cateora and Graham: 142). The problem of business ethics is infinitely more complex in international marketplace, because value judgments differ widely among culturally diverse groups. That which is commonly accepted as right on one country may be completely unacceptable in another. Giving business gifts of high value, for example, is generally condemned in the United States, but in many countries of the world gifts are not only accepted but also expected (www.business-ethics.org).Upon examination of existing ethical frameworks in the field of international marketing from a macro marketing perspective, it is argued that marketers cannot always rely on universally accepted ethical norms, such as hyper norms or core values that have been suggested by a deluge of marketing literature (Dunfee,1995; Dunfee, Smith, and Ross, 1999: 14; DeGeorge, 2000). Some basic moral values could be used in evaluating international marketing ethical issues. Violations of basic moral values in international marketing settings should be accepted as ethical problems. After studying the literature related to international marketing, it is easily seen that most of the marketing ethics studies involve the use of scenarios as research instruments and relate to the following marketing sub-disciplines (Armstrong, 1992: 167): market research, retail management, purchasing management, advertising management, marketing management, industrial marketing, and marketing education. Few studies relate to International Marketing Ethics have been most prominent (Armstrong and Everett, 1991:61-71; Armstrong, Stening, Ryands, Marks, and Mayo, 1990: 6-15; Armstrong, 1992). Major International Marketing Ethical Problems derived from applied researches by Armstrong (Ibid) are presented with their short definitions as follows:
107
Traditional Small Scale Bribery- involves the payment of small sums of money, typically to a foreign official in exchange for him/her violating some official duty or responsibility or to speed routine government actions (grease payments, kickbacks). Large Scale Bribery- a relatively large payment intended to allow a violation of the law or designed to influence policy directly or indirectly (eg, political contribution). Gifts/Favours/Entertainment- includes a range of items such as: lavish physical gifts, call girls, opportunities for personal travel at the companys expense, gifts received after the completion of transaction and other extravagant expensive entertainment. Pricing includes unfair differential pricing, questionable invoicing where the buyer requests a written invoice showing a price other than the actual price paid, pricing to force out local competition, dumping products at prices well below that in the home country, pricing practices that are illegal in the home country but legal in host country (eg, price fixing agreements). Products/Technology includes products and technology that are banned for use in the home country but permitted in the host country and/or appear unsuitable or inappropriate for use by the people of the host country. Tax Evasion Practices - used specifically to evade tax such as transfer pricing (i.e., where prices paid between affiliates and/or parent company adjusted to affect profit allocation) including the use of tax havens, where any profit made is in low tax jurisdiction, adjusted 101 International Research Journal of Finance and Economics - Issue 26 (2009) interest payments on intra-firm loans, questionable management and service fees charged between affiliates and /or the parent company. Illegal/Immoral Activities in the Host Country practices such as: polluting theenvironment, maintaining unsafe working conditions; product/ technology copying where protection of patents, trademarks or copyrights has not been enforced and shortweighting overseas shipments so as to charge a country a phantom weight. Questionable Commissions to Channel Members unreasonably large commissions of fees paid to channel members, such as sales agents, middlemen, consultants, dealers and importers. Cultural Differences between cultures involving potential misunderstandings related to the traditional requirements of the exchange process (e.g., transactions) may be regarded by one culture as bribes but be acceptable business practices in another culture. These practices include: gifts, monetary payments, favours, entertainment and political contributions.
108
Involvement in Political Affairs - related to the combination of marketing activities and politics including the following: the exertion of political influence by multinationals, engaging in marketing activities when either home or host countries are at war and illegal technology transfers (Armstrong, Ibid). IV. Concluding Remarks- It is accepted that globalization is an unavoidable process and will progress forever. All business that firms desire to compete successfully in international environment, should obey to legal and ethical rules and regulations. To behave in an ethically and socially responsible way should be a hallmark of every marketers behavior, domestic or international. It requires little thought for most of us to know the socially responsible or ethically correct response to questions about breaking the law, destroying the environment, denying someone his or her rights, taking unfair advantage, or behaving in a manner that would bring bodily harm or damage (Cateora and Graham, Ibid). Actually, the difficult international marketing issues are not the obvious and simple right-or wrong ones. In many countries the international marketer faces the dilemma of responding to many situations where there is no local law, where local practices forgive a certain behavior, or the company willing to do what is necessary is favored over the company that refuses to engage in practices that are not ethical. In many countries, laws may help define the borders of minimal ethical or social responsibility, but the law is only the basis above which ones social and personal morality is tested. In the U.S.A., in general, legal sanctions prevent marketers from doing unethical transactions. The problems related to international marketing ethics are not important problems in U.S. domestic market; but in international settings, especially differences in culture creates some ethical dilemmas. Perhaps the best guide to good international marketing ethics are the examples set by ethical business leaders (J. Byrne, 2003). DeGeorge (Ibid) proposes to solve international business ethics problems in five guidelines: 1. Do not direct intentional harm. 2. Produce more good than harm for the host country. 3. Respect the rights of employees and of all others affected by ones actions or policies. 4. To the extent consistent with ethical norms, respect the local culture and work with and not against it. 5. Multinationals should pay their fair share of taxes and cooperate with the local governments in developing equitable laws and other background institutions. On the other hand, Cateora and Graham (Ibid) propose to be used some guidelines in international business: such as,Utilitarian ethics-Does the action optimize the common good or benefits of all constituencies? And
109
who are the constituencies?. Rights of the parties- Does the action International Research Journal of Finance and Economics - Issue 26 (2009) 102 respect the rights of the individuals involved? Justice or fairness- Does the action respect the canons of justice or fairness to all parties involved? Answers to these questions can help the international marketer ascertain the degree to which decisions are beneficial or harmful, right or wrong, or whether the consequences of actions are ethically or socially responsible. Perhaps the best framework to work within is defined by asking: Is it legal? Is it right? Can it withstand disclosure to stockholders, to company officials, and to the public? (Dunfee, et al., 1999: 14). Though the U.S.A. has clearly led the campaign against international bribery, European firms and institutions are apparently putting more effort and money into the promotion of what they call corporate social responsibility (Maignan and Ralston,2002: 497-514). For example, the watch dog group Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) Europe, in cooperation with the INSEAD business school outside Paris, is studying the relationship between investment attractiveness and positive corporate behaviors on several dimensions. Their studies find a strong link between firms` social responsibility and European institutional investors` choices for equity investments (Stock, 2003:1, and www.csreurope.org). All this is not to say that European firms do not still have their corporate misbehaviors (C.Matlack, 2003: 48-50). However, it is expected that more efforts in the future to focus on measuring and monitoring corporate social responsibility around the world. In a global economy, to solve international marketing ethics problems, self regulation by companies and industries is important, but that additional background institutions with having authority to direct globalization is very important. Under these circumstances international sanctions can be applied for ethical violations. DeGeorge(2000:50) asserts that for purposes of international business, there are certain basic claims and norms that are necessary for business, and these throw some light on claims to universality in ethics. For example, the Universal Declaration of Human Rights is an important norm which has been ratified by almost every country and lays down basic principles that should always be adhered to irrespective of the culture in which one is doing business. For instance, Article 23 of this declaration states that : Everyone has the right to work, to free choice of employment, to just and favorable Conditions of work, and to protection against employment. Every one without any discrimination has the right to equal pay for equal work. Everyone who works has the right to just and favorable remuneration ensuring for himself and his family and existence worthy of human dignity and supplemented, if necessary, by other means of social protection. Everyone has the right to form and to join trade unions for the protection
110
of his interests (Www.un.org/Overview/rights.html.). There are many articles like article 23; they can be accepted as building blocks of universal ethical norms and rules. In addition to such international organizations as UN, IMF, World Bank, World Trade Organization, the International Chamber of Commerce; International Court of Justice for Business and Commerce should be established to solve international marketing ethics problems legally. Then ethical will become legal. If we want to do business honest and fair in international marketing area, we can find many universal ethical rules and regulations to obey. Cultural differences should not result in violations of universal ethics. If UN is reorganized as a more powerful institution, it can enforce global business agents to conform to the universal ethics norms. Today, it is generally believed that, the U.S. of America as a superpower has been taking advantage of official political power of UN and related institutions, such as IMF, WTO, and World Bank in order to realize his political and economic benefits to sustain global domination. These institutions could not function effectively and freely to their predefined objectives. A reorganization and reform is necessary to empower UN and other international institutions to meet the common needs of all humanity, instead of only U.S. and other developed countries. Otherwise, instead of peace and stabilization, chaos and terror could dominate the whole world. Adapted to the contemporary world 103 International Research Journal of Finance and Economics - Issue 26 (2009) conditions, well-organized, reformed, empowered and equitable working UN and related institutions could really contribute to the global peace, security and, social and economic wealth of nations. All nations could obey the rules and regulations of independent global institutions in regulating and reorganizing world trade and global economy. Under these conditions, to solve international marketing ethics problems: international institutions should manage, regulate, and police the global marketplace, and to promote the establishment of multinational treaties to govern the global business system.
====================== References[1] Armstrong, R. W. (1992), An Empirical Investigation of International Marketing Ethics: Problems Encountered by Australian Firms, Journal of Business Ethics, 11:165. Armstrong,R. W. and Everett, J.E.(1991), The Dimensions of Ethical Perceptions in Marketing, Asia Journal of Marketing, Vol.1, December,61-71. Armstrong,R.W.,Stenig, B.W., Ryands, J.K.,Marks, L. and Mayo, M.(1990), International Ethics: Problems Encountered by Australian Firms, Asia Pacific of International Marketing, pp., 6-15. Bartlett C. A. and S. Ghoshal (1989), Managing across Borders: The Transnational Solution, Boston: Harvard Business School Press. Byrne, J. (2003), Goodbye to an Ethicist, Business Week, February 10, 2003.
[2] [3]
[4] [5]
111
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13]
[14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27] [28] [29] [30]
Bhagwati, J.(1989), Protectionism, Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Cateora, P. R. And J.L. Graham (2005), International Marketing, 12th edition, New York: Mc Graw Hill/Irwin. Chonko, L. (1995), Ethical Decision Making in Marketing, CA: Sage. Cooper, L. (1960), (ed.), The Rhetoric of Aristotle, NY: Appleton Century Crofts Inc. DeGeorge, R. T. (2000),Ethics in International Business-A Contradiction in Terms?, Business Credit, September 1, 2000, Vol:102, Issue:8, p.50. Douglas, S., and Y. Wind (1987), The Myth of Globalization,NY: www.ingentaconnect.com/content/mcb/036/2001, April 13, 2005. Dunfee, T. W.,N. C. Smith, and W. T. Ross (1999), Social Contracts And Marketing Ethics, Journal of Marketing, July 1999, p. 14. Erevelles, Sunil etall (2002), Advertising Strategy in China: An Analysis of Cultural And Regulatory Factors,Journal of International Consumer Marketing, 15(1), 91-123. Ferrell, O.C., Gresham, L.G. and Fraedrich, J. (1989) A Synthesis of Ethical Decision Models in Marketing, Journal of Macromarketing, 9 (Fall), 55-64. Frankel, J.A. (200), Globalization of the Economy, National Bureau of Economic Research, working paper no:7858,2000. Frankena, W. (1963), Ethics,Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, Inc. Friedman, Milton, Capitalism and Freedom, www.globalpolicy.org/globaliz/ econ/chmsky99.htm. Herskovitz, M., Man and His Works, New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1952. Hill, C.W.L. (2004), Global Business Today, 3th edition, New York: Mc Graw Hill/Irwin. Hofstede, Geert (1984), Culture`s Consequences: International Differences in Work Related Values, Beverly Hills, CA: Sage Publications, p. 21. http:// www.business-ethics.org/corpadv.html, April 12, 2005. http:// www.business.org/index.php?show, April 12, 2005. http:// www.csreurope.org ; and Howard Stock, Euro Funds Bank on Social Metrics, Investor Relations Business, April 21, 2003, p.1. http:// www.globalpolicy.org/globaliz/define, April 23, 2005. http:// www.questia.com/popularSearches/ethics.jsp, May 2, 2005. http:// www.imf.org/external/np/2000, April 26, 2005. International Research Journal of Finance and Economics - Issue 26 (2009) 104 http:// www.un.org/Overview/rights.html., January 30, 2006. Hunt, Shelby D., and Scott A. Vitell (1986), General Theory of Marketing Ethics, Journal of Macromarketing,1986, 6 (Spring):5-15. John A. Byrne (2003), Goodbye to an Ethicist, Business Week, February 10,2003. Kongar, Emre, Kuresellesme ve Kulturel Farkliliklar Cercevesinde Ulusal Kultur, May.
Role of Information Technology in Taxation

*Vinod Triapathi
========================================================== Abstract- Tax information and tax privacy remain important, but are increasingly subject to the same forces, legal, social, and technical, as other personal information. Much of the essential regulation for personal financial information occurs outside of the tax content. ========================================================== Introduction- Advances in technology will clearly change the tax environment. Technology will provide additional tools to tax administrators to observe and monitor individuals and transactions (e.g., it is likely that many capital goods such as cars, heavy machinery, or even televisions will have identification and tracking tags included as part of the manufacturing process.) This combination will provide an opportunity for countries to make tax policy changes both as to the relative role of different taxes in financing government, and as to the design of specific tax instruments. With potential benefits come substantial potential costs. One of the key questions is whether the tax system is capable of taking advantage of the promise of technology in ways that are consistent with individuals normal modes of life and conceptions of privacy. Throughout the years, the tax administrators have been constantly concerned about developing new ways of improving institutional performance by increasing the effectiveness of tax control and providing taxpayer services that may allow them to better comply with their tax obligations. With varying levels of result, a fundamentally important problem appears to be the difficulty faced by the tax administrations to adopt and put into operation integral management models that may lead their administrative processes. The complexity of the mission of the tax administrations and the dispersion and multiplicity of its various activities in a permanently changing environment, call for the development of these models which are, in essence, the determining success factor of the organization in complying with its mission. Additionally, in operational terms there have been difficulties related to the implementation of information systems whose qualities and merits may allow it to become part of the organizational context wherein they render their services, with adequate levels of effectiveness. ===========================
* Head, Department of commerce, Kusum Bai Jain Girls College Bhind (M.P.)
113
Basic Concepts- Starting from an adequate analysis of the outside environment and real internal capabilities, one must explicitly determine the control strategies and service for the taxpayer. This means establishing clearly on which sector of taxpayer or segments of tax evasion one will act, what actions will be taken to control efficiently the sectors of major noncompliance, how one will make available the resources to exercise the controls, what actions will be taken to improve institutional abilities and related control capabilities, and what type of service and attention will be offered to the taxpayer.The administrative process (planning, organization, direction, execution and control) establishing work and information flows, which operate horizontally through the different key areas finalizing in specific actions of service to, or control of, the taxpayers. In this manner the operating work is a part of the flow of a process and not as something separate, to ensure its integration and consistency with specific and superior objectives and strategies. Technology will allow the evolution of the tax administrations where in administrative control (AC) plays a preponderant role. It will allow passing from the measurement of production or service units, to the relevant measurements of the performance of processes, and the measurement of final results of the operation. But this is only possible if one has an available which functions in accordance with the needs of the tax administration, and which develops and strengthens the key factors for the success of the mission. Vision of Impact of New Technology in Tax Administration- When we refer to new technologies, we are talking principally of the infra-structure of connectivity at high speed, the software and hardware products which operate on it, and the effects of the synergy of their popularization on all areas, and the subsequent impact on technological evolution. The popularization of systems that operate in real time will permit the immediate interconnection with different databases and the immediate crossing of transactions for their verification, loading or tax credit. Now it is possible to have access to the systems from anywhere, with only a PC and a navigator, or a mobile phone, which in turn causes the systems to adjust themselves, change their formats, and modification of processes. Technology allows us increasingly to know more details of each taxpayer and administrate this information to be able to offer personalized services and specific specialized controls. The quality of the information of the transactions carried out by the taxpayers with the tax administration improves significantly. Not only can we capture the data from the source that generates them, but we can offer the programs that allows them to generate the data, prepare their returns, settle their taxes and in general allows them to comply with their tax obligations. The new technologies qualify us to improve all stages of the administrative process (planning, organization, management, execution and control) may be carried out with greater speed, better information and by interrelating the different organizational levels. For example, from the overall
114
analysis of the tax returns, information from other parties and relevant economic data, one can establish guidelines and trends that allow one to define in a dynamic manner programs of tax control, to be executed on a real time basis carrying out the selection of cases to verify, control and audit. Consequently, the process of feeding the results is accelerated, the agility of the planning process is increased, one obtains closeness with reality, and communication and interactivity is improved. The Process Network- Since the control base is in the processes, and in how these, when integrating and flowing through the organization, generate information flows, we should analyze the creation of networks of processes. In essence, they are the ones that allow us to undertake the control and service actions and certainly may guarantee us a better quality in taxpayer assistance. The importance of this aspect is also found in technologys significant contribution to this area. We will add to the technological definitions known by everyone such as Internet, intranet, e-mail, Web applications, databases, callcenters, one more: work flow. To make more effective the creation of networks of processes, it is essential to identify the key management factors and work on them to define their most relevant processes, their main indicators and the priority order for their integration. The design of processes will consider the most adequate technological means to apply, and the scope of automation, i.e. up to what point technology interferes to carry out day-to-day tasks. Conclusion- In the future, tax information in the electronic age will be subject to the same critical issues, such as those involving data security, as other personal information. The government, the private sector, and sometimes even the general public have numerous opportunities to gain access to the same types of information that in the past were found exclusively in tax returns. The problems of data security for tax information are heightened by four developments of particular significance. First, more Americans file their tax returns with the IRS every year through e-filing. Second, tax preparation software, like other software, is subject to hacking, viruses, data security breaches, software failures, as well as use of online tracking tools by professional tax preparers. Third, tax returns may be prepared by U.S. firms that outsource work internationally. Fourth, the IRS already has faced the same problems as the private sector concerning data security. In sum, there are now threats of privacy meltdowns, or dramatic loss of gigabytes of personal information, in a way that was unthinkable in the age of paper tax returns. The government in its tax administration follows a data processing model that it uses in other managerial areas. The IRS gathers information about income from employees, investments from financial service companies, outstanding government loans from other branches of the federal government, and a broad variety of other data points about financial events. Much of the essential regulation for personal financial information occurs outside of the tax content. In conclusion, ones
115
tax information and tax privacy remain important, but are increasingly subject to the same forces, legal, social, and technical, as other personal information.
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. 5. www.business.mapsofindia.com www.itrust.in www.wikipedia.org www.google.com www.gmail.com
ISSN 0975-4083

The Aims & Objectives- To provide a plateform for the publication of original unpublished Research Papers, Summary of Research Project, Thesis and Book review relating to all subjects of Social & Life Sciences and to promote interdisciplinary research work. Book Review can be published on receipt of two copies of concerned book. Guidelines & Member Ship Fee -Authors/ Researchers can contact in the Registered Office given below-

Chief Editor

Dynamics of Passion: A Study of Shak espeare s Othello * P.K.Jain

========================================================== Abstract- Othello is a tragedy of a passionate and unreasoned character who falls prey to misapprehensions of his own that leads to his tragic ruin. Bradley treats Othello as a drama of modern life. Othello is the most painfully exciting and the most terrible. ========================================================== Great art, literature, cinema and legends would not be the same without the crime of passion. Without it, there would be no Othello, no Dantes Inferno. It is pathological obsession that breeds the germs of a perfect passion crime. It pushes either sex unthinkable and overrides the dictates of reason thus benumbs rational brain. Psychiatrists call such disorders of mind as a case of delusion, while Doctors say violence occurs as an extreme act of impulsiveness and a loss of inhibition1. Othello is a tragedy of a passionate and unreasoned character who falls prey to misapprehensions of his own that leads to his tragic ruin. Bradley treats Othello as a drama of modern life. He says .. the unlikeness of Othello to Hamlet is much greater than the likeness, and the later play belongs decidedly to one group with it successors. We have seen that, like them it is a tragedy of passion, a description inapplicable to Julius Caeser or Hamlet. He further comments ; Of all Shakespeares tragedies. I would answer, not even excepting King Lear, Othello is the most painfully exciting and the most terrible2. Harrison expresses about the play, Othello perfectly fulfils all the demands of deep tragedy. The technique is magnificent ; the theme the overwhelming power of evil unrestrained and unsuspected is universal ; the suffering is in the highest degree charged with pathos; and even with a performance that is no more than adequate the final effect leaves only a clod unmoved.3 Othello, being a domestic tragedy, deals with marital relations of husband and wife, thus reducing the scope of the play to a narrow range. The characters are limited and the incidents and episodes are confined to one family, and their friends. It marks the single passion of jealousy. In it, we learn how the pure relations of a credulous husband and an innocent wife is poisoned by lago, a polished villain. The idea of Othello being a domestic tragedy becomes more confirmed when we think that the sufferers are mainly members of a family the husband and wife. Even the villain remains alive at the end of ===========================
* Professor of English, Govt. P. G. College, Satna (M.P.)
117
the play. It is different from the other great tragedies of Shakespeare. A. Nicoll comments : The atmosphere of the tragedy is decidedly not royal and it may be that there was being exercised on Shakespeare some influence from the group of domestic tragedies later to be considered4. Othello is as civilized as any senator but there is no subject more exciting than sexual jealousy rising to the pitch of passion in him. This passion pushes him to a crime, which is also a hideous blunder. It is this jealousy which converts Othellos human nature into chaos and liberates the beast in man. Nicholas Rowse comments : He has certainly pointed out some faults very judiciously : and indeed they are such as most people will agree, with him to be faults5. He does not know the clam waters of love, he is more familiar with the tempest of passion. The suffering of Desdemona is the most intolerable spectacle that Shakespeare offers us. Her helplessness only makes the sight of her suffering more painful. For Othello, a woman is either absolutely chaste or she must be a common whore. There is no middle path for him. The feeling of jealousy ruins him. This is wonderful state of innocence in which we find Othello. The action and catastrophe of Othello depend largely on intrigue of I ago that turns a noble character into an evil. Othello is not a man of practical bearing. Being a soldier he possesses a mighty rough and tough body but his mind and heart remain much simple and unsuspecting. I ago calls him, Black rum and devil. Roderigo refers to his thick lips and Brabantio to his, Soothy bosom. Despite all his outer ugliness he is a man of true and noble character. Hje is most popular in woman folk for his braver. Desdemona also loves him for his braver, Othello himself confesses in the third Scene of Act. I ; Upon this hint I spake; She lovd me for the dangers I had passd: And I lovd her that she did pity them. He is a true person. He does not possess any complexity in his mind. And this character of his nature becomes his weakness. His judgement of others stands very poor. Hence, he is entrapped by I ago. A.C. Bradley remarks that, His tragedy lies in this that his whole nature was indisposed to jealousy, and yet was such that he was usually open to deception, and, if one wrought to passion, likely to act with little reflection, with no delay, and in the most decisive manner conceivable.6 He is hasty in his action free from introspection. His actions are guided by passion, not by reason. His decision of eloping with Desdemona and marrying her, dismissal of Cassio, and believing unreasonedly in I agos words show that he is not a man of practical sense. I ago encashes the weakness of Othello and he dominates his entire personality and hurts him down headlong to his doom. He poisons his mind against Desdemona and his love dies for Desdemona. The event of handkerchief blinded his mind and he is now completely a changed man. He can only think of his wife making love
118
to Cassio. Bradley comments on his mental condition; He is physically exhausted and his mind is dazed. He sees everything blurred through a mist of blood and tears.7 He loses his all sense of reality. He reportedly calls his wife a prostitute and wants to kill her. The deed he is bound to do is not murder, but a sacrifice. He thinks that he is not committing any evil but he is doing it to save Desdemona from herself, not in hate but in honour, and also in love. His anger has passed and a boundless sorrow has taken its place. He kisses her and asks her to pray to God for the crime she has committed. Othello murders Desdemona to keep her away from further sin and evil doings. From the beginning to the end, she confesses that she had no illicit affair with Cassio. As he comes to know the truth that Emilia has stolen the handkerchief for Iago, who misused the same, on deathbed, she cries; Alas, he is betrayd and I undone. Othello is dazed at this revelation and is mortally hurt by his own credulity and jealousy. He realizes his mistake after the damage is done. This scene in the play, which shows the evil act of Othello to its extreme, is the most painful act. Bradley remarks: Desdemona is helplessly passive. She can do nothing whatever. She cannot retaliate even in speech; no, not even in silent feeling. And the chief reason of her helplessness only makes the sight of her suffering more exquisitely painful. She is helpless because her nature is infinitely sweet and her love absolute.8 At last when truth was revealed to Othello through Emilia that Desdemona had no illicit relation with Cassio, he is at once shocked and repents. Now he realizes the value of Desdemona and says to Lodovico in Scene II of Act. V; Then must you speak Of one that loved not wisely but too well; Of one not easily jealous, but, being wrought; Perplexed in the extreme; of one whose hand, Like the base Indian, threw a pearl away Richer than all his tribe; of one whose subdud eyes. With these words he stabs himself and dies. Thus in the whole drama we see jealousy and exciting nature of a husband bring both the husband and wife to complete ruin. He behaves as a credulous fool, he believes in others so easily without reasoning the words and its effect. Earlier he gives the same feeling by accepting the words of Desdemona at once and marries her immediately by eloping with her. But later on it is a surprise for the audience to know that he is a character who can be led by the nose by a character like I ago. He should have a strong sense to differentiate good from evil. He does not have quality to recognize good people from evil ones. His knowledge of human nature is inadequate. He becomes a victim of his own disbelief, which
119
is exploited by I ago to its full length. Charlton remarks; He is of constant, loving, noble nature. His response to life is simpler far than that of more civilized man : living has been for him a continuity of passionate experience and not a series of intellectual states. A spontaneous surge of feeling is the vitalizing form of his being. As his instinct rouses feeling, he is compelled to express it in deed.9 The deep study of the play shows that the cause of tragedy lies not in the external causes like Desdemonas pleading with Othello to reinstate Cassion or in the handkerchief which Othello has given to Desdemona as a token of his love and which he sees in Cassios hands. But the actual cause of tragedy lies in the internal design relating to the complex personality of Othello. He thinks that he being black would not be attractive to Desdemona in due course of time when fury of passion subsides. There is a disbelief in his mina that a fair lady like Desdemona can not be faithful to a bloackmoor like him. This disbelief enters his mind because of social disparity and status between the two races they belonged to. When these thoughts kiss his mind he loses control over him. He immdediately becomes over reactive. His obsession for Desdemona makes him extra sensitive for not losing her to any other man. This frenzy of his mind drives him to murder Desdemona, but on knowing truth he repents by stabbing himself. Psychiatrists call this state of mind as a case of delusion. In medical language it can be said that this violent state of the mind of Othello, under stress, sends the message straight from thalamus to amygdala by-passing neocortex, flooding the brain with a crisis call resulting in abrupt reaction before the cortex can register the event10 culminating into murder of Desdermona. After the dreaded act the rationality returns, he is overcome by remorse. But the damage has been done. The feeling of irreparable damage brings him back to the state of frenzy he commits second crime by stabbing himself and thus his passionate act completes the cycle of tragedy.
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Times of India, August 2, 2004 ; p. 10. A.C. Bradley ; Shakespearean Tragedy, (Delhi : Atlantic Publishers & Distributers; 1994), p. 176 G.B. Harrison ; Shakespeare's Tragedies, (London : Routledge & Kegan Paul, Ltd. 1951), p. 157 A. Nicoll : British Drama, (London : George G. Harrap & Co. Ltd., 1955), p. 174. Nicholas Rowse ": Critics on Shakespeare, (London : Methuen Ltd., 1953), p.22 A.C. Bradley : Shakespearean Tragedy, p. 186. Ibid : p.196 Ibid : p.179 H. B. Charlton, Shakespearian Tragedy, (London : Cambridge University Press, 1961) p. 121. Times of India, August 2, 2004 ; p.10.
Ritualistic Drama: A Progressive Indian Tradition

* Apara Tiwari
========================================================== Abstract- Absorbed in the largest mangrove forest of the world in Sunderbans, displaying an array of bounteous flora, we cruised along river Vidya, and many other similar distributaries in the delta of the Ganga this winter. Well known for its ferocious man-eaters (royal Bengal tiger), crocodiles, wide variety of birds, other fauna and even a rare species of dolphins, there was excitement among those on board the launch then, to spot the king of the jungle initially. The excitement gradually receding, got converted next day for one of the other harmless species for more obvious reasons; the tiger refused to make a guest appearance without a price. ========================================================== With little choice, the inhabitants of Sunderbans practice vocations like wood-picking, honey-collection and fishing. A land where people, easy prey to not only man-eaters but also to alarmingly ceasing to be swampy land, belong to various faiths and sects, live and pray for sustenance together. A living example of ecological balance and at the same time a land where people and the wild are threatened every moment on the question of survival, the experience was an exceptional feeling enlightened and reminded by a creative art form; the folk theatre called jatra.The chilling Christmas-eve at the resort in one of the biggest islands, Gosaba, was set aside for the open air theatrical performance of the jatra. The entertainment value emerging from the technically typical form took me down memory lane, when as a child I was used to watching them in the Durga Puja pandal. The enactment of the folk tale also revived memories of having heard a few of them from my sewing teacher at school, who used to capture our young minds and arouse unending curiosity with her style of rendering the tales. Recently Amitav Ghosh has related the tale in his gripping fictional work; The Hungry Tide. Inferences drawn by many researchers as one of the purposes of the novel are two very pertinent issues. The purpose of this writing is to introduce these two issues through jatra theatrical art to anyone not knowing about it. Before proceeding to narrate the popular Bonbibi legend, the most watched episode of the jatras in this region, ===========================
* Professor and Head, Department of English, Govt. Shyam Sunder Agrawal College, Sihora, Jabalpur (M.P.)
121
and pointing to its significant instructive value, it is also necessary to highlight some features which identify this folk theatre called jatra, as it is incidentally in communion with the nature of the tale too.Like the Tamasha of Maharashtra, Nautanki and Ramlila of U.P., the Pandwani of Madhya Pradesh, the Phad of Rajasthan and the Theyyam of Kerela, and folk theatre of other regions of India, traditional jatra is a living and very popular theatrical folk art originated in Bengal and later also became popular in the neighboring Odisha, Assam, Bihar, Tripura and Bangladesh. Jatra in Sanskrit means journey. Devotees during the Bhakti movement in India moved in a procession singing, dancing, falling into a trance, enacting scenes from Gods lives. Intense frenzy with other dramatic elements and singing accompanied by loud clangs of musical instruments came to be known as jatra. It is said that Sri. Chaitanya Deb introduced make-up and costume in the form. Since then its transformation from devotional, mythological and historical themes into didactic and later secular, paved its entrance into urban proscenium theatre. It is not only alive and relevant today but is thriving exceptionally due to its innate malleability of adapting to changing social milieu and catering to heterogeneous audience. The traditional performance in open air arenas accompanied by monologues, melodramatic and highly stylized dialogue delivery with exaggerated gestures and orations lends a generic character to a jatra even today, despite the inclusion of few props and harsh lights. Bibek (conscience) and niyati (fate) as essential allegorical characters is a distinct feature of a jatra, something which is done by a chorus in a Greek tragedy. It is a play that also begins with a climax by which means it captures the attention of the audience. Free verse and prose dialogues also became a way for the natun or New Jatras. After independence it became a platform for political satires and protests called swadesi jatras, voicing social concerns and creating awareness against colonial ideologies. Communism, horrors of the World Wars, issues of national and international importance, local issues and even events from television and the cinema have been taken up for performances. Badal Sircar and Shombhu Mitra are only two names among quite a few, who have experimented with the form; but only in the regional language. Mostly enacted during the festive season there are hundreds of jatra troupes all over Bengal, who have to be booked in advance and on contractual basis today. The distinctiveness of Sunderban jatras can be attributed to its ritualistic and progressive spirit. A peep into its genesis and later its maturity with an interdisciplinary approach will fabricate a comprehensive effect. Rapid climate changes and extreme conditions leave no choice for the inhabitants as well as the tigers in the tide country, but the strong survival instincts in both have forced them to adapt. It is as necessity that the tigers have become most ferocious, intelligent and excellent swimmers to become man-eaters. The same necessity has forced people to invade the wild territory. It is here that the power of the folklore in the legend of Bonbibi becomes
122
relevant connecting the world of nature and the humans. The local theatre companies called jatra-dol move from village to village enacting the popular story. Bonbibi lives in the forests of Sunderbans with her brother Shah Jongoli. She protects the people there, from the demon, Dokhin Rai, who appears in the guise of a tiger. No one enters the jungle without seeking her blessings. Although the rituals of worship followed are from Hindu faith but her origin is neither in Hindu mythology nor in Bengal. She is the daughter of a Sufi fakir, Ibrahim in the Arabian city of Medina, the holy city of Islamic faith. Archangel Gabriel set them on a divine mission to make the tide country fit for habitation. Dressed like a typical Bengali housewife, Bonbibi is worshipped equally by the Dalit Muslims as well as devout Hindus. The connection thus transcends religious barriers. A fine balance to rule the territory is maintained after the goddess overcomes the demon with a truce in which she stays in and rules the human settlement and the demon is confined to the wilderness. When a greedy fleet owner, Dhona enters the forests with his troops in search of jungle treasures, this balance is broken. The demon in the tigers guise traps the troop members. Only when Dhona pleads, the tiger agrees to release them in exchange for a ransom in the form of a poor boy, Dukhey. When the tiger is about to pounce on the boy, he remembers his mothers advice. She had asked him to call Bonbibi in times of distress. His ardent prayers are heard and the goddess appears in a flash and saves him from the tiger. She then restores the boy to his mother. There are two pertinent issues raised. One, do not meddle with nature and you will be safe. Second, a secular society can thrive and fight all odds to live in peace, only when there is communal brotherhood, harmony and unity. Jatra is a passionate and very powerful form of theatrical performing art, which is in tune with the fiery characteristics of Bonbibi folklore. At the same time it has gained the sanction of the potent concern it has brought to the fore. Like the mainstream theatre, ritualistic theatre, such as the traditional jatras are valuable source of reviving awareness of Indian ethos in the modern context. Similarly, flexibility, especially in its thematic content, to adapt to the times is the testimony of its progressive nature which needs to be discovered and tapped on a wider arena.
====================== References1. My travel experiences of the Sunderbans during my stay there from 22 to 25 Dec.2012. The organizers of the trip and the resort, the locals, the jatra troupe, fellow travelers, the launch men and their assistants and the beautiful tide country have inspired me and made this piece of writing possible. Ghosh, Amitav. The Hungry Tide. New Delhi: Harper Collins 2005. Print. Jatra (http:/ / banglapedia. search. com. bd/ HT/ J_0081. htm) at Banglapedia. Web. Misra, Preetu. The Bon Bibi Legend of the Sundarbans. http://Ezine Articles. com/ ?expert=Preetu_Misra. Web.
2. 3. 4.
Life in Death in The Novels of Kurt Vonnegut

*Suman Chawla
========================================================== Abstract- Kurt Vonnegut (1922 -2007) is thought as an archetypal postwar novelist who concerns himself with the inexplicable, sordid and often nightmarish aspects of modern American life. Branded categorically as a pulp writer and then as a black humourist, he was left in obscurity for about twenty years. But from there he shot into fame and popularity to become the most talked about American novelist . He became a truly representative postwar novelist highlighting the sterility and hypocrisy of middle class life, and inveighing against the dehumanized socioeconomic system in America. His unique vision and his signal role as a relentless critic of the American way of life have endeared him to his readers. While on the surface, Kurt Vonnegut's works appear to singularly contain the pessimistic views of an aging, black humorist, his underlying meanings reveal a much more sympathetic and hopeful glimpse of humanity that lends itself to eventual societal improvement. Underlying all Vonnegut's fiction is humanism. Vonnegut's faith is rooted in the idea of mercy for fellow humans and for the planet itself. In fact, Vonnegut's postmodern humanism is the idea that life is precious, and every attempt should be made to improve the conditions of life in order to preserve it. ========================================================== Kurt Vonnegut is thought as an archetypal post-war novelist who concerns himself with the inexplicable, sordid and often nightmarish aspects of modern American life. Branded categorically as a pulp writer and then as a black humourist, he was left in obscurity for about twenty years. But from there he shot into fame and popularity to become the most talked about American novelist since Ernest Hemingway says Klinkowitz in Literary Disruptions.1 To millions of youngsters he was a cult figure, whose portrait of America with its tribulations and complexities matched the America of their own experience. He became a truly representative postwar novelist highlighting the sterility and hypocrisy of middle class life, and inveighing against the dehumanized socio-economic system in America. When Kurt Vonnegut started writing,the human predicament was disastrous. Kurt Vonneguts grim Camuslike view of life, living, and the world was part and parcel of a postWorld War ===========================
* Research Scholar, Bhagwant University, Ajmer, Rajasthan
124
II sensibility. The old optimism of prewar America was gone. Liberal faith had been undermined by the experience of the Spanish Civil War, the Nazi/Stalin Pact of 1939, World War II, followed by the Holocaust and the droppings of the bombs on Hiroshima and Nagasaki. In many of his works he wonders if life is worth living. He felt that the so-called American Dream had a dark side that led to loneliness, separation, and the denial of community. Americans were living in the age of anxiety. The critics raise the question of categorization about whether Vonnegut is a bitter pessimist or a sentimental optimist and whether he can be classified as a despairing nihilist, a courageous Existentialist, a cynical absurdist, a postmodern humanist, an aggressive satirist, an inventive fantasist, an experimental fabulist, or a Black humorist and describe him as our great public writer2. Vonneguts first novel Player Piano is a dystopia of automationHYPERLINK http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Player_Piano \l cite_note-jcpn2kv-0 and capitalism, describing the dereliction they cause in the quality of life. Cats Cradle is Kurt Vonneguts satirical commentary on modern man and his madness. In Cats CradleVonnegutbroughttogether themes from his first three novels: the threat of technology from Player Piano, the question of free will from The Sirens of Titan,andthe problemof communication from Mother Night . Slaughterhouse-Five, or The Childrens Crusade: A Duty-Dance with Death (1969) is a satirical novel by Kurt Vonnegut about War II experiences and journeys through time of a soldier called Billy Pilgrim. In the works written after SlaughterhouseFive,Vonnegutoftenfocussesontheproblemsofcontemporarysocietyina direct manner. Breakfast of Champions, or Goodbye Blue Monday (1973) andSlapstick, or Lonesome No More(1976),forexample,examinethe widespread feelings of despair and loneliness that result from the loss of traditional culture in the United States; Jailbird(1979) recounts the story of a fictitious participant in the Watergate scandal of the Nixon administration, creating an indictment of the American political system; Galapagos(1985) predicts the dire consequences of environmental pollution; and Hocus-Pocus; or, Whats the Hurry, Son?(1990)dealswiththeimplicationsandaftermath of the war in Vietnam. In the 1990s, he also published Fates Worse Than Death(1991)andTimequake(1997). Although many of these works are highly regarded, critics frequently argue that in his later works Vonnegut tends toreiteratethemespresentedmorecompellinglyinearlierworks.Manyalso suggest that Vonneguts narrative style, which includes the frequent repetition of distinctive phrases, the use of colloquialisms, and a digressive manner, becomes formulaic in some of his later works.Nevertheless, Vonnegut remains one of the most esteemed American satirists. Noted for their frank and insightful social criticism as well as their innovative style, his works present anidiosyncraticyet compelling vision of modern life. Lawrence R.
125
BroersSanity Plea: Schizophrenia in the Novels of Kurt Vonnegut (1987), starts from the observation that probably no characters in contemporary fiction are more traumatized and emotionally damaged than those of Kurt Vonnegut and that Vonneguts central aim is to show us what makes people go crazy and the different ways they go crazy. Maintaining that Vonneguts reputation as Americas most popular prose satirist has obscured the more personal and intensely psychological nature of his art3. Broer tries to prove that Vonneguts fictions arent as simple as some believe, that his philosophy isnt easily accessible, and that hes not a defeatist writer. On the contrary, Vonnegut, a traumatized survivor of the allied bombing of Dresden, has used his writing as a way of purging himself of the terrors of war and adjusting to a postwar world just as absurd in its suffering and destruction as the war itself. For Scholes, Vonnegut belongs to the writers whom we read to keep our humanity in shape, to exercise our consciences and keep them vigorous, free, and growing.4 and he extolled the range of attitudes Vonnegut brings to bear on modern life (186), praised his superb wit, and observed that serious critics have shown some reluctance to acknowledge that Vonnegut is among the best writers of his generation. It seems, C.D.B. Bryan in Kurt Vonnegut, Head Bokononist, observes his fiction as quiet, humorous, well-mannered and rational protests against mans inhumanity to man an articulate bridge across the generation chasm.5 Robert Scholes employed Bruce Jay Friedmans newly coined label of Black Humourpraised Vonneguts prose as deceptively simple, suggestive of the ordinary, but capable of startling and illuminating twists and turns While on the surface, Kurt Vonneguts works appear to singularly contain the pessimistic views of an aging, black humorist, his underlying meanings reveal a much more sympathetic and hopeful glimpse of humanity that lends itself to eventual societal improvement. Underlying all Vonneguts fiction is humanism. In Kurt Vonneguts Crusade or, How a Postmodern Harlequin Preaches a New Kind of Humanism(2006), Todd F. Davis argues that Vonnegut offers a new kind of fiction, a paradigm of postmodernity that allows the author to struggle with philosophical ideas concerning our condition in a form that reflects this very struggle6.and sets out to demonstrate that he is not the cynical commentator on the futility of human endeavor in a contingent universe which others take him to be but a committed ethical writer who is more concerned with our response to existence than with the philosophical nature of that existence.7 Therefore, in each novel, despite the sometimes disheartening sense of futility that pervades it, Vonnegut does offer suggestions for better living and hope for the despondent. There was never a kinder and, at the same time, wittier writer to be with personally, author Tom Wolfe, a friend and admirer of Vonneguts, told The Times. .He was never funny just to be funny,8. Vonnegut believes that writers can influence peoples ideas profoundly. In one
126
of his speeches he stated the following: Let us pray that those terribly influential writers who created those our leaders were humane.9.He writes very short books as he wants them to be read by executives,politicians in their busy schedule. Vonnegut feels his responsibility to the society.In a Play Boy Interview,he expresses in biological terms that writers are are the expressions of the entire societywhen a society is in danger,were likely to sound the alarms.10KurtVonnegutinA Man Without a Countrysays thatThe function of the artist is to make people like life better than they have before.11 Kurt Vonnegut considered humanism to be a modern-day form of freethought, and advocated it in various writings, speeches and interviews. His ties to organized humanism included membership as a Humanist Laureate in the Council for Secular Humanisms International Academy of Humanism. Vonnegut shows inhuman follies of the society but at the same time,he tries to search sacredness in human beings.The Charlotte Observer calls VONNEGUT:A MEDICINE MAN conjuring up fantsies to warn the world.12 Vonnegut tries to give his characters free will and meaning to life. Human predicament is that man attempts to make order out of chaos. The universe is absurd, unintelligible, but man must pretend that he understands it and must try to exert some control over it to eliminate futility.13 Vonnegut believes that perfect happiness can be achieved when man discovers that someone or something somewhere wants us to like it here on Earth says Vonnegut in Fates Worse Than Death.14 Each of Vonneguts novels indicates a belief in a meaningful universe, and each of his heroes Paul Proteus, Howard W. Campbell, Jr., Jonah, Rosewater, and Billyis a modern pilgrim engaged in an uncertain quest along an unmapped route. Although the pilgrim often musst go it alone, Vonnegut provides an unusually large number of messiahs, real and phony, major and minor, to aid in the quest. Winston Niles Rumfoord inTheSirensofTitanwithhis messiahic intentions, proves to the inhabitants of Earth that their old religions are useless and myopic, while his at least has the benefit of being headed by someone who can see into the future. Lionel Boyd Johnson, alias Bokononsideas are based on love and compassion for others. Kilgore Trout, the next messiah first appears inGod Bless You, Mr.Rosewater,he seems reincarnation of Jesus Christ, representing the ineffectuality of the Christian ethic today, he is at least a Christ figure. In the next novel, Vonnegut goes to some length to vitiate this impression by showing his cracked messiah.15 Life is not thoroughly meaningless, and one purpose for survival is love. Affection is treasured and expressed in many ways. One incredible display of devotion is love for the sake of others, unselfish love.16 For Vonnegut, meaningless life is not worth living, so for a life that seems to be both uncontrollable and meaning less, one must find a personal meaning in order to
127
bring about at least a semblance of self control. In Cats CradleBokonon realizes that life has no meaning, but he also realizes that he can make people happy just by pretending life has a purpose. These harmless untruths, or foma, allow people to enjoy their truly meaningless life. His solution toavoid suicide is to find meaning in his life. Criticized by his own father for never having created a villain, Vonneguts characters are motivated by either lonesomeness, boredom or biological and environmental factors beyond their control. But an at least partial corrective for all three conditions existsartificial extended families analogous to the tribal cultures of his anthropology studies and the real-life extended family of Vonneguts idyllic Indiana boyhood.The theme gains prominence with each subsequent book most overtly explained in the flawed Slapstick and most eloquently summarized in God Bless You, Mr. Rosewater: Were here to help each other get through this thing, whatever it is.17 Vonneguts ideas are so humane, his words so compassionate, his advice so sensible, that his readers feel a strong connection to the man, and, by extension, to one another. Perhaps his greatest contribution has been the unwitting creation of a global family of admirers who share and recognize in one another the desire to exhibit that most uncommon of human traitscommon decency. For Vonnegut, meaningless life is not worth living, so for a life that seems to be both uncontrollable and meaning less, one must find a personal meaning in order to bring about at least a semblance of self control. Mans relationship to religion, destiny and God also plays a large role in the novel. As the name of The Church of God the Utterly Indifferent indicates, Vonnegut seems to be saying that, if there is a God, he/she abandoned humanity long ago. He does not say this to be cruel, but to force people to stop being cruel to one another in the name of some nonexistent/uncaring deity.The most important message of a crucifix, to me anyway, was how unspeakably cruel supposedly sane human beings can be when under orders from a superior authority,saysKurtVonnegutinHocus Pocus.18BeatriceRumfoordand Malachi, in The Sirens of Titan unwilling partners in marriage, had only during the last year of their lives come to love one another. It took us that long. Malachi admits, to realize that a purpose of human life, no matter who is controlling it, is to love whoever is around to be loved (ST. 313).Vonneguts views on religion and technology are often mistaken.since he is opposed to those who ignore reality,and since he is a self-proclaimed agnostic, it seems that he scorns religion but in reality,he does not scorn religion .There is confusion ,writes Conrad Festa, he is an activist interested in the specific good that can be done and impatient with all abstractions, including dogma of any kind.19 He is first a humanist,and opposes religion which blocks path to human dignity.He chooses compassionate religion, which contributes to collective happiness. Sometimes harmless lies are necessary to achieve peace of mind that would be otherwise impossible
128
It is through his novels that Vonnegut tries to bring order into the dosordered universe.Kurt Vonnegut himself remarks:Most of my adult life has been spent bringing some order to sheets of paper eight and a half inches wide and eleven inches long.This severely limited activity has allowed me to ignore many a storm, 20. In Vonneguts novels,there are many artistic figures like painters,sculptors,writers who make efforts to bring order to their experiences by writing ,painting or composing music.The artist in Palm Sunday glosses, I can do very little about chaos around me,but atleast Ican reduce to perfect order this square of canvas,this piece of paper,this chunk of stone21. In Bluebeard,Karabekians mission in the narrative is to find a family that he feels a part of, which he achieves with the army and the Abstract Expressionism community because Rabo Karabekian is an old abstract expressionist painter. Karabekians revelation of human awareness sparks Vonneguts realization that human beings are not hollow machines since awareness allows us to recognize our condition, giving rise to the motivation and ability to change it. In Breakfast of Champions,Vonneguts ultimate message is that if we wish to be happy we must exercise our awareness to think and act rationally, while exorcising irrational thoughts and beliefs. It is no secret that Vonnegut experienced numerous adverse events and endured considerable personal tragedy during his adult life. Chief among these were: (a) his mothers suicide in 1944 on Mothers Day; (b) the mental breakdown of his son, Mark; (c) the horrific events he witnessed and participated in as a prisoner of war during the firebombing of Dresden; (d) the death of his beloved sister, Alice, due to cancer (and her husbands tragic death a few days earlier in a freak train accident); and (e) his own apparent suicide attempt in 1984. These events undoubtedly left their mark on his psyche and contributed to forging his philosophy of life. Indeed, Vonnegut admitted that because of his experiences he repeatedly faced the temptation of committing suicide, explaining that the child of a suicide will naturally think of death . . . as a logical solution to any problem. (Palm Sunday 278). Given the considerable stress and emotional trauma he endured, it is no surprise that Vonneguts works often directly reference or allude to the psychological issues he faced throughout his life.However, he believed that writing has beneficial physiological and psychological effects on a human being.(Bagombo 5), and he acknowledged using writing as a form of therapy, observing that writers get a nice break in one way, at least: They can treat their mental illnesses every day (Wampeters 283). Accordingly, Vonnegut used his work as an autobiographical pscychodrama a career-long process of cleansing and renewal (Sanity Plea 152). Indeed, his novels attempt to come to terms with or even to dispel the more worrisome aspects of his own psyche . . . and personal anxieties22.Vonnegut understood that the only way human beings can rescue themselves is by enthusiastic intimacy with works of their own
129
imaginations (Wampeters xxvii). Vonneguts has humanistic belief that the meaning of life is that which we give to it. Man is made by his belief. As he believes, so he is. Vonnegut understands the psychological importance of humor. Indeed, the use of humor in handling reality is a given in Vonneguts writing, which speaks of life itself as a dirty joke (Fates 194). Vonneguts wit is therapeutic brand of humor23. points toward mental health, toward life, and away from insanity and morbiditysays Lundquist24. Vonneguts believes Be aware of this truth that the people on this earth could be joyous, if only they would live rationally (PalmSunday176) Rather than suggesting the hopelessness of the human condition, Vonneguts writings evidence a belief in the ability to change our often reflexive response to this absurd. Although Vonnegut sometimes probes the limits of free will in works such as Slaughterhouse Five, Breakfast of Champions, Galapagos, andTimequake, he does not dismiss it or fatalistically condemn his characters to a predetermined existence. While their paths are not lined with rose petals, a number of Vonneguts characters successfully exert free will and exercise rational thinking. Vonneguts novels underscore the conclusion that, without self-awareness, the ability to control irrational thinking, and the rational exercise of free will, human beings are condemned to constant psychological manipulation by external events. In Forever Pursing Genesis, Leonard Mustazza argues that Vonneguts protagonists attempt to act against upsetting events inherent to the human condition by retreating to states of mind that are associated with the Edenic place and its attendant state of mind, the state of innocence25. Vonneguts works suggest that in the face of a senseless reality, humanitys appropriately measured response to the unalterable aspects of that reality consists of simply accepting the absurdity of our condition, neither affirming nor denying it and never asking the most meaningless of questions. Why?says Harris26. The challenge of finding meaning within oneself and accepting the absurdity of the human situation as an unalterable condition of life, while still attempting to change what we can for the better, is a major concern of Vonnegut and he explores it in perhaps his most famous novel, Slaughterhouse-Five. The centerpiece of the novel in this respect is the framed prayer that hangs on protagonist Billy Pilgrims office wall expressing his method for keeping going (SHF.58). the so-called Serenity Prayer states: GOD GRANT ME THE SERENITY TO ACCEPT THE THINGS I CANNOT CHANGE, COURAGE TO CHANGE THE THINGS I CAN, AND WISDOM ALWAYS TO TELL THE DIFFERENCE. Attempting to emulate the teaching of the prayer allows Billy,the hero to overcome the selfdefeating belief that life is meaningless (SHF.96), and empowers him to reinvent himself (SHF 96).Vonneguts continued search for meaning surely counts for a great deal as he balances hope and despair.Vonnegut feels that
130
the great American disease is loneliness because we no longer have extended family. Loneliness, spurned by the dissolution of individuality - the reality of becoming an interchangeable part in the American machine.(Slapstick 5) can only be resolved in companionship with others. The true fallacy of modern society is lovelessness. Vonnegut writes as though America would be more sincere if a more definite family atmosphere were implemented .While loneliness is often the root of artificial family growth, Vonnegut submits that often the absence or poor quality of ones own biological family creates a void that is only to be filled by a comparable kinship. In a hell-hole like America where everybody takes such lousy care of their own relatives (Slapstick 132), Such artificial extended families are absolutely imperative in providing an ideal diet for human spirit. Throughout his writings, Vonnegut illustrates mans necessity of family, whether hereditary or artificial, as a vital contribution to his survival and healthy intercourse with society. All relatives, be they naturally procured or synthetically acquired, possess the unique ability, and responsibility, to support, contribute to, and inspire his fellow man, which in turn ultimately appeals to the betterment of humankind. Vonnegut proves, through philosophic anecdotes and personal examples, that life is made easier and more enjoyable when artificial family members are relied upon to provide sustenance and counsel. In Cats Cradle, Bokonists believe that humanity is organized into teams, teams that do Gods Will without ever discovering what they are doing. Such a team is called a karassbyBokonon.Inrevealingthis particular aspect of companionship, George Kraft and Howard W. Campbell, Jr. in Mother Night kindle a friendship encouraged by the absence of both their wives. Whereas love is often equated with successful family life and relationships, Vonnegut emphasizes that common decency, rather than love, is the most effective and useful agent in perfecting relations with others. A little less love, and a little more common decency (Slapstick 3), according to Vonnegut, is all that is needed to ensure a near utopian climate when practiced by all members of a society. As proved by Eliza and Wilbur Swain in Slapstick, one can survive, and even thrive, in life without being showered with love from others. In Mother Night, Vonnegut emphasizes this importance of relying on others as Resi asks, What is life without friends? (MN151). Vonnegut constantly petitions society with the pervading message that youve got to be kind(MN.127). Therefore, fruitful relationships as exhibited in artificial family groups, through treating members with respect and sincerity, creates a utopian atmosphere for individuals. Vonnegut creates a web of interdependence and reliance on others for his characters; even in the midst of suffering and vile discomfort, to truly be satisfied one must rely on the positive influences of others.The most daring thing is to create stable communities in which the terrible disease of loneliness can be cured. ). It seems that Vonnegut may
131
have felt as Anne Frank, quoted in the epigraph of Galapagos, did - In spite of everything, I still believe people are really good at heart27. Kurt Vonnegut gives the ideas about loving humanity through Kilgore Trout,his alter-ego and his characters.In God Bless You,Mr.Rosewater, Eliot gets most of his inspiration, as well as his ideas about what can be done with it, from sciencefiction writers, particularly Kilgore Trout, whom he considers to be Americas greatest prophet (GBYMR28)and he feels Im going to love these discarded Americans, he proclaims, even though theyre useless and unattractive. That is going to be my work of art (GBYMR. 47) and Theres only one rule that I know of, babies -: God damn it, youve got to be kind(GBYMR. 110). Vonneguts attempt to shake our consciences and awaken us to the reality of our folly, evidenced by our disdainful attitude towards the rules of nature, is none other than the essential mission of any artist who prizes his condition as such. In this sense, John Cooley states: Thus, one of the traditional functions of the poet is invoked anew: to warn against violations of natural law, and to create images, metaphors, and myths both ecologically harmonious and sufficiently compelling to protect the natural world 139. Vonnegut fulfils his duty as an artist and a humanist, demanding more natural and healthier conditions for humanity by means of the recurrent natural elements in his works, which monitor the foolish, unnatural behaviour of human beings. Science, technology, and the mechanization of certain activities can surely make life easier and more gratifying for human beings, bettering our conditions of existence, but only as long as such means of improvement remain subject to prudence, rationality, and above all, respect towards nature and humanity itself as a part of it. Consequently, the only formula by means of which technology and humanity may co-exist in harmony with the enveloping environment resides in the human beings own awareness of the need to preserve nature and everything connected with it, attempting a truly symbiotic relationship between the artificial and the natural, in order to achieve the necessary balance. Vonnegut seems to express the idea that, if we humans were to realise the deep moral responsibilities implied, knowledge would be better employed that is, not in search of unlikely utopias, but of a greater stability and a healthier state of harmony with the world around us. In contrast to these appalling descriptions of the after-effects of human folly although intrinsically connected to them within Vonneguts apocalyptic perspective, it is likewise common to find the compensating presence of several amiable natural elements in many of his novels, among which we may observe the recurrent use of animals as part of the scenery or taking part in the action. His persistence in the use of this positive imagery leads him to describe an entire biological ecosystem in Galpagos. Vonnegut shows a special fondness towards dogs, for instance as can be seen in Mother Night, as well as cats, horses and other domestic creatures in his other novels. However, the
132
most outstanding and significant animal interventions are those carried out by a wide range of birds throughout his narrative, comprising both imaginary and real-life species in an array moving from the most unusual to the plainest. They all serve as a means of support for the human characters involved in the plots. They do this by sympathising with the humans in the course of their problematical affairs, relieving, consoling or even warning them about something in their whereabouts. Thus, we encounter common pets, such as Pauls cat in Player Piano, performing the same essential mission as the curious and exotic marine iguanas found in Galpagos, both admonishing the human being for his dangerous betrayal to nature and to himself .The tragic extinction of the majestic eagle-like Bermuda Erns in Breakfast of Champions, as well as the peaceful and placid cohabitation of the Titanic bluebirds in The Sirens of Titan, and above all, the awesome beauty of the courtship dance carried out by the blue-footed boobies in Galpagos, are all attempts to draw our attention, appealing to our common sense as the narrator describes the gratifying simplicity of natural life in contrast to the over-sophisticated, artificial, and harmful existence we lead in modern technological society.Cats Cradle, one of the most apocalyptic of Vonneguts works and the first to employ this resource, although with a slight variation in its chant, expressed as poo-tee-weet. The bird is a symbol of universal value, representing the pastoral view of nature and its idealistic sense of harmony, peace, and joy. Vonneguts purpose is again fulfilled, but with greater impetus in Slaughterhouse-Fivein which the message is that, although death is a necessary phase in the natural cycle, it is pointless and contrary to the rules of nature to bring unnecessary death and devastation to any living creature, which is precisely what war brings about. The birds interrogative reproof invites humanity to look after the most precious gift in the universe, which is life itself. He writes about the most excruciatingly painful things. But Vonnegut, armed with his schizophrenia, takes an absurd, distorted, wildly funny framework which is ultimately anaesthetic. Vonnegut is rightly remembered as a darkly humorous social critic but the personal impression we always hold of him is of a rather daft and kind old man whose vulnerability and honesty punctured through the pretensions of the world around him. Kurt Vonnegut weaves satire and black humor effectively through his novel, Cats Cradle. Vonneguts satire of religion seems to be pointing to the fact that religion can be formed and perpetuated around any type of ritual or verse. Leslie Fiedler is of opinion that his satire is mild because he tempers it with irony. But it has to be seen as emanating from his sense of being a conscientious agent for social change, and from his feeling of rage and guilt in being a part of the very dehumanizing society that he was always inveighing against. Although behind his fantasies and his sentimentality there lurks a world of horror and desolation but his books make us wish we were better. Accounting for the unusual Vonnegutean
133
humour, Robert W. Uphaus remarks: Vonneguts humor represents a perceptual slant that makes destruction a bit more tolerable .157 What distinguishes him from the other satirists is his refusal to give ethical absolutes against which we can form our judgements about the evils or excesses he attacks. He recommends resigned passivity160. , but the humanist in him and his ardent humanitarian zeal have made it impossible for him to be indifferent. His satire sweeps over several unwholesome aspects of modern life and it often hurts even amidst the comic negligence which he occasionally exhibits. Critics have often compared him with Jonathan Swift, Mark Twain and George Orwell. Most readers find that in Vonneguts work there is still a glimmer of desperate hope. Vonneguts continued search for meaning surely counts for a great deal as he balances hope and despair.
====================== References1. Klinkowitz, Jerome. Kurt Vonnegut, Jr. Literary Disruptions: The Making of a Post-Contemporary American Fiction. Ed. Klinkowitz, Jerome. Urbana: U of Illinois P, 1975. Cited, Greene,graham: Vonnegu t, Kurt, Jr. 1922 (Contemporary Literary Criticism)Kurt Vonnegut, Novelist Who Caught the Imagination of His Age, Is Dead at 84,DinitiaSmith,Published:April12,2007 Broer, Lawrence R.(editor).SanityPlea:SchizophreniaintheNovelsofKurt Vonnegut(revised edition). Tuscaloosa, AL: University of Alabama Press, 1994. Robert Scholes, Mithridates, he died old: Black Humor and Kurt Vonnegut, Jr., in The Sounder Few: Essays from the Hollins Critic,edited by R. H. W. Dillard, George Garrett, and John Rees Moore, University of Georgia Press, 1971, pp. 173-85. Bryan, C. D. B. Kurt Vonnegut on Target. New Republic October 8, 1966: 2122, 2426. Todd F. Davis, Kurt Vonneguts Crusade; or, How a Postmodern Harlequin Preached a New Kind of Humanism,SUNY series in Postmodern Culture,Release Date:February2006 Ibid. Cited, Tom Wolfe, Kurt Vonnegut, who wrote Slaughterhouse-Five, dies at age 84,By Cristian Salazar,The Associated Press. Vonnegut, Kurt Jr ,Wampeters, Foma & Granfalloons(1974) Copy: Paperback Dell, New York, New York, U.S.A.p.228 Vonnegut, Kurt Jr, The Playboy Interview : Marshall McLuhan, Playboy Magazine, March 1969, Vonnegut,Kurt,A Man Without Country. New York:Putnam,1991. The Charlotte Observer ,quoted ,cover jacket, Vonnegut, Kurt Jr, Slapstick: Or, Lonesone No More,New York:Delacorte,1976. Holland, Thomas R.Vonneguts Major Works : Notes, MW Books Ltd. (Galway, ., Ireland) Vonnegut, Kurt Jr, Fates Worse Than Death: An Autobiographical Collage of the 1980s Paperback 9780425134061 Berkley Pub Group, E Rutherford, New Jersey, U.S.A.
2.
3. 4.
5. 6.
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
134
15. 16. 17. 18. 19.
20. 21. 22.
23. 24. 25.
26.
27. 28.
29. 30.
Quoted, Stanley Schatt, The Whale and the Cross: Vonneguts Jonah and Christ Figures, in Southwest Review, Winter, 1971, pp. 29-42. Holland, Thomas R. Vonnegut, Kurt Jr, God Bless You, Mr. Rosewater, Random House Publishing Group, 1998. Vonnegut, Kurt Jr, Hocus Pocus, Berkley Pub Group, E Rutherford, New Jersey, U.S.A. Festa, Conrad. Vonneguts Satire. Vonnegut in America: An Introduction to the Life and Work of Kurt Vonnegut. Eds. Klinkowitz, Jerome and Donald L. Lawler. New York: Dell, 1977. 133-49. Kurt Vonnegut, In the Capital of the World, essay within Palm Sunday: An Autobiographical Collage, New York: Delacorte, 1981. Ibid. Joseph J. Ward ,The Accidental Practitioner: Principles of Rational Emotive Behavior Therapy in the Works of Kurt Vonnegut,university of South Florida, Tampa, FL, USA Joseph J. Ward, The Accidental Practitioner: Principles of Rational Emotive Behavior Therapy in the Works of Kurt Vonnegut James Lundquist,The New Reality of Slaughterhouse-Five,From Kurt Vonnegut (NY, Frederic Ungar Pub. Co., 1977) Mustazza, Leonard. A Darwinian Eden: Science and Myth in Kurt Vonneguts Science and Myth in Kurt Vonneguts Galapagos. Journal of the Fantastic in the Arts. 3,2,10(1991):55-65. Harris, Charles B. Illusion and Absurdity: The Novels of Kurt Vonnegut, Jr. Contemporary American Novelists of the Absurd. Ed. Harris, Charles B. New Haven CN.: College & UP, 1971. 51-75 and 139-141. Vonnegut, Kurt. Galpagos.NewYork:DellPublishing,1999. Cooley, John R. The Garden in the Machine: Three Postmodern Pastorals. Michigan Academician: Papers of the Michigan Academy of Science, Arts, and Letters. 13, 4 (Spring 1981): 405-420. Uphaus, Robert W. Expected Meaning in Vonneguts Dead-End Fiction. Novel. 8 (1975):164-174. BenjaminDeMottVonneguts Otherworldly Laughter in his cover story for Saturday Review in May 1971 quoted ,Literary Luxuries: American Writing at the End of the MilleniumByJoeDavidBellamy.
V. S. Naipaul India: The Homeland

*P. K. Sharma
========================================================== Abstract- Consider the fact that Indian written history stretches back almost 4000 years, to the civilisation centres of the Indus Valley Culture at Harappa & Mohenjo-Daro. The era most important for the study of the works of V. S. Naipaul is the era of the British as the mental colonisation institutionalised during their era is the focus of the works of Naipaul on India. According to his vision, it was this era which played with the minds of the Indians and made them see the history of the preBritish and ancient period in a very different light as traditionally viewed by Indian historians ========================================================== By 1850 A.D., India had a population of some 200 million or more1. Britain, on the other hand, had no indigenous written language until the 9th century A.D. Its population was about 16.6 million in 1850. The keys seem to have been superior weaponry, a strong profit motive and Eurocentric confidence.From the moment the Portuguese rounded the Cape of Good Hope on Africas southern tip in 1488, opening sea lanes to the Far East, the European powers strove to acquire Asian trading posts of their own. For centuries, the Viennese had controlled the European branch of the Silk Road, reaping enormous profits on silk, spices, fine china and precious metals. The Viennese monopoly ended with the establishment of the sea route. At first, the European powers in Asia were solely interested in trade but over time, the acquisition of territory grew in importance. Among the nations looking for a piece of the action was Britain. Britain had been trading in India since about 1600, but it did not begin to seize large sections of land until 1757, after the battle of Plassey. This battle pitted 3000 soldiers of the British East India Company against the 5000- strong army of the young Nawab of Bengal, Siraj ud Daulah, and his French East India Company allies. Fighting began on the morning of June 23, 1757. Heavy rain spoiled the Nawabs cannon powder (the British covered theirs), leading to his defeat $5 million from the Bengali treasury which financed further expansion.2 The East India Company traded in cotton silk, tea and opium ===========================
* Professor of English, Government K.R.G. Post Graduate (Autonomous) College Gwalior (M.P.)
136
following the Battle of Plassey , it functioned as the military authority in growing sections on India as well. By 1770, heavy Company taxation and other policies had left millions of Bengalis impoverished. While British soldiers and traders made their fortunes, the Indians starved. Between 1770-1773, about 10 million people died of famine in Bengal- 1/3rd of the population. At this time, Indians were also barred from high office in their own land. The British considered them inherently corrupt and untrustworthy. Many Indians were distressed by the rapid cultural changes imposed by the British. They worried that Hindu and Muslim India would be Christianized3. Early in 1857, a new type of rifle cartridge was given to the solders of the British Indian Army. Rumours spread that the cartridges had been greased with pig and cow fat, an abomination to both major Indian religions. On May 10, 1857, the revolt started, when mainly Bengali Muslim troops marched to Delhi and pledged their support to the Mughal emperor. Both sides moved slowly unsure of public reaction. After a year-long struggle, the revels surrendered on June 20, 1858. Following the Rebellion of 1857-58, the British Government abolished both the Mughal Dynasty, which had ruled India more or less for 300 years and the East India Company. The emperor, Bahadur Shah was convicted of sedition and exiled to Burma. Control of India was given to a British Government General, who reported back to the Secretary of state for India and the British parliament. It should be noted that the British Raj included only 2/3rd of modern India, with the other portions under the control of local Princes. However, Britain exerted a lot of pressure on these Princes, effectively controlling all of India. Queen Victoria promised that the British Government would work to better its Indian subjects. To the British, this meant educating them in British modes of thought and stamping out cultural practices such as sati. The British also practised Divide and Rule policies, pitting Hindu and Muslim Indians against one another. In 1905 the colonial government divided Bengal into Hindu and Muslim sections; this division was revoked after strong protests. Britain also encouraged the formation of the Muslim League of India in 1990. The Indian Army was made up mostly of Sikhs, Nepalese Gurkhas and other minority groups as well. During World War I, Britain declared war on Germany on Indias behalf. More than 1.3 million soldiers and labourers were serving in the British Indian Army by the time of the Armistice. 43,000 Indian and Gourkha soldiers also died. Although most of India relied to the British flag, Bengal and Punjab were restive. Many Indian were eager for independence; they were led by a political new-comer called Mohandas Gandhi. In April, 1919, more than 5000 unnamed protesters gathered at Amritsar, in the Punjab. British troops fired on the crowd, killing an estimated 1500 men, women and children. The official toll was 379.4 When World War II broke out, once again, India contributed hugely to the British war effort. In addition to troops the princely states donated substantial amount of cash. By the end of the war, India had an
137
incredible 2.5 million volunteer army. 87,000 Indian soldiers had died in combat. The Indian Independence Moment was very strong by this time, though, and British rule was widely resented. Some 30,000 Indian POWs were recruited by the Germans and Japanese to fight against the Allies, in exchange for their freedom. Most, however, remained loyal. Indian troops fought in Burma, North Africa, Italy and elsewhere. Even as World War II raged, Gandhi and other members of the Indian National Congress(INC) demonstrated against British rule over India. The earlier government of India Act (1935) had provided for the establishment of provincial legislatures across the colony. The act also created an umbrella federal government for the provinces and princely states and granted the vote to about 10% of Indias male population.5 These moves towards limited self-governance only made India impatient for true self- rule. In 1942, Britain sent the Cripps Mission to offer future dominion status in return for help to recruit more soldiers. Cripps may have made a secret agreement with the Muslim League, allowing Muslims to opt out of a future Indian state. In any case, Gandhi and the INC did not trust the British envoy and demanded immediate independence in return for their cooperation. When the talks broke down, the INC launched the Quit India moment calling for the immediate withdrawal of Britons from India. In response, the British arrested the INCs leadership. Mass demonstrations burst out across the country but were crushed by the British Army. The offer of independence had been made, however, Britain may not have realised it, but it was now just a question of when the British Raj would end. The soldiers who had joined Japan and Germany in fighting the British were put on trial at Delhis Red Fort early in 1946. A series of ten courts martial were held, trying 45 prisoners on charges of treason, murder and torture. The men were convicted but huge public protests forced the commutation of their sentences. Sympathetic mutinies broke out in the Indian Army and Navy during the trial, as well. On August 17, 1946, violent fighting broke out between Hindus and Muslims in Culcutta. The trouble quickly spread across India6. Meanwhile, cash-strapped Britain announced its decision to withdraw from India by June of 1948. Millions of refugees flooded across the border in each direction. Between 2,50,000 and 5,00,000 people were killed in sectarian violence during the partition. Pakistan became independent on August 14, 1947. India followed the next day. Subsequently, as far as the conclusion for the study is concerned, the study found that the era most important for the study of the works of Naipaul is the era of the British as the mental colonisation institutionalised during their era is the focus of the works of Naipaul in India.
====================== References1. James, Lawrence. Raj: The Making and Unmaking of British India. London: St. Martins Griffin. 2000.p.61
138
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
James, Lawrence. The Rise and Fall Of the British Empire. London: St. Martins Griffin. 1997.p.166 Ibid.p.202 Ibid.p.12 James, Lawrence. Raj: The Making and Unmaking of British India. London: St. Martins Griffin. 2000.p.79 Ibid.p.41


Chief Editor
Role of Ideology in Translation Practice

*Alka Rani Agrawal
========================================================== Abstract- Ideology serves to fulfill political purposes and controls selection of texts to be translated, translation strategies, and the spreading of certain translated texts. Translation cannot be separated from ideology. The core reason is that ideology is often coded in the linguistic expression. The very fact of choosing to translate one particular article or book can be an ideological decision in itself. In reality, ideology is usually what causes a translator to stray from close, literal translation. It is therefore worthy to consider it impossible to divide the ideological aspect from the other aspects of translation. ========================================================== Ideology plays an extremely significant role in translation practice because ideology that serves to fulfill political purposes, controls selection of texts to be translated, translation strategies, and the spreading of certain translated texts. Schaffner claims that all translations are ideological since the choice of a source text and the use to which the subsequent target text is put are determined by the interests, aims, and objectives of social agents. Translation cannot be separated from ideology. The core reason is that ideology is often coded in the linguistic expression. Translation that engages in a transfer from one language into another language is selected as an effective tool of ideological operation. Schaffner further says that ideological aspects can be determined within a translated text itself, at the lexical level, for example, in the deliberate choice or avoidance of a particular word and at the grammatical level, for example, in the use of passive structures to avoid an expression of agency. These arguments support that translation is a site for ideological clashes, encounters, compromises and challenges. Translation scholars who slant in favor of the political definitions of ideology mainly believe that translating itself is a political act as Tahir-Gurcaglar argues, is translation political because, both as activity and product, it displays process of negotiation among different agents? On micro-level, these agents are translators, authors, critics, publishers, editors, and readers. Ideology, no doubt plays an important role in translation practice because translation and interpretation is affected by ideology. Rather the problem ===========================
* Associate Professor & Head, Department of English, N. K. B. M. G. P.G. College, Chandausi
140
is which ideology does not influence translation? Besides, the translator remains involved in shaping the culture. In this ideal world, ideology would not color our translations. But sometimes especially for texts that are not primarily factual, such as contracts, it is impossible to avoid. We translators must simply be hyperaware of the fact that our opinions and experiences do influence and they may make us choose certain translatorial strategies or words or styles of writing that perhaps are not exactly right for the text. Scholars in the field of language-related, cultural and translation studies, however, often tend to extend the concept of ideology beyond political sphere and define it in a rather politically neutralized sense as a set of ideas, which organize our lives and help us understand the relation to our environment. (Calzada-Perez). The strategy of paraphrasing is the most common way of translating idioms when a match cannot be found in the target language. Its purpose is unpacking the meaning of the source item, particularly if the item in question is semantically complex. In translation strategy, literal translation often fails to translate the genuine meaning or the implication, so it needs an added note to provide further information. Furthermore, any information you find in a reference book should not be used to replace any statement or stretch of the text but only to supplement the text, where you think the readers are likely to find it inadequate, incomplete, or obscure. The strategy of adding notes is obviously used to supplement extra information for clear and adequate understanding of the translated text. According to Tymoczko, the ideology of translation resides not simply in the text translated, but in the voicing and stance of the translator, and in its relevance to the receiving audience. In forming a certain kind of subject, in presenting particular versions of the colonized, translation brings into being overarching concepts of reality and representation. These concepts, and what they allow us to assume, completely occlude the violence that accompanies the construction of the colonial subject. The very fact that you choose to translate one particular article or book, but not another, can be an ideological decision in itself. Ultimately the translator always has to judge how close to stay to the source text. A translator is only as great a translator as he or she is a judge of how far to stray from the source text and when to do it. Ultimately it all comes down to who the audience for the translation. Certainly, a translator cannot change everything crude or ugly or racist. Nor would you want a translator to. Usually the translator shouldnt change anything. But occasionally its necessary. A text does not exist in a vacuum; it is the product of a culture. And cultures dont always translate in balance. Knowing when to make the change and when not to, is what makes a good translator. Ultimately knowing the right thing to do for a text is the mark of a good translator! Translation is viewed as a communicative act. In this view, translation is conceived primarily as a process of intercultural communication, whose end product is a text which is
141
capable of functioning appropriately in specific situations and context of use. (Schaffner) Translation teaching is now not seen as a set of rules and instructions prescribed by translation teachers to the students as to what strategies will lead to a good or correct translation and what to a wrong and incorrect one. Understanding the importance of decision-making in translation, the translation teachers should try to describe the actual translational decisions made by actual translators under different socio-cultural and ideological settings in real life and real situations, and explain the elocutionary consequences resulted from adoption of such decisions for the students. Translation teachers should make it clear for the students that every translation has its own aim determined by its translator, and that they could freely choose the options that best serve their intended aim of translation. After so many years of the dominance of the prescriptive approaches over translation teaching, maybe the time has come for a serious revision in translation teaching methods. Ideology is usually what causes a translator to stray from close, literal translation. Sometimes its professionalism and common sense. About translation and ideology, Landers writes What does the profession of translation do? Obviously, it translates. If a translator allows ideology to color anything he or she translates, the profession suffers. And when translation is stifled ether by repression or self-censorship entire nations are deprived of a glimpse into the mind of the other. Nord has presented a series of questions arise in the translation practice from the power-oriented perspective: What gets translated i. e. what is valued and what is excluded? Who does the translation that is who controls the production of translation? Who is translated for or who is given access to foreign materials and who denied? How is the material translated and what is omitted, added, altered, to control the message? These questions involve who is saying what to whom for what purposes and therefore confirm that ideological manipulation also exists in the translation as it does in most forms of communication. Ideology explicitly identified as power relations is implicated in every aspect of human communication, and translation as one way of interlingual and intercultural communication has also been subject to ideological manipulation. This means that it is necessary for each translator to have at least some control over his/her own mental processes and own deep ideology so as to be able to inform his/her readers of the kind of ideological deformation inevitably following from such a premise. It is therefore worthy to consider it impossible to divide the ideological aspect from the other aspects of translation. Since everybody has an ideology, and everybody translating interferes with the translation process with their own ideology, the best solution for such ideology is to be explicit at least for the translator.
====================== References-
142
1. 2. 3. 4.
5.
6.
Calzada-Perez, M. (2003). Introduction. In M. Calzada-Perez (Ed.) Apropos of Ideology (pp. 1-22). Manchester: St. Jerome. E. Landers: Literary Translation: A Practical Clifford al Guide. Nord, C. (2003). Function and Loyalty in Bible Translation. In M. Calzada-Perez (ed.). Apropos of ideology (pp. 36, 89-112). Philadelphia: Multilingual Matters. Schaffner, C. (2003). Third ways and new Centres: Ideological unity or difference? In M. Calzada-Prez (Ed.) Apropos of ideology (pp. 23-42). Manchester: St. Jerome. Tahir-Gurcaglar.S.(2003). The Translation Bureau Revisited: Translation as Symbol. In M. Calzada-Perez (Ed.) Apropos of Ideology (pp. 113-130). Manchester: St. Jerome. Tymoczko, M. (2003). Ideology and the Position of the Translator: In what Sense is a Translator 'in between'? In M. Calzada-Perez (Ed.) Apropos of Ideology (pp.181-202). Manchester: St. Jerome.
ISSN 0975-4083 lsUVj QkWj fjlpZ LVMht] jhok }kjk fjlpZ tjuy vkWQ vkV~Zl eSust esUV ,.M lks'ky lkbalsl ds fo'ks"kkad ds :i esa fuEufyf[kr nks lanHkZ iqLrdksa dk izdk'ku uoEcj] 2013 esa fd;k tk jgk gSA
(vkbZ-,l-ch-,u- 978&81&87364&59&7)


Literacy in India
*Archana Singhal
========================================================== Abstract-A Literacy is the skill of being able to read and write fairly well. Unlike speech, reading and writing do not come naturally; they have to be learned. Most people who live in industrialized or "developed" countries can read and write because everyday activities there depend on it. "Developing" countries in places like Asia and Africa-with very different ways of life from the industrialized nations-have low literacy rates because most people there can get along without the skill. (Some tribal languages) cannot read and write, or are illiterate. Even in such wealthy, highly developed nations as the United States, many people don't know how to read and write. ========================================================== Defining literacy in our changing world is not easy. Several years ago, being literate meant being able to read and write a little. Now, being literate means being able to read and write at a level to be successful in todays world and also being proficient at math, knowing how to use technology, and knowing how to solve problems and make decisions. Over the 1980s and 1990s definitions of literacy broadened to accommodate the challenges of globalisation ,including the impact of new technology and information media and the emergence of knowledge economics .The World Declaration on Education for All placed the challenges of literacy within the broader context of :Meeting the basic learning needs of every child ,youth and adults .Literacy is no longer exclusively understood as an individual phenomenon ,but is seen also as a contextual and societal and societal one. Literacy Rate in India- To know development in a society, Literacy is another proper indicator of economic development. For purpose of census, a person in age limit of seven and above, who can both write and read with understanding in any of the language is considered as a literate in India. In 1944, the Government of British India presented a Literacy in India grew very slowly until independence in 1947. An acceleration in the rate of literacy growth occurred in the 19912001 period. Prior to the British era, education in Indian commenced under the supervision of a guru in traditional schools called gurukuls.The gurukuls ===========================
* Lecturar, D.A.V. College, Muzaffarnagar (U.P.)
144
were supported by public donation and were one of the earliest forms of public school offices. In the colonial era, the gurukul system began to decline as the system promoted by the British began to gradually take over. Between 1881 82 and 194647, the number of English primary schools grew from 82,916 to 134,866 and the number of students in English Schools grew from 2,061,541 to 10,525,943. Literacy rates in accordance to British in India rose from 3.2 per cent in 1881 to 7.2 per cent in 1931 and 12.2 per cent in 1947. In 200001, there were 60,840 pre-primary and pre-basic schools, and 664,041 primary and junior basic schools. Total enrolment at the primary level has increased from 19,200,000 in 195051 to 109,800,000 in 200102. The number of high schools in 200001 was higher than the number of primary schools at the time of independence plan, called the Sergeant Scheme for the educational reconstruction of India, with a goal of producing 100% literacy in the country within 40 years, i.e. by 1984. Although the 40-year time-frame was derided at the time by leaders of the Indian independence movement as being too long a period to achieve universal literacy, India had only just crossed the 74% level by the 2011 census. The provision of universal and compulsory education for all children in the age group of 614 was a cherished national ideal and had been given overriding priority by incorporaton as a Directive Policy in Article 45 of the Constitution, but it is still to be achieved more than half a century since the Constitution was adopted in 1949. Parliament has passed the Constitution 86th Amendment Act, 2002, to make elementary education a Fundamental Right for children in the age group of 614 years. In order to provide more funds for education, an education cess of 2 per cent has been imposed on all direct and indirect central taxes through the Finance (No. 2) Act, 2004. As of almost 9 percent. It has gone up to 74.04% in 2011 from 65.38% in 2001, thus per Population Census of India 2011, the Literacy rate of India has shown as improvement showing an increase of 9 percent in the last 10 years. It consists of male literacy rate 82.14% and female literacy rate is 65.46%. Kerala with 93.9% literacy rate is the top state in India. Lakshadweep and Mizoram are at second and third position with 92.3% and 91.06% literacy rate respectively. Bihar with 63.08% literacy rate is the last in terms of literacy rate in India. Ranking of States in India by Literacy Rate
S.No State Literacy Rate (2011 Census) 86.3% 67.7% 67.0% 73.2% Male Literacy Rate (2011 Census) 90.1% 75.6% 73.7% 78.8% Female Literacy Rate (2011 Census) 81.8% 59.7% 59.6% 67.3%
1 2 3 4
Andaman & Nicobar Islands Andhra Pradesh Arunachal Pradesh Assam
145
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 -
Bihar Chandigarh Chattisgarh Dadra & Nagar Haveli Daman & Diu Delhi Goa Gujarat Haryana Himachal Pradesh Jammu and Kashmir Jharkhand Karnataka Kerala Lakshadweep Madhya Pradesh Maharashtra Manipur Meghalaya Mizoram Nagaland Orissa Puducherry Punjab Rajasthan Sikkim Tamil Nadu Tripura Uttar Pradesh Uttarakhand West Bengal INDIA
63.8% 86.4% 71.0% 77.7% 87.1% 86.3% 87.4% 79.3% 76.6% 83.8% 68.7% 67.6% 75.6% 93.9% 92.3% 70.6% 82.9% 79.8% 75.5% 91.6% 80.1% 73.5% 86.5% 76.7% 67.1% 82.2% 80.3% 87.8% 69.7% 79.6% 77.1% 74.04%
73.5% 90.5% 81.5% 86.5% 91.5% 91.0% 92.8% 87.2% 85.4% 90.8% 78.3% 78.5% 82.8% 96.0% 96.1% 80.5% 89.8% 86.5% 77.2% 93.7% 83.3% 82.4% 92.1% 81.5% 80.5% 87.3% 86.8% 92.2% 79.2% 88.3% 82.7% 82.14%
53.3% 81.4% 60.6% 65.9% 79.6% 80.9% 81.8% 70.7% 66.8% 76.6% 58.0% 56.2% 68.1% 92.0% 88.2% 60.0% 75.5% 73.2% 73.8% 89.4% 76.7% 64.4% 81.2% 71.3% 52.7% 76.4% 73.9% 83.1% 59.3% 70.7% 71.2% 65.46%
Source:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/India_states_ranking_by_literacy_rate Reasons for Low Literacy Rate1. The absence of adequate school infrastructure like improper facilities and inefficient teaching staff is one of the main factors affecting literacy in India. There is a shortage of classrooms to accommodate all the students in 20062007 2. In addition, there is no proper sanitation in most schools. The study of 188 government-run primary schools in central and northern India revealed that 59% of the schools had no drinking water facility and 89% no toilets. 3. In 600,000 villages and multiplying urban slum habitats, free and compulsory education is the basic literacy instruction dispensed by barely qualified para teachers. 4. The average Pupil Teacher Ratio for All India is 1:42, implying teacher shortage. 5. Such inadequacies resulted in a non-standardized school system where literacy rates may differ.
146
6.
Furthermore, the expenditure allocated to education was never above 4.3% of the GDP from 19512002 despite the target of 6% by the Kothari Commission. 7. Discrimination of lower castes has resulted in high dropout rates and low enrolment rates. The National Sample Survey Organization and the National Family Health Survey collected data in India on the percentage of children completing primary school which are reported to be only 36.8% and 37.7% respectively. 8. On 21 February 2005, the Prime Minister of India said that he was pained to note that only 47 out of 100 children enrolled in class I reach class VIII, putting the dropout rate at 52.78 per cent. 9. It is estimated that at least 35 million, and possibly as many as 60 million, children aged 614 years are not in school. 10. Absolute poverty in India has also deterred the pursuit of formal education as education is not deemed of as the highest priority among the poor as compared to other basic necessities. The MRP-based (mixed recall period) poverty estimates of about 22% of poverty in 200405 which translated to 22 out of per 100 people are not meeting their basic needs, much less than meeting the need for education. 11. The large proportion of illiterate females is another reason for low literacy in India. Inequality based on gender differences resulted in female literacy rates being lower at 65.46% than that of their male counterparts at 82.14%. 12. Due to strong stereotyping of female and male roles, Sons are thought of to be more useful and hence are educated. Females are pulled to help out on agricultural farms at home as they are increasingly replacing the males on such activities which require no formal education. Government schemes for literacy: National Literacy Mission- The National Literacy Mission, launched in 1988, aimed at attaining a literacy rate of 75 per cent by 2007. It imparts functional literacy to non-literates in the age group of 1535 years. The Total Literacy Campaign is the principal strategy of the NLM for eradication of illiteracy. The Continuing Education Scheme provides a learning continuum to the efforts of the Total Literacy and Post literacy programmes. Sarva Siksha Abhiyan- The Sarva Siksha Abhiyan (Hindi for Total Literacy Campaign) was launched in 2001 to ensure that all children in the 614-year age-group attend school and complete eight years of schooling by 2010. An important component of the scheme is the Education Guarantee Scheme and Alternative and Innovative Education, meant primarily for children in areas with no formal school within a one kilometre radius. The centrally sponsored District Primary Education Programme, launched in 1994, had opened more than 160,000 new schools by 2005, including almost 84,000
147
alternative schools. Non-governmental efforts-The bulk of Indian illiterates live in the countrys rural areas, where social and economic barriers play an important role in keeping the lowest strata of society illiterate. Government programmes alone, however well intentioned, may not be able to dismantle barriers built over centuries. Major social reformation efforts are sometimes required to bring about a change in the rural scenario. Several non-governmental organisations such as ITC, Rotary Club, Lions Club have worked to improve the literacy rate in India. Conclusion- Every citizen studying in some or other universities be given task of educating few number of Indian people in their localities in the way and manner it is desirable. Local survey groups be nominated by eminent people of the targeted area and they may be put to analyze,formulate efficacious plan to cover up largest population bringing up rate of literacy in India. Every person in the government job be given options of getting some pay increments or incentives if they are utilizing their leave or holidays in educating those masses who need literacy.Free education programs to poor people living in villages and towns. Setting up of new schools and collegesat district and state levels.Several committees should be form to ensure proper utilization of funds allotted to improve literacy rate.
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Ashok Gulati, National Literacy Policy , The Economic Times, August 3, 2001 , p. 12. Ramesh Chandra and Linu Mathew Phillip, op.cit; p. 3016 Woman with a Mission: Kaur, Raj Kumari Amrit. Women's Struggle : History of AIWC 2002, Basu, Arpna and Roy, Bharti. Population Census 2001. Population Census 2011.
Regional Imbalances and Disparities in India: Natural Endowments or Man Made

*Meenakshi Chahal
========================================================== Abstract-In India, Sectoral and Regional Imbalances have always been a source of great social and psychological tensions. It is difficult task for the government of India to take up lead in reconciling regional interests with national unity. There is a wide gap between region to region and province to province etc. There are pockets of poverty amidst plenty within each province/state. Dry and Hilly areas as well as those with tribal population are still far below the national average. It has widened the gap between prosperous and backward states thus creating a wide gap between rich and poor within a region. One of the main consequences of regional imbalances is the 'Migration' of people to the developed areas. Fruits of development are not reaching all people equitably. These disparities may generate friction among various sections of the society with tragic, undesirable and even violent outcomes. Lok Satta government had stated that it will strive to remove disparities at various levels and take immediate measures to ensure sustainable and balanced development of all the regions. A right balance is needed between our development needs and environmental commitments to ensure long run growth sustainability. Key Words-Disparities, Imbalances, Reconciliation, Sustainability. ========================================================== Introduction- Problem of Regional Imbalances has become a worldwide phenomenon today. After the Second World War the main problem of 1980s has been the regional imbalances. Regional Disparity in India is now a matter of serious concern. Major States that constitute 96% total population, Forward group consists of Andhra Pradesh, Gujarat, Haryana, Karnataka, Kerala, Punjab and Tamilnadu while Backward group consists of Assam, Bihar, Madhya Pradesh, Orissa, Rajasthan, Uttar Pradesh & West Bengal. Forward group of States account for 42% of the National population, Backward group accounts for 54% of the National population of the country. Thus Disparities in economic and social development across the regions and intra-regional disparities among ===========================
* Assistant Professor, B.Ed.(2-year) Programme,Directorate Of Distance Education, Kurukshetra University, Kurukshetra
149
different segments of the society have been one major area of concern. It has influenced planning in India since independence. Regional Violence: A Flare Up Of Tensions- Constitutionally, India is a secular state but large scale violence have periodically occurred in India since independence. In recent decades, communal tensions and religion-based politics have become more prominent. Although, India is generally known for religious pluralism, the Hindutva ideology propagates that India belongs to the Hindus and Christians, Muslims are aliens. Many religion and communal violence took place throughout the history of post-Independence India. Major religious violent incidents include Ayodhya Debate, Bombay Riots,1993 Bombay Bombings, 2002 Gujarat violence. In recent years, there has been a sharp increase in violent attacks on Christians in India, often perpetrated by Hindu Nationalists. Acts of violence include arson of churches, re-conversion of Christians to Hinduism, distribution of threatening literature, burning of Bibles, raping of nuns, murder of Christian priests and destruction of Christian schools, colleges, and cemeteries. India is sub-divided into 29 states differing in terms of their productive potential and the type of industry they can support. The actualization of their potential holds the key to increase the competitiveness of the nation as a whole. Sub-national regions are the locus of important determinants of competitiveness for the nation. The potential of the states drives the diversified competency of the nation where regional specialization provides the impetus for growth of the nation. Secret of growth of USA and UK lies in relegating the economic roles to the appropriate levels of the geographical strata. India needs to be perceived as an amalgamation of resources and competencies spread across its states. Business and companies need to adjudge investment opportunities through the lens of the competencies offered by the states. Its time for all the Indian states to realize their roles in the development of the industrial base in the country and take a productive initiative in this race for competitiveness. Variation in Economic Aspects- Economically, some countries are highly developed, some other countries are still developing and some more are under developed. Several factors are responsible for such variations among the nations besides political factors as availability of sufficient natural resources, quality of human resources and its quantity, abundance of financial resources and technological skills among the people etc. U.S.A, U.K, Western European Nations, Japan, Australia etc. are best examples for economically developed nations. India,China, Srilanka are some of the examples for developing nations.African Nations, Bangladesh etc. are some examples for under developed nations. There have been demands for separate states in India since independence e.g. a separate state in Andhra Pradesh, Vidharbha in Maharashtra, Chhatishgarh from Madhya Pradesh, Jharkhand from Bihar and Uttaranchal from Uttar Pradesh. These demands have been mainly due to
150
lack of economic development in different regions that further leads to regional imbalances. Migration to Developed Areas : Lack of Civic Amenities- One of the main consequences of regional imbalances is the Migration of people to the developed areas. Many skilled people from India migrate to the developed nations. Similarly within India, people from rural areas or under developed regions have been migrating to highly developed cities or regions e.g. Mumbai city has been facing the menace of population pressure on its resources. Citys civic authorities have been facing a challenging task of providing the basic civic amenities to the citizens.Violence, Law and Order problems are other consequences of such migrations to the developed regions from the under developed or developing regions. Inter-state differences : Caste and Political Nexus- Some states like Punjab, Maharashtra, Gujarat, and Tamil Nadu are marching ahead rapidly under the stimulus of the plan schemes while others are lagging behind and are unable to find adequate resources to implement the schemes. Four most populous and large states of Bihar, MP, Rajasthan and UP lag far behind and are known as BIMARU (sick) states. Caste politics and politicial- criminal nexus are at its peak dragging the BIMARU states backwards. Most disturbing is NorthSouth divide due to regional imbalances. Southern parts of India had moved ahead of North in matter of birth control, literacy and prosperity during last few decades. Many people of South India think that their superior genes have led them to prosperity. They are of the opinion that they are more intelligent, aware, enterprising and forward looking than North Indians. Ideological attack by British : Enflaming Casteist TendenciesBritish Rulers, Missionaries, Philosophers and Writers jointly launched an ideological attack on Indian social structure and its value system. They described Indian social structure as discriminatory,exploitative, oppressive, barbarous, uncivilized and highly stratified. They held these aspects responsible for causing illiteracy, communal problems, escalating violence, crimes and corruption, disparities of power, wealth and culture, evil social practices, feudalistic attitude, backward thinking, belief in dogmas and superstitions. Laying down the foundations of democratic institutions in India they started Quota System Based On Castes, introduced Electoral Politics on communal basis and enflamed casteist tendencies through Census Operations. Thus, there are serious regional disparities among different states of our country. Similarly, we have regional inequalities among different regions in a state. Even in a district there are disparities among different Mandals. Fruits of development are not reaching all people equitably. These disparities may generate friction among various sections of the society with tragic, undesirable and even violent outcomes, if not addressed immediately.
151
Various Facets Of Sustainability : An Important Dimension- Sustainable development has been defined in many ways but the most frequently quoted definition is from Our Common Future, also known as the Brundtland Report (1987): Sustainable development is development that meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs. There are different aspects to sustainability, most important among these are Environmental and Social. Environment sustainability refers to the need to preserve ecology and ecosystems for sustainable growth. Social Sustainability entails that the development process promotes social cohesion and reduces inequities. A balanced focus on both these aspects is a hallmark of sustainable development. Environment Sustainability- has a global dimension. As regards India, it remains fully committed to the global initiative to address environmental issues. It is participating in the ongoing international negotiations and has been part of 94 multilateral environmental agreements. In the recently held Doha Conference (December 2012), India protected its interests fully and succeeded in bringing the equity aspect firmly on the table. It has also voluntarily agreed to reduce the carbon emission intensity of its GDP by 20-25 per cent over 2005 levels by 2020. Within the country, the Government is also consistently making efforts/policies towards ensuring environmental sustainability. This includes policies like Joint Forest Management, Green Rating for Integrated Habitat Assessment, Coastal Regulation Zone, Clean energy drive through eco labeling and energy efficiency labeling, Fuel efficiency standards, etc. Sustainability is now seen as a key challenge as well as an opportunity in business. In future, only companies that make sustainability a goal will achieve competitive advantage. Industry being the catalyst of development, it needs to patronise the concept of sustainability in its various processes. National Agricultural Policy in India focuses on sustainable development of agriculture by promoting technically sound and economically viable, environmentally nondegrading and socially acceptable uses of the countrys natural resources. Towards this end, productivity enhancements are needed through higher investments in agriculture, greater research in the area of regionally adapted varieties and hybrids, adoption of eco-friendly integrated pest management technologies and use of manure and composite instead of artificial fertilizers.Green Banking i.e the banks as the financing agent of the economic and developmental activities of the world could also play a crucial role in promoting overall sustainable development. It is in this respect that the concept of green banking has emerged and is recognized as an important strategy to address sustainable development concerns and creating awareness among people about environmental responsibility. Green banking has two dimensions. Firstly, the way the banking business is being done i.e. paperless or not. There are several guidelines from the Reserve Bank on e-banking and banks are
152
also putting sincere efforts towards adopting paperless banking. Secondly, dimension of green banking relates to where the bank puts its money. Green Banking entails banks to encourage environment friendly investments and give lending priority to those industries which have already turned green or are trying to go green and thereby help to restore the natural environment. Social Sustainability-No programme for controlling environment degradation can be effective without education, jobs for everyone and without a visible rise in the standard of living of common masses. Social sustainability focuses both on Inter-generational equity i.e. future generations should have the same or greater access to social resources as the current generation, and Intra- generational equity i.e. allowing equal access to social resources within the current generation. Thus we need to strike a right balance between our development needs and environmental commitments to ensure long run growth sustainability. United Nations, post Rio+20 summit held in June 2012, has endorsed the idea of adopting Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) in the post-2015 period. At the national level, Twelfth Five Year Plan for India has emphasized the need for faster, more inclusive and sustainable growth for the period 2012-17 and accordingly has made this the theme of the 12th Plan document. Blueprint For Special Status to H-K Region : To Identify DisparitiesVijesh Kamath in Bangalore on June 2, 2013, addressed about the Blueprint for special status to H-K. It indicated that Implementation of special status for the Hyderabad-Karnataka Region has come closer with the State government. A draft notification has been prepared specifying the composition and functions of a high-powered Hyderabad-Karnataka Area Development Board to identify disparities. The Board will suggest the quantum of grants required to bring the region on a par with the rest of the State. The parliament had recently passed the Constitution (118th Amendment) Bill, 2012, to insert a new Article 371-J to provide special recognition for the six backward districts of Hyderabad-Karnataka region - Gulbarga, Yadgir, Raichur, Bidar, Koppal and Bellary. Article 371-J provides for establishing a separate development board and equitable allocation of funds for the development of the region. It also provides for quota in public employment through local cadres and reservation in education and vocational training institutions for those who belong to the region by birth or by domicile. According to the draft Development Boards for Hyderabad-Karnataka Region Order 2013, a copy of which is available with Deccan Herald, the 13-member Board will have one member of parliament and three MLAs whose electoral constituencies lie within the jurisdiction of the region. The government will nominate the members on a two-year rotation basis. The panel will also have the president of one of the Zilla Panchayats of the six districts, again nominated on a two-year rotation basis. It will also have five experts, one each from the fields of planning,
153
finance, irrigation and public works, agriculture and industry, education and employment. The draft specifies that the Board will have to assess the impact of various development efforts in clearing backlog and in achieving overall development within the region. The panel will have to meet at least once every three months. High-powered Committee for Redressal of Regional Imbalances headed by D.M. Nanjundappa had classified that of the 39 most backward taluks in the State, 21 were in the Hyderabad-Karnataka region . Section 21 of the Order mandates that the funds or outlays specified by the Board will have to be reflected in the Annual Financial Statement (budget). An official level Implementation Committee will be constituted to monitor the overall development activities in the region. Once the Board is constituted, the present Hyderabad-Karnataka Development Board Act, 1991, will be repealed. Measures Taken For Removing Regional Disparities - Lok Satta government had stated that it will strive to remove disparities at various levels and take immediate measures to ensure sustainable and balanced development of all the regions. Lok Satta will work within the framework of the constitution and will take the following immediate measures to remove these inequalities. Article 321 D of Indian Constitution, Regional Boards with necessary Legal powers will be instituted to remove regional disparities in the state by the Lok Satta Government. Further, establishment of District Governments and allocation of funds on the basis of development indicators is guaranteed. Lok Satta Government will duly implement all agreements, legislations and government orders that have been formulated so far to address the regional inequalities in the state. District-wise budget allocation will be done. Lok Satta government will appoint an independent commission to examine water allocation among different regions and its recommendations will be fully implemented. Growth corridors comprised of Education zones, Agricultural zones and Industrial zones will be operationalized for the rapid development of backward areas in the state. There will be strict restrictions on usage of productive agricultural lands for non-agricultural purposes. Permissions for non-agricultural usage will be granted only after the farmers have been guaranteed a better life. Usage of natural resources for the development of tribal areas etc. Thus in India, Sectoral and Regional Imbalances have always been a source of great social and psychological tensions. Fruits of economic boom have never been equally shared by all the regions and their people throughout India. It has given rise to new tensions in social, economic and political areas. It poses a danger to the integrity and stability of whole society as well as unity
154
of the nation. It is difficult task for the government of India to take up lead in reconciling regional interests with national unity. There is a wide gap between region to region/province to province. There are pockets of poverty amidst plenty within each province/state. Dry and hilly areas as well as those with tribal populations are still far below the national average. It has widened the gap between the prosperous and backward states and created a wide gap between the rich and poor within a region. Conclusions- India is a witness of Regional Disparities in many spheres of socio- economic development. On one side, worlds majority of new billionaires are in India and on the another side, India has majority of poor people. Developed States like Kerala, Tamil Nadu, Punjab and Gujrat are in forefront and BIMURAO (Bihar, Madhya Pradesh, Uttar Pradesh, Rajasthan and Orissa) are far behind in many aspects. Main objective of the Eleventh Plan was Faster and Inclusive growth and it is going to emphasize itself in the forthcoming Twelfth Plan also. Twelfth Plan said that expanding educational facilities and improving quality of education are key instruments. Reducing poverty is a key element for achieving faster and inclusive growth. Many International studies revealed that Improvement in Education and Reduction in Poverty resulted in regional balanced development. Today the definition of development is fast changing so the feeling is growing that we should re-order our priorities and move away from the single dimensional model.
====================== References1. 2. 3. Tirumala Prasad , Regional Imbalances in Economic Development, BASIC PLUS, A Magazine, 28 Articles, October 24, 2008 Latasinha's weblog, 'Regional Disparities In India', WordPress.com Umakanta Tripathy, Milida, Pragnya Laxmi Pandit , Lecturer in Economics, Department of BSH, Silicon Institute of Technology, Sambalpur , Regional Variation In Development Profile Of Orissa: An econometric analysis of indicator of development, ZENITH International Journal of Multidisciplinary Research, Vol.1 Issue 6, October 2011, www.zenithresearch.org.in Sriram, Marimuthu Sivakumar and M Vijay, K.N. Raj Library, CDS, Thiruvananthapuram, Regional Disparities in Poverty and Education in India, April 25, 2012 Dr. Amit Kapoor , Regional Disparity in India: Why It Matters, Harvard Business Review, Honorary Chairman of Institute for Competitiveness, Gurgaon, India Dr. K. C. Chakrabarty, Deputy Governor, Reserve Bank of India at the Yes Bank-GIZ-UNEP, A Speech Address, Sustainability Series event on Environment and Social Risk Management, Environmental and Social Sustainability: Key Issues and Concerns, Mumbai, April 23, 2013 Vijesh Kamath, Deccan Herald : A News Magazine, Updated News, Blueprint for special status to H-K ready, Bangalore, June 13, 2013
4.
5. 6.
7.
Teachers' Awareness and Attitude towards Information and Communication Technologies

* Mohsin Uddin
========================================================== Abstract- The present study is about the teachers' Awareness and Attitude towards Information and Communication Technologies (ICT). The sample was of 40 teachers (20 Male and 20 Female) selected form two universities in Madhaya Pradesh namely Madhya Pradesh Bhoj Open University Bhopal (MPBOU) and Dr. Hari Singh Gour Central University Sagar (DHGCU). They were selected purposively. The result showed that nearly 75% faculty of MPBOU has experience in using power point in their teaching. It is interesting to note that majority of the teaching faculty in both the universities have no exposure to network related tools. It is also revealed that almost all the respondents from both universities expressed the view that lack of infrastructure, training and technical support is the main constraint in using ICT. ========================================================== Introduction-Information and Communication Technology (ICT) is becoming an integral part of our day-to-day activity including the areas such as Education, Administration, Communication, Agriculture, Healthcare and good Governance. Information and Communication Technologies (ICTs) have an important and significant role in distance mode education, to deliver the instructions. The capabilities of technology provide support to traditional educational programs to meet the needs of individual learners more effectively and take the advantage of growing use of the Internet and web-based technologies. Studies indicated that, the teachers play a key role in this regard, and therefore need good working knowledge, skills and confidence in the use of ICT in the classrooms. Teachers attitudes and beliefs on ICT are the important factors in the integration of ICT tools with traditional classroom methods. Attitudes towards ICT, may be barriers in themselves and can influence or be influenced by other barriers. Computer anxiety and anxiety about change are key factors limiting teachers use of technology (Larner & Timberlake 1995). Fear might be other reasons of losing professional status through a downgrading of traditional pedagogical skills (Fabry & Higgs 1997). In order ===========================
* Training Manager, Distance Education Cell, National Institute of Rural Development, Hyderabad.
156
to assess the awareness and attitude of teachers involved in Distance Mode towards ICT, the study has been undertaken to facilitate the information to the Distance Education Council and related academic institutions. Therefore the study is undertaken with the following objectives:Objectives To find the awareness levels of the teachers on ICT To find the attitude towards using ICT Methodology Sampling- The purposive sampling method was used. The total sample consisted of 40 teachers in which 20 from Madhya Pradesh Bhoj Open University Bhopal and 20 from Dr. Hari Singh Gour Central University, Sagar. Selection criteria for the respondents: Respondents above 35 years of age with 5 years teaching experience in distance or regular mode Data Collection- The data collected with mixed approach i.e. qualitative and quantitative methods were used. Quantitative method includes schedule cum observation check list and qualitative method include Focus Group Discussions. The method of using multiple approaches permitted triangulation of the data to established reliability and validity of findings. Instrument- The instrument was developed keeping the aim of the research. The schedule cum observation checklist consisted of two parts. The first part asked about personal information such as gender, age, qualification, training, UGC- refreshers course and teaching experience. The second part of the scheduled cum observation checklist contained ten items. Three experts in the field were contacted to review the items on the tool for content validity. Hence, only seven items received the experts consent. Administration and Scoring- Initially the participants were contacted and rapport was established with them. The purpose of the study was explained to them and their consent was obtained. Data were collected and properly scrutinized. Discussion and Findings Table- 1 Awareness about ICT tools
S. No. D.H.G.C.U N=20 Male N=10 1 Yes 7(70%) No 3(30%) Female N=10 Yes No 6(60%) 4(40%) Male N=10 Yes 8(80%) No 2(20%) MPBOU N=20 Female N=10 Yes No 9(90% 1(10%)
From the above table, it is understood that the awareness of ICT was 90% in MPBOU both in male and female teaching faculty. It also indicates that the ICT awareness is more in open university than traditional university.
157
Table-2: Use of ICT tools in teaching

S. No. 1 2 3 Total ICT tool Never Rarely Sometimes D.H.G.C.U 19(95%) 1(5%) 0 20(100%) MPBOU 17(85%) 1(5%) 2(10%) 20(100%)
Regarding use of ICT tools almost all the respondents expressed the view that 95% from DHGCU and 85% from MPBOU never used it. This might be due to lack of infrastructure facility, lack of training and encouragement from administration. Table-3- Attitude towards using ICT tools during teaching
S. No. 1 D.H.G.C.U MPBOU Male Female Male Female Positive Negative Positive Negative Positive Negative Positive Negative 17 3 20 0 20 0 20 0
Data from table-3, reveals that attitude of the faculty members towards ICT almost positive which is a welcome sign among them to adopt new technologies in pedagogy. Table- 3- Experience with ICT tools
S. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ICT tool D.H.G.C.U Experience 0 0 10(50%) 10(50%) 0 0 0 No experience 20(100%) 20(100%) 10(50%) 10(50%) 20(100%) 20(100%) 20(100%) MPBOU Experience 0 2(10%) 15(75%) 20(100%) 0 0 0 No experience 20(100%) 18(90%) 5(25%) 0 20(100%) 20(100%) 20(100%)
Interactive Board Interactive Radio Power point Computer E module Animation Virtual video
The above table on the experience in the use of ICT tools shows that nearly 75% faculty of MPBOU possesses experience in using power point in their teaching. But it was distressing to note that majority of the teaching faculty in both the universities have no exposure to network related tools. Table 5: Constrains for using ICT
S. No. ICT tool 1. No technical support and lack of infrastructure Lack of training Resistance to change No interest Fear D.H.G.C.U Yes 20(100%) No 0 MPBOU Yes 20(100%) No 0
2 3 4 5
20(100%) 17(85%) 12(60%) 4(20%)
0 3(25%) 8(40%) 16(80%)
0 2(10%) 7(35%) 2(10%)
20(100%) 18(90%) 13(65%) 18(90%)
From table -5 indicates that almost all the respondents from both the
158
universities expressed the view that lacks of infrastructure, training and technical support were the main constraints in using ICT. It was appreciable to note that faculty of Bhopal was not resistant to change and they welcomed training inputs, if extended. The faculty of central university of Sagar required wide exposure. Suggestions- The overall findings of the study suggest that Teachers of Madhya Pradesh required exposure to new technologies in university elsewhere in the country. Special courses may be run during vacation for some teachers. A thorough knowledge is needed on the use of ICT tools in service training programme may be introduced for the existing faculty. Wherever necessary, study leave may sanction to those willing to have ICT input. Academic Staff college should provide training on uses of ICT tools in classroom situation especially for distance education faculty. Academic qualification for faculty positions should contain element of ICT knowledge as essential and not desirable. ICT based teacher education curriculum should be developed and adopted. ICT tools should be incorporated in the syllabus of teacher training programmes. Teacher should also get opportunity to attend seminars, workshops, UGCrefresher course to enrich their knowledge on use of ICT. UGC and Boards of Secondary Education in States should assist private academic institutions in the country to launch ICT based institutions. Limitations of the study Due to small sample the finding in the study may be considered as informative and should be used cautiously to generalize. Suggestions for Further Research 1. Similar studies can be carried out to find out the attitude of learners on ICT. 2. An experimental study can be carried out to find out the effectiveness of ICT in distance Education.
====================== References1. 2. 3. Anastasia, A. 1961. Psychological Testing, Macmillan Company, New York. Fabry, D. & Higgs, J.1997. Barriers to the effective use of technology in education, Journal of Educational Computing, 17 (4): 385-395. Gupta, A.K. and Ghosh, C.K.2008. Literacy, Elementary Education and Teachers' Training in the State of Madhya Pradesh by effective use of ICT, University News, Vol. 46, No. 31. Karlinger, F.N. 1973. Research Method in Behavioural Sciences, Rinehart and Winston, New York. Larner, D. & Timberlake, L.1995.Teachers with limited computer knowledge:
4. 5.
159
6.
variables affecting use and hints to increase use, The Curry School of Education, University of Virginia. Sorgo, A., Verckocnik, J. and Kocijanca, C.2010. Information Communication Technologies(ICT) in Biology Teaching in Slovenian Secondary School, Eurasia Journal of Mathematics, Science and Technology Education, 6(1):37-46.
ISSN 0975-4083

The Aims & Objectives- To provide a plateform for the publication of original unpublished Research Papers, Summary of Research Project, Thesis and Book review relating to all subjects of Social & Life Sciences and to promote interdisciplinary research work. Book Review can be published on receipt of two copies of concerned book. Guidelines & Member Ship Fee -Authors/ Researchers can contact in the Registered Office given below-

Chief Editor
A Study of Correlation among Emotional Behaviour, Communication Sk ill and Adjustment of Students on the Base of Different School Areas * Rakesh Katara **Dhruva Kumar Mittal
========================================================== Abstract- This study was carried out on 640 students between 12-16 years age group of Senior Secondary school of Rural and Urban of Ajmer district is done for the study of correlation among Emotional behaviour, Communition skill and Adjustment of students on the base of different school areas, is revealed for the sample of the purpose of random method. Emotional Behaviour Scale, Communition Skill Scale (Self created) and Adjustment Scale, are used as tools for data collection. Ttest and cofficient test of correlaion, statistics mehtod are used for the Analysis of collected data's. A difference is noticed in Emotional Behaviour, Communication Skill and Adjustment of Rural and Urban school students at the some time, a difference is stuied in the relation of communition skill and Adjustment. ========================================================== Introduction- Education can only be significant when it can mould a man in such a way that he can choose peace as his life style and an have a power to solve any problem that he can not only be an idle spectator. It has capacity to keep the nation, healthy and energetic with the peaceful attitude in which curriculum of school is harmonised but 12-18 year is teen age, that is a stage of Emotional development of young pupils, if they are not paid attention their life in future is effected. Emotion is internal feeling So the experience of Emotions is found different from other. IZARD has presented a group of ten basic Emotions like- Joy, surprize, anger, avamang, fear, shame, crime, interest and excitement, these connectivity produce different kinds of Emotions. Volter (1974), theire are eight basic Emotions all other Emotions are the conscience of the mixture of same basic Emotions. He has revealed these Emotions in for contrary couples like - joy, sorrow, willing, unwilling, fear, anger and wonder pre-realisation. The experience of Emotional Behaviour depends ===========================
* ** Lecturer,Govt.Institute of Advanced Studies in Eduction(IASE) Ajmer (Rajasthan) Research Scholor (Eduction),Mewar University ,Gangrar,Chittorgarh (Rajasthan)
161
on the sequence of the activation of physical sense. The assumption of Emotion is by their verbal and nonverbal expressions. These verbal and non-verbal expressions do the work of communication source. A man becomes able to understand. the feelings and expressions of himself and others. The higher volume of speaking levels peach like specialities and accent of the words are included in the medium of pronunciation of Communication Skill. These other non-verbal characteristic of language and timely characteristic are called overcome language, facial expressions, dynemic (physical position and body language) and nearest (physical distance in face of face interaction) Behaviour are included in other non-verbal mediums. The most famous medium of Emotional Behaviour is blandishment of face Communication of mouth place of very important in a daily life most other people are successful in balancing of Emotions. They try to ajdust with them and follow defence mechanism of progressive work to face. These Adjustment solution protect them from different Emotional Behaviour like anxeity, weariness etc. Anxeity is that state which a man develops in his failure of self resepect. We often face douatful circumstances in our life, fear anxeity, unwillingness like negotional emotions are developed in any man during difficult and stress condition. If these types of negotional Emotions are continuously allowed for long time, they may have negative effect on physical health and psychology of man, this is the reason that most of the functions of stress management considered the management of the Emotions is necessary for stress management. The focus of Emotional management depends on decrease in negotional Emtionas and increase of Negational. Successful Emotinal Management is the key of Effective Social Adjustment. According to Mehlla, S.K. (2008) has considered Emotional Development as a very important factor of Educational Growth and Development in every activity of man, his Emotional Behaviour is revealed effect physical, social, mental nad learning process as well as his areas of Adjustment. According to Scott, T. & Joseph, P. (2010). The students are correlated with various Communication Skills and Emotions in school environment. According to Nishida (1985) cultural Adjustment, Communication Skilland language, all are correlated. Logan, Sarah, Nughes, N. (2011) told that cognitive factor communication depends on Internal Inspiration and intelligence of the students like- reading, writing and speaking, these are correlated with the internal relation of the students. According to Khan, M.A. (1976) Adjustment effects the man in Emotional, Creativity and sensivity. Kumari, S. (1982) told that the level of Adjustment is effected by many factors in Sociometic Groups like- Social Status, Family Status, Emotional Behaviour and Educational Environment. Above Mentioned Research studies revealed that the relation of Emotional Behaviour, Communication Skill and Adjustment these three variable are not studied together. Thus Researchers have tried to study the correlation of above variables.
162
Emotional Behaviour :Baran, Byrne and Kantowitz (1980), by Emotion we mean a subjective feeling state involving psychological arousal, accompanied by characteristic behaviours. Sanstrok (2000), We will define Emotion as feeling or effect, that can involve psychological arousal, conscious, experience and Behavioural expression. Emotional Element of man is connected with the extrovert expression in which divert communication, body language physical posture, volume, ideas are some such elements that revealed Emotional Behaviour of a man. these are effected by learning, culture and the Environment of the school. In this present study Emotional Behaviour means- students of adequate depth of feeling, adequate expresion and control of Emotions, ability to function with emotions, ability to cope with problem. Emotions, enhancement of positive Emotions. Communication Skill :Communication is called heart of education because not only education but also teacher and common Behaviour cant be imagined without communication. Communication is a process to communicate, ideas, attitude, sensivity, logics and exchanged of knowledge between too or more than two persons. So commuication works to maintain human and Social Environment. Singh (2005) Explained that the working behaviour of all living and non-living exist in nature are directly or indirectly dominated by communication as language is developed, the various methods of communication, as complition in communicatoin, clearity, unity, effects are also developed. In the present study communication skill is used, in language writing, language speaking language listening, body language. Adjustment :According to Boring, Longfield & Weld Adjustment is the process by which a living organism maintains a balance between its needs and the circumstances that influence, the satisfaction of these needs.According to above definition there is blanace of Adjustment and the Adjustment is arranged in the atmosphere which is constituted with complicated. aspects of natural, Emotional, Biological, Social, Cutlural and Educational. The standard opinion of Dr.S.K. Thakur explained that if biological and psychological demands of any man are self satisfied than life will be very easy and comfortable but there are several hinderence. Regarding individual environmental problems prevent satisfaction. So these obstracts create difficulty to adjust Emotional, Social and Educationals. Problems in present study, the meaning of Adjustment is the adjustment of aspects. In present study, the Adjustment of correlation Behaviour and Communication Skill of Rural & Urban students of school is tried to explain. Objectives of the study : To find out the effect of different school areas on correlation between Emotional Behaviour and Communication Skills of Rural and Urban School students. To find out the effect of different school areas on correlation between
163
Emotional Behaviour and Adjustment Skills of Rural and Urban School students. To find out the effect of different school areas on correlation between Communication Skills and Adjustment of Rural and Urban School students. Hypothesis of the study : There will be no significant difference between the effect of different school areas on correlation between Emotional behaviour and Communication Skill of Rural and Urban schools students. There will be no significant difference between the effect of different school areas on correlation between Emotional behaviour and Adjustment Skill of Rural and Urban schools students. There will be no significant difference between the effect of different school areas on correlation between Communication Skill and Adjustment of Rural and Urban schools students. Method of the study- Survey method of research was used in this present study. Sample for the study- This study was carried out on 640 students from 1216 year age group of senior secondary school studying students at Rural and Urban areas of Ajmer District is done for the study o sample selection by purpose of Random Method. Tool used for the study : 1. Emotional Behaviour scale - standarised by Dr. Harish Sharma and Dr. Rajivlochan Bhandari. 2. Communication Skill Scale - Developed by Investigator Dr. Rakesh Katara and Dhruva Kumar Mittal. 3. Adjustment Inventory - Standarised by prof. A.K.P. Sinha and Prof. R.P. Singh. Statistical Techniques used In Study- The obtained datas were analyzed using t test and coefficient test of correlation. Analysis and Interpretation of the data- Statistical Analysis of Rural and Urban schools students (n=640) about Emotional Behaviour, Communication Skill and Adjustment are measured in datas and shown in following tables : Table No. - 1 Correlation and t- value between Emotional Behaviour and Communication Skills of Rural and Urban school students.
First Variable Second Variable Communication Skill Students of Rural School 0.102 Emotional Behaviour Students of Urban Schools 0.071 't'- value 2.184
Significant level of Correlation on the level of 0.05 - .113 on the level of 0.01 - .148 Significant level of t value on the level of 0.05 1.96 on the level of 0.01 - 2.54
It is observed from table no. 1 that correlation 0.102 is acquired between
164
the Emotional Behaviour and Communication Skill in the group of students of Rural Schools. It is no. significant value on the level 0.05 on the other hand, in urban schools, this correlation 0.071 is acquired in the group of students it is negative correlation and no significant on the level 0.05. t value 2.184 is the scores of correlation of Emotional Behaviour and Communication Skill Correlation in the schools of Rural and Urban Areas. This is more than 1.96 Significant value of significant level 0.05. So correlation between above mentioned both variables, their difference in school areas, is significant in the conclusion. There is no significant difference in different school areas effect on Emotional Behaviour and Communication Skills of hypothesis of Rural Urban students of school. HO1 is first rejected. Table No. -2 Correlation and t- value between between Emotional Behaviour and Adjustment of Rural and Urban school students.
First Variable Second Variable Adjustment Students of Rural School 0.108 Emotional Behaviour Students of Urban Schools 0.269 't'- value 2.107
It is observed from table no. 2 that correlation 0.108 is acquired between the Emotional Behaviour and Adjustment in the group of students of Rural Schools. It is no. significant value on the level 0.05 on the other hand, in urban schools, this correlation 0.269 is acquired in the group of students it is negative correlation and significant on the level 0.01.t value 2.107 is the scores of correlation of Emotional Behaviour and Adjustment Correlation in the schools of Rural and Urban Areas. This is more than 1.96 Significant value of significant level 0.05. So correlation between above mentioned both variables, their difference in school areas, is significant in the conclusion. There is no significant different in different school areas effect on Emotional Behaviour and Adjustment of hypothesis of Rural Urban students of school. HO2 is second rejected. Table No. -3 Correlation and t- value between between Communication Skill and Adjustment of Rural and Urban school students.
First Variable Second Variable Adjustment Students of Rural School 0.084 Communication Skill Students of Urban Schools 0.034 't'- value 1.488
It is observed from table no. 3 that correlation 0.084 is acquired between the Communication Skill and Adjustment in the group of students of Rural Schools. It is no. significant value on the level 0.05 on the other hand, in urban schools, this correlation 0.034 is acquired in the group of students it is negative
165
correlation and no significant on the level 0.05.t value 1.488 is the scores of correlation of Communication Skill and Adjustment Correlation in the schools of Rural and Urban Areas. This is more than 1.96 Significant value of significant level 0.05. So correlation between above mentioned both variables, their difference in school areas, is significant in the conclusion. There is no significant different in different school areas effect on Communication Skill and Adjustment of hypothesis of Rural Urban students of school. HO3 is third selected. Conclusion : 1. There is no significant correlation between Emotional Behaviour and Communication Skills of the students of the school 12-16 years old Rural Areas. 2. There is no significant correlation between Emotional Behaviour and Communication Skills of 12-16 years old students of the school of urban Areas. 3. There is significant difference in the scores of correlation between Emotional Behaviour and Communication Skill between students of school of Rural and Urban Areas. Consiquently a difference is found between Emotional Behaviour and Communication Skill of the student of the school of Rural and Urban Areas. 4. There is no significant correlation between Emotional Behaviour and Adjustment of the students of the school 12-16 years old Rural Areas. 5. There is no significant correlation between Emotional Behaviour and Adjustment of 12-16 years old students of the school of urban Areas. 6. There is significant difference in the scores of correlation between Emotional Behaviour and Adjustment between students of school of Rural and Urban Areas. Consiquently a difference is found between Emotional Behaviour and Adjustment of the student of the school of Rural and Urban Areas. 7. There is no significant correlation between Communication Skill and Adjustment of the students of the school 12-16 years old Rural Areas. 8. There is no significant correlation between Communication Skill and Adjustment of 12-16 years old students of the school of urban Areas. 9. There is no significant difference in the scores of correlation between Communication Skill and Adjustment between students of school of Rural and Urban Areas. Educational Implication- It is observed from the conclusion study that there is no direct significant correlation between Emotional Behaviour and Communication Skill of the students of school of only Rural Areas or only Urban Areas but the difference of correlation is significant between Emotional Behaviour and Communication Skill of the students of both the areas on the other side no significant correlation is found between Emotional Behaviour and Adjustment of the students of Rural schools but this correlation is negaive
166
and significant in the students of urban areas and difference is significant between the correlation of the students of both the areas. So the educatnist should identity those factors which create difference between correlation of Emotional Behaviour and Communication Skills of the students due to the difference of school areas. Those factor should also be identified that creat the difference between correlation of Emotional Behaviour and Adjustment of the students on the base of difference of areas of study. Also announces that laps of Emotional Behaviour effects the adjustment of the students negativity. So the students of Urban school should be trained for Emotional Management so that their Adjustment may be strong, stage play, Games competition, debate and creative efforts of presentation can direct the positive.Emotional Behaviour of the students, this Emotional Behaviour can be helpful in the Adjustment of the students after transformation.
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Baron, Byrne & kantowitiz (1980) psychology, p. 273. Dowine N.M. & Health R.W. (1977) Basic Statistical Methods (third Edition) Harper & Raw Publisher's, New York, Evenston and London p. 240. http://ncert.nic.in/sites/publication/ Khan, M.A. (1976) Effect of parental deprivation on peronality Adjustment (With Special Reference to Denotified Tribes of U.P) Ph.D. Psy., Agra Uni, Kumari S. (1982) A study of Intelligence , Achievement, Adjustment and Socio-economic Patterns of different Sociometric Groups of Adolescents, Ph.D. Education, Pan, Uni. Logan S.H.N. (2011) The importance of intrinsic motivation for high and low ability and individual differences, research publication, Vol-2, p. 124-128. Mahlla, S.K. (2008) Balkon ke samvegatmak vikas Mein shikshakon ki bhiumika, Naie Shiksha, Vol - 58(2), P. 19-20. NCERT (2005) National Curriculum Framework, NCERT New Delhi. NCERT (2006) psychology, NCERT, Arvind Marg, New Dehli, p.184-187. Nishida, H. (1984) Japanese Inter Cultural communication competence and cross cultural Adjustment Relations, Vol-9, Issue-3, p. 249-269. Pathak, P.D. (2008) Education Psychology, Agrawal Publication, Agra, p. 450. Santrock (2000) psychology, p. 393. Scoott, T. and Joseph, P, (2010) Eomotion in teaching and Learning, Development and vaildation of the classrrom emotion Scale Communication Education, V 59 p. 431. Singh , Sumitra (2005) Samprashan Prakriya Avum Shekshik Vikas, Pariprakshya (NUPA) year -12, Edition-2, p. 51-57. Singh, A. K. (2006) Higher Genral Psychology, Motilal Banarsidas, New Delhi. P. 785. Walter, D. and Smitson W.S. (1974) The Meaning of Emotional Maturity, MH. Winter, 58:9-11.
6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
14. 15. 16.
Link ing Higher Education with Regional Needs: The Dialogue of Universities with Society
* Ritu Bakshi
========================================================== Abstract- For many higher education institutions regional engagement is becoming the crucible within which an appropriate response to overall trends in higher education is being forged. Responding to the new demands requires new kinds of resources and new forms of management that enable higher education institutions to make a dynamic contribution to the development process in the round. The challenge is to link within the institution the teaching, research and community service roles by internal mechanisms (e.g. funding, staff development, incentives and rewards, communications) and to engage the institution with all facets of the regional development process (e.g. skills enhancement, technological development and innovation, cultural awareness) in a region/higher education institution value added management process in the learning region. Given the above considerations, the principle objective of the article is to provide an understanding of the ways in which higher education institutions are seeking to respond to regional needs. The secondary objective is to guide the formulation of policy by national and regional governments seeking to mobilize higher education institutions towards the achievement of regional development goals. This article falls into three parts. The first expands upon the discussion of regional development and the territorial dimension to higher education policy. The second discusses the response of higher education institutions to the changing context in relation to teaching, research and community service. The final part provides the conclusions and recommendations. It explores some of the factors that inhibit and drive the adoption of a regional role by higher education institutions and makes some remarks concerning the contribution of universities and colleges, through critical debate, to the creation of a common understanding of priorities for regional development amongst regional stakeholders. ========================================================== Introduction- Within advanced economies, there is a general concern that teaching and research within higher education institutions are not directed ===========================
* Assistant Professor, Department of Educational Studies, Central University of Jammu (J & K)
168
enough towards specific economic and social objectives. One of the fields where this demand for specificity is clearest is regional development. Being located `in regions, universities and colleges are asked by a new set of regional actors and agencies to make an active contribution to the development of these regions. These demands are driven, amongst other things, by processes of globalisation and regionalization (or localisation) in economic development, whereby the regional (or local) environment is as relevant as the national macro economic situation in determining the ability of enterprises to compete in the national, supra-national and global economies. Within this environment, the regional availability of knowledge and skills is as important as the physical infrastructure. As a result, regionally-engaged higher education institutions can become a key asset and powerhouse for economic development. Higher education institutions have always contributed to the social and cultural development of the places in which they are located. However, the emerging regional development agenda can be argued to require regional engagement to be formally recognised as a third role for universities and colleges not only sitting alongside but fully integrated with mainstream teaching and research. Therefore the requirements for regional engagement embrace many facets of the responsive higher education institution that are being generated by evolving priorities within the higher education system. These priorities all come under the following heading: Meeting the various needs of a more diverse client population- Among these needs are relatively new demands such as: flexible structures for lifelong learning created by changing skill demands; more locally based education as public maintenance support for students declines; greater links between research and teaching; and more engagement with the end users of research. For many higher education institutions regional engagement is becoming the crucible within which an appropriate response to overall trends in higher education is being forged. Responding to the new demands requires new kinds of resources and new forms of management that enable higher education institutions to make a dynamic contribution to the development process in the round. The challenge is to link within the institution the teaching, research and community service roles by internal mechanisms (e.g. funding, staff development, incentives and rewards, communications) and to engage the institution with all facets of the regional development process (e.g. skills enhancement, technological development and innovation, cultural awareness) in a region/higher education institution value added management process in the learning region. Given the above considerations, the principle objective of the article is to provide an understanding of the ways in which higher education institutions are seeking to respond to regional needs. The secondary
169
objective is to guide the formulation of policy by national and regional governments seeking to mobilize higher education institutions towards the achievement of regional development goals. This article falls into three parts. The first expands upon the discussion of regional development and the territorial dimension to higher education policy. The second discusses the response of higher education institutions to the changing context in relation to teaching, research and community service. The final part provides the conclusions and recommendations. It explores some of the factors that inhibit and drive the adoption of a regional role by higher education institutions and makes some remarks concerning the contribution of universities and colleges, through critical debate, to the creation of a common understanding of priorities for regional development amongst regional stakeholders. Higher Education Institutions and Territoriality- The capacity of a higher education institution to respond to regional needs is influenced by conditions that result from the interrelations between several geographic scales from the global to the local as well as from the historical legacy of each higher education institution and its region. Policy makers need to be aware of the demands exerted upon higher education institutions from each of these different spatial scales. These include: restructuring in the global economy; changing national contexts for higher education; the particular characteristics of the region in terms of the regional economic base; the regional policy; the regional educational system; and the particularities of each institution. Below, this context will be discussed through a review of territoriality and higher education institutions. Problematising Territoriality- Territoriality is an extremely complex and problematic concept for higher education institutions. Universities, in particular, exist as autonomous institutions that are often characterised by low levels of local territorial embeddedness, regulation at the national level, and preoccupation with international and national academic and research communities. All higher education institutions embrace some notion of territoriality within their mission statements and institutional plans. These range from general notions of contributing to society and international research to more precise commitments to local and regional communities. Moreover, UNESCOs Framework for priority action for change and development of higher education (1998) has stated that higher education institutions should: Develop innovative schemes of collaboration between institutions of higher education and different sectors of society to ensure that higher
170
education and research programmes effectively contribute to local, regional and national development. Reconceptualising Territorial Development and Governance- The changing role of higher education institutions in regional development must be seen within a broader context of globalisation and the changing nature of regional development and governance, notably the shift in emphasis from material to non-material assets (knowledge, skills, culture, and institutions) and the resurgence of the region as an important arena for political and economic activity. This section briefly reviews this changing context and outlines new forms of territorial governance based upon the concept of the learning region. The link between the information society, Information Communication Technologies (ICTs), and learning regions is considered to be mutual and selfreinforcing. Regions with strong learning cultures that support the development and uptake of ICT applications may be able to develop competitive advantages and use the information society as a mechanism for growth, whilst the ICTs themselves are constructed through certain social networking processes and contexts to be found in particular regions. For less favoured regions the implications are clear: without some attempt to make better use of ICTs, the prospects of cohesion and convergence are poor. In the context of the lifelong learning agenda, learning and teaching activities have moved away from a linear model of transmission of knowledge based upon the classroom and are becoming more interactive and experiential, drawing upon, for example, project work and work-based learning, much of which is locationally specific. Within this changed context, learning and knowledge creation take on different characteristics. In particular, it is important to differentiate between modifiable knowledge, i.e. know-what (data, etc.) and tacit knowledge such as knowhow (skills), know-who (networking) and know-why (experience). These latter forms of hybrid knowledge, then, become the most valuable type of knowledge depending upon interpersonal relationships, trust and cooperation and are most readily developed within the region. Moreover, according to Gibbons et al. (1994), there has been a shift from mode 1 knowledge creation, which is homogeneous, disciplinary and hierarchical and which characterises the autonomous and distinct academic disciplines, to mode 2 knowledge production that is heterogeneous, transient, transdisciplinary, socially accountable, and reflexive, and undertaken in a context of application. Responding to Regional Needs- Higher education institutions are responding to this changing environment, amongst other things, by establishing new institutional management structures to meet more effectively the demands of various regional stakeholders. Such changes are occurring not only within the traditional teaching and research roles of universities and colleges, but also within their community service role. A core function of higher education institutions has been to educate through the dissemination of its knowledge
171
base. Whilst this teaching function was initially offered to a national elite of politicians, industrialists, the clergy, and civil servants, through the 20th century access has continually been widened to much larger groups. In spite of this extension of access, the development of the teaching function within long established higher education institutions has not been influenced by regional needs, as most still recruit from, and provide graduates for, national and international markets. However, the context for education provision is changing as a result of demands to create more regionally relevant education systems. Such demands are a result of policy changes from national governments, especially those associated with the concept of the learning society, and from impulses within regions to enhance the relevance of the teaching function. Newer institutions and those incorporated into the higher education sector from outside are creating or have inherited a tradition of providing locallyrelevant education. For all types of higher education institutions the challenge is to balance the need to meet regional labour needs with the need to encourage the national and global mobility and competitiveness of staff and students and to position the institution in the global market. In order to realise the potential of higher education institutions for regions, there is a requirement to bring together all regional education providers to reduce duplicative functions, enhance collaborative provision and create a regional learning system by expanding the overall size of the education market. However, this agenda is problematic, as there are tendencies towards the localisation and delocalisation of teaching and learning as the regionally embedded higher education institution is renegotiated with the emergence of the virtual or placeless higher education institution. Higher education institutions can localise the learning process by drawing upon the specific characteristics of a region to aid learning and teaching. The creation of specialist, locally-oriented courses that draw upon the characteristics of the region can give higher education institutions a competitive advantage in national and international student recruitment pools. Further, locally-oriented courses, especially those that are closely connected to growing industries in the region, can offer graduates greater chances of success and mobility in the regional labour market. Locally-based teaching, then, is an effective way of exposing the region to the work of higher education institutions and the skills and talents of their students. Such teaching often draws upon representatives from local industry to add practical experience to the teaching process. Moreover, project and course work, particularly at the post-graduate level can be undertaken collaboratively with regional partners and can be focused upon regional issues. Overly localised teaching programmes can have several shortcomings; if tied too closely to the economic base of the region, courses can be susceptible to cycles of growth and contraction in the regional economy. Regionally-oriented courses may also have a limited appeal in terms of attracting non-local students
172
and could also adversely affect the performance of students in national labour markets. Finally, many higher education institutions regard their role as generating expert knowledge and providing graduates of the highest quality. One cannot assume that young people in (or outside) a region will be attracted to study those courses that are particularly in the regions economic interests. Indeed, there is evidence that in areas of economic hardship, home-based students will see a degree as a way of escaping from the region and will explicitly reject staying in the area. There is a real tension here. Higher education institutions have always enabled young people to leave their home region in search of the kinds of jobs they want elsewhere, as well as being a means of matching the acquisition of knowledge and skills to the regions developing economy. They have to seriously consider the problems associated with localising the curriculum. Research within higher education institutions, especially the university sector, has traditionally emphasised the production of basic knowledge for the (inter)-national academic community and neglected the application of established knowledge for the local/regional community. Some researchers in universities have been reluctant to seek external research sponsors and have often been guarded towards collaborative research activities. Furthermore, many national funding regimes exacerbate inter-institutional competition rather than collaboration in terms of research activity and funding. However, there are a number of trends that are encouraging universities to develop mechanisms for commercialising their research base and link their research and expertise more closely to the external environment. Firstly, it is important to understand the ways in which the shifting production of knowledge (Gibbons et al., 1994) is being reconfigured and how this is altering the conduct of research in higher education systems. Universities no longer have a monopoly on knowledge production. They must enter into strategic alliances with a range of other knowledge producers in order to remain at the cutting edge of research. Universities are increasingly seeking external research partners to tap into wider knowledge networks and meet the rising costs of research. This is being achieved by an expansion of research activities away from traditional academic units to new collaborative units such as research centres and science parks. The important point for universities is that these new vehicles for knowledge production have significant organisational implications. Secondly, higher education institutions have responded to opportunities provided by, for example, the historical, cultural, political or economic context of the region by developing research agendas that reflect these characteristics. The region is often used as a test bed or laboratory for research that gives them a competitive advantage both nationally and internationally. A key question to pursue is the extent to which university research can draw down new ideas
173
into the region to aid its development. Research activities can also be directed towards promoting the growth of regionally-based industrial clusters. From the perspective of many development agencies, universities (and to a lesser extent colleges) are seen as key actors to promote the establishment and development of new clusters of economic activity. Higher education institutions have established a number of mechanisms to manage their research interface with the outside world. However, the transfer of research between higher education institutions and other stakeholders is a complex process. Rather than regarding research and knowledge transfer as a simple linear model between higher education institutions and their partners, there are a number of simultaneous flows between clusters of stakeholders and higher education institutions that occur on a spectrum from individual and ad-hoc interaction and consultancy work to centrally-organised activities. Explicit mechanisms through which research results are transferred between higher education institutions and regional stakeholders include single-entry points such as regional development offices, research centres, spin-off companies, incubator units, advice and training services, science parks, and mechanisms to exploit intellectual property rights (IPR). However, it is necessary to recognise that the most effective technology and knowledge transfer mechanism between higher education institutions and the external environment is through the institutional teaching function, that is to say through staff and students via the teaching curriculum, placements, teaching company schemes, etc. This reinforces the intimate relationship between the teaching and research functions of higher education institutions. Community Service- The contribution that higher education institutions make to civil society through the extra-mural activities of individual staff (e.g. in the media, politics, the arts, advising government bodies, socio-economic, and technological analyses), through providing liberal adult education, evening classes, access to facilities such as libraries, theatres, and museums, and through public lectures is being bundled together and recognised as a third role alongside teaching and research. Perhaps more than the other roles, it is this third role of community service which embeds higher education institutions in the region. In certain contexts, this role reflects the 19th century paternalism of industrialists and philanthropists who gave endowments to establish higher education institutions in their home area, amongst other things, to create a cultured and civilised local and regional population. In other contexts, this service role to the local community stems from the obligations on higher education institutions that arise from being major recipients of local taxes. A number of trends are converging that are increasing this traditional service role. The growing awareness of the global, or supra-national, nature of many problems such as environmental degradation, poverty, and economic development, has created a number of interconnected local responses. Higher
174
education institutions, because of their multi-territoriality and inter-disciplinarity, are institutions that are strongly placed to interpret global issues on a local scale. Also, the rise of the local state and local voluntary and community groups in response to the declining influence of national structures is of relevance. Moreover, fiscal constraints at both local and national level are creating partnerships between the public, private and voluntary sectors to meet community needs. In this context, higher education institutions, their staff and students, are heavily involved in community service through volunteering, project work, mentoring, leadership and commentary. In sum, through this third role, higher education institutions are one of several factors involved in the governance of local civic society. What this role highlights is the increasing embeddedness of higher education institutions in their regions and their duty as responsible local, as well as national and international agents.This is evident in several ways. First, regional development and promotional organisations are increasingly looking towards higher education institutions to provide leadership, analysis, resources, and credibility. In this sense, higher education institutions contribute to the less tangible aspects of the development process by building social networks that link key actors in the local community and feed intelligence into these networks. The participation of a university or college can inject an element of unbiased and informed realism into such networks. This partnership principle is increasingly a prerequisite for securing certain forms of funding and for creating an effective platform for enhancing inward investment activity. Further, higher education institutions provide the region with commentary, analysis, information and access to wider networks through mechanisms such as media links and public lectures. They also provide a framework through which ideas and cultures can be shared and transmitted. In this sense, they can play an important role in opening up and internationalising regions. A second aspect of the service role of higher education institutions concerns community and voluntary action in the region. In particular, the student population represents a significant resource to the local community in terms of volunteer workers. Third, higher education institutions own a number of facilities such as libraries, sports centres, and arts and cultural venues that are often significant regional facilities offering public access. Since the funding for such facilities at many higher education institutions is discretionary and not provided for in earmarked government block grants, their economic viability often depends upon partnerships, especially financial-based ones, with regional stakeholders. Regional access to facilities at higher education institutions may be a more pressing issue in lagging regions that have a less developed educational, social and cultural infrastructure. Many regional cultural facilities are offered through students unions. They often play a central role in entertainment provision in the region by providing comedy, live-music, dance events, and late-night drinking. As such, they can increase the overall popular cultural reputation of a city or
175
region. As in the area of teaching and research it is often necessary for higher education institutions within a region to work together with external partners in developing a portfolio of facilities and services that can be tailored to regional needs. Regional funding levered in this way can widen the range of facilities available on campus to students, thereby enhancing the learning experience. At the same time, active engagement in the community can enrich the life of both students and teachers. In short, the third role is not a one way street. Conclusion- This article has discussed the ways in which higher education institutions are responding to regional needs in terms of teaching, research and community service. What are the drivers and barriers that each institution has to confront when engaging with the region? What actions can and do various stakeholders take that can either enhance or inhibit greater regional engagement? It should be apparent from the discussion that responding to regional needs is not a clear-cut process for higher education institutions. Teaching-related drivers to greater regional engagement include: historical roots that link the institution firmly to its local economic base; a desire to increase the uptake of graduates into employment within the region; an increase in postgraduate, professional development and part-time teaching to attract more revenue; recruitment of senior management on to boards of regional agencies and initiatives; opportunities for undergraduate students to study from home and avoid debts; new ladders of opportunity for students through access, franchise, compact, and other arrangements; demand from mature and non-traditional students who are rooted in the region. Concerning research, drivers include: a renewed thrust of government policy towards promoting industrial links and clusters at a regional level; the regionalisation of national technology development and transfer policy; closer links between higher education institutions and the health sector; and in the European context, funding accruing to the regions through the structural funds. However, there are also significant barriers to greater regional engagement. As regards teaching, these include historic patterns of nationally-driven subject provision and demand for courses that are not particularly congruent with the development needs of the region; academic promotion systems that do not sufficiently reward regional teaching and learning opportunities; the influence of external accreditation from professional bodies that pay little attention to regional development needs; lack of links between the formulation of regional policy initiatives by senior management and implementation by teaching staff; high start up costs of regional collaborative projects; and lack of regional seed corn funds. There are also a number of barriers associated with greater localisation and regionalisation of teaching that include anxiety about the decline in standards and a fear that enhanced skills increase rather than decrease regional labour mobility. There are a number of tasks national governments could undertake to
176
enhance the response of higher education institutions to regional needs. Firstly, Ministries of Education can map the geography of higher education, for example, which courses are taught where, what are the home origins of students, and where do graduates enter the labour market. A particular concern of this mapping task will be to identify the steps between different levels of the education system in schools, further/vocational education/community colleges, higher education, post graduate institutions in order to assess how far the regional pattern of provision assists or inhibits access and progress of students. These should aim at strengthening cooperative activities within the region and promoting partnerships and dialogue between regional education providers such as schools, further education, higher education and other training providers. Higher education institutions also can play a role in the formulation of regional action plans and programmes. In each of the main themes within a development programme there is likely to be a requirement for active institutional participation. For example, in the search for inward investment there will be room for institutional participation in overseas delegations; in regional technological development programmes there will be opportunities for higher education institutions to provide expertise to assist with product and process innovation through consultancies, student placements and management development; in skills enhancement linked to raising regional competitiveness there should be a place for targeted graduate retention and continuing professional development initiatives; in cultural development, there will be scope for joint planning of provision of non-vocational education and of opening up of higher education facilities to the general public; and in terms of regional capacity building, higher education staff and facilities can be mobilised to promote public debate. Undertaking the third role of community service seriously requires a number of components. The starting point for engagement should be a straightforward mapping of regional links in terms of teaching, research and participation in regional public affairs. A very basic task is to identify the home origin of students, what academic programmes they participate in, and the destination of graduates by occupation, industry and geographical location. With the judicious use of external data, the higher education institution should be able to establish its share of national and regional student and graduate markets, its contribution to raising levels of participation in higher education in the region and graduate skills in the regional labour market. The institution should aim to establish mechanisms that track students on a longitudinal basis, including their careers as alumni and use this information to guide the shaping of teaching programmes. On the research side, the geography of collaboration with the users and beneficiaries needs to be established. External benchmarks will be required to make sense of these data, for example, to identify regional companies and organisations absent from the list. The mapping should identify the participating departments within the institution, again to reveal possible
177
missing links. Further, the contribution of the higher education institution to regional public affairs can be mapped by identifying participation in employers organisations, politics, the media, the voluntary sector, the arts, and other educational institutions. An important distinction will need to be made between informal engagement where staff act in an individual capacity and formal institutional participation in partnership arrangements. Further, it is important to recognize the unique characteristics of each stakeholder such as organisational culture, territorial remit, and funding sources. Documenting the present linkages and publicising them within the region will be an important first step in raising the profile of the institution. Publicity within the institution will be equally important to draw the attention of all of the staff to the extent and significance of regional engagement. Such documentation is an essential prelude to a self-evaluation of the institutions desire and capacity to respond to regional needs. Ideally, this should be undertaken with the assistance of an external peer review group to gauge institutional capacity to respond to regional needs. Such exercises can lead to a thorough re-evaluation of institutional culture. They can also stimulate a shift from a loosely coupled institutional form to a more managerial one. Regional offices and regional animators play a central role in such institutional reconfiguring. This challenge has been neatly captured by Duke: For universities, the learning region may be the best-kept secret of the dying days of this century. In practical terms this implies blending and combining competition in the new enterprise environment with collaboration; fostering and supporting ``boundary spanners who can work across the borders of the university in effective discourse with other organisations and their different cultures; fostering cultural change to enable universities to speak and work with partners from many traditions and persuasions as more learning organisations emerge and together enrich their various overlapping learning zones or regions. (Duke, 1998, p. 5).
====================== References1. Duke, C. (1998) Lifelong Learning: Implications for the University of the 21st Century. Paper presented at the Fourteenth General Conference of IMHE member institutions. Gibsons, M.(1994) The New Production of Knowledge: the dynamics of science and research in contemporary societies (London, Sage). Prakesh, Ved. (2011). Concerns about autonomy and Academic Freedom in Higher education Institutions, Economic and Political Weekly, Vol. XLVI, No. 16, April 16, 2011. UNESCO (2008). EFA Global Monitoring Report, www.unesco.org w w w . a i c t e - i n d i a . o r g / . . . / RUSA%20Ve rsion%2018%20Narrative%207th%206. www.indiaeducationreview.com/.../higher-education-india-glanc
2. 3.
4. 5. 6.
178
7. 8. 9.
www.pl anningcommission.nic .in/aboutus/committe e/wrkgrp12/.../ wg_hiedu.pdf www.un.org/millenniumgoals/pdf/MDG%20Report%202012.pdf www.unmillenniumproject.org/.../MainReportComplete-lowres.pdf


Chief Editor
The Comprehensive Study on the Placement Scenario of the Management Education Institute: A Case study in Guwahati City of Assam
* Safiqur Rahman, ** Binita Devi ***Tarana Rafique ****Rani Talukdar
========================================================== Abstract- Education is the process of receiving or giving systematic instruction especially at a school or university level. Every society gives importance to Education, it is panacea for all evils. Education makes the person knowledgeable and enhances his skills. It thus leads the person towards progress. It is responsible for creating better human beings and a better world. The objective of Education is to help on the establishment of such a society in which the individuals are able to develop their potential to do well. ========================================================== Introduction: Education has the responsibility to provide opportunities to inculcate basic life skills. These life skills may be foundational skills in communication, computation, social skills and manual skills so that the students are enable to get job in their desired specific field. Research reveals that there is a strong positive co-relationship between education and occupational attainment. The more education an individual receives, the more likely he is to works outside the home, to enjoy his work and to advance on the job. However, it has been observed that the number of educated unemployed is increasing day by day. The academicians commonly believes that one of the important causes of educated unemployment is wrong education system. Specifically, present system of non technical education has failed to generate efficient work force for variety of jobs in todays modern world. But, fortunately, the scenario has changed in the recent times. Among the various branches, of study within the purview of non technical education, Management education is a special branch, which has diversified employment opportunities at the present age of ===========================
* Assistant professor, Department of Geography Guwahati College, Guwahati, Assam. ** Lecturer, Department of Geography, Guwahati College, Guwahati, Assam *** Lecturer, Department of Commerce (Management),Guwahati College, Guwahati, Assam. **** Lecturer, Department of Mathematics, Guwahati College, Guwahati, Assam.
180
economic development in India both in private and in public sector as well. Objectives: 1) To get an account of the Management Education Institutions of Guwahati City. 2) To find out the placement record of the selected institutions. 3) To analyse the challenges of placement in Guwahati city. Methodology- In preparing this paper, we have visited the management institutions of the Guwahati city by taking random samples and collected data from the primary source regarding placement. Moreover, various secondary sources of data like Internet, newspaper, Journals etc have been used to prepare this paper. Chart has been used to exhibit the various data. Management Education- Management is an essential part of any group activity. It is a primary force within the group or organisation which tends to lead it towards the group goal. Management is required to plan, organise, coordinate and control the affairs of the organisation. It brings the human and material resources together and motivates people for the achievement of the organisation. Without management, resources of production remain resources, merely and never become production. Management is a universal process in all organised, social and economic activities. Whenever there is human activity, there is management. In our real life, we see that every activity we undertake involves an element that ensure co-ordination and cohesiveness to the activity, without which our acts would be unproductive and ineffective. Like the domain of ancient philosophers all mankind is the managements province. So, Management Education has utmost necessity in real life world. Careers in management are available in the field of (i) Personnel Management (ii) Production Management (iii) Financial Management (iv) Marketing Management (v) Materials Management (vi) Other areas of Management such as Hotel Management, Hospital Management, Tourism Management , Event Management and Office Management. Management Education in Assam- Management education has now been held inevitable for acquiring employment either in public or private sector undertakings. With the pace of fast changing world economy, Management Education has become popular in Assam too. In recent years, a few numbers of educational institutions are providing management education in Assam viz. Assam Institute of Management, North Eastern Regional Institute of Management and Asian Institute of Management and Technology, Royal Groups of Institutes, Girijananda Institute of Management and Technology, Gauhati University, MBA Department, Guwahati Commerce College, Indian Institute of Finance and Management, Dibrugarh University etc. However, most of the Management Education Institutes are situated in Guwahati city. The Study Area (Guwahati city)- Guwahati is a major city in eastern India, often considered as the gateway to the North-East Region (NER) of the country
181
and in the largest city within the region. Guwahati city located in 260 1045 N latitude and 910 450 E longitude of Kamrup District, Assam, India, is said to be the legendary Pragjyotishpur, the city of Eastern light. Presently, Guwahati covers an area of 216.79 KM (Corporation area), 313 KM (including rivers) and has population of 5, 84, 342 (male 3, 27, 727 and female 2, 56, 617). Now, Guwahati is a major commercial and educational centre of eastern India. The Management Institutions of the Guwahati City- A large number of Management Institutes have grown up in Guwahati city contributing towards management education. Management education has been significant in the North East region because of the wider scope for employment, it creates efficient and effective managers, corporate leaders and executives and it helps in building greater confidence and ability to face challenges. The Gauhati University, Guwahati Commerce College, North Eastern Regional Institute of Management (NERIM), Indian Institute for Finance and Management, Asian Institute of Management and Technology, Assam Institute of Management, Xavier Institute of Management and Information Technology, Hindustan College, Girijananda Institute for Management and Technology, Royal Group of Institutions are providing management education in the city. Various courses are imparted by these renowned institutions Viz, BBA, MBA,PGDM, PGDBM, EMBA etc. To analyse the placement Scenario of these institutions, a case study has been conducted on four management Institutes of the city. This paper gives an account of the four selected institute, placement rate, opportunities and the scenario of engagement of management students in Guwahati city. The selected Institutes for case study(A) The Assam Institute of management- It was incorporated as an autonomous society of the government of Assam in 1988. Originally the Institute was called the Assam Institute of management and Accounting (AIMA). The name was shortened to Assam Institute of Management (AIM) in 1993 to reflect truly its mission and activities. Initially, the institute was under the public enterprises department of the government of Assam. In 1996 it was brought under the Planning and Development (P&D) Department of the state. Since its initiation, the Government of Assam has nurtured the institute and has taken pride of its attainment. In the beginning the institute was conducting professional courses, management programmes and short term courses. In 1994, the institute obtained approval of the All India Council for Technical Education (AICTE) to start two year full time and three year part-time post graduate Diploma programmes in Business management. However, after, 2006 the institute has discontinued the part-time PGDBM programme. (B) North Eastern Regional Institute of Management- North Eastern Regional Institute of Management (NERIM) is a post graduate college established by the NERIM Educational Society in the year 1992. The
182
department of Technical Education, Government of Assam, initially extended the active support for the establishment of this institute with a view to promote management causes like BBA, MBA, etc in the North Eastern region of the country. NERIM is affiliated to Dibrugarh University. The All India council of Technical Education (AICTE) and the Bar council of India (BCI) have granted their approval to the courses conducted at NERIM. (C) Asian Institute of Management and Technology- Asian Institute of Management and Technology is the brain child of the Gyanjyoti Foundation, a conglomeration of corporate houses and eminent personalities who are determined to bring about some complete changes in the education scenario of the North East Region. The institute was established in the year 2008 under the Gyanjyoti. Gyanjyoti foundation is ISO 9001: 2008 certified organisation is a partner Institution of Indira Gandhi Technological and Medical Science University, Arunachal Pradesh, under National Community College for skill development. The institute is providing courses like BBA, MBA etc. (D) Indian Institute for Finance and Management- The Indian Institute for Finance and Management, a premier institution in commerce and management in North East India. This institute is established by the Sagar Foundation Society (SFS). The institute has made significant contributions in its inception and has earned a name for its high academic standard. The institute was established in 2011 and it is offering management programmes like BBA, PGDBM, MBA, EMBA etc. Observation and findings- The word Placement means the act of placing the applicants in suitable jobs. However, the right persons should be placed in right job according to ones capability and satisfaction on the part of the employees is also necessary. It has been observed that training and placement cell is an integral part of all the institution surveyed so far. The base years taken for the analysis are 2009 2011 and 2010-2012. The findings are as follows: (A) The Assam Institute of Management- In both the years Seventy (70) participants have joined the PGDBM Programme in the institute. Out of 70 participants, 68 have completed the programme in 2009-2012 and 62 have completed the programme in 2010-2012. A wide majority of the graduates of the institutions were placed in some of the leading corporate organisation of the country. The major recruiters of 2009-2011. Batch were State Bank of India, United bank of India, SBI life Insurance, ICICI Bank, HDFC Bank, AXIS Bank, CRISIL, Gati Ltd. Berger Paints and Star Cement among others. And the major recruiters of 2010 2012 Batch were ITC Ltd, Nestle India Ltd, SBI General Insurance Co. Ltd. etc. (B) The North Eastern Regional Institute of Management (NERIM)- For admission to the Management Courses NERIM conducted NERIM Entrance Test (NET) or CAT/MAT Score followed by GD&PI. In 2011-2012, NERIM
183
has the record of 100% placement of its students in various corporate organisation like IDBI Bank, LIC, ICICI Prudential, HCL, Adidas, Samsung Electronics, TATA, Bajaj Allianze, LG, Kotak, SBI Life Insurance, Hindustan Unilever Limited, Asian Paints, Pepsi, Erricson Coca-Cola, Dabur, Surya Gold Cement, AVIVA, Canon, HDFC Bank etc. (C) The Asian Institute of Management and Technology- The Asian Institute of Management and Technology has the record of 95% placement as informed by the Administrative officer of the Institute. An indicative list of the placement in 2010 offered to the students is presented below in summarized form
Organisation Name ICICI Bank SBI Life Insurance ABC Ltd. Vidyut Metallic (Supermax) MARICO LTD Nestle India International Development Enterprises India (IDE-1) Amara Raja Batteries Ltd (AMARON) Whirlpool of India Ltd. Assam Company Ltd UB Group HDFC Bank No. of Candidates Selected 12 1 1 4 1 5 1 3 1 1 1 6
The average salary of the passed out batch has also increased over the years and in 2010 the highest CTC earned by AIM graduate is around Rs. 3.5 Lac. P.a. . From 2009 onwards, various corporate organisations recruit students from the institute. Some of the recruiters are Bharati Airtel, ITC Ltd., Aircel, Hyundai, USHA, Nerolac Paints, HDFC, ICICI Bank, L & T Finance, Infosys, Reliance, REBI, Wipro, Dulux, Horlicks, Prodigy, Oxfam, T.I.M.E., ACSIT Solutions, UB Group, Dabur, Dalmia cement, Kurlon News Live, NIIT, Cadila Pharma, Jaquar, TCS, Sony, Godrej& Boyce,ING Vysya, Assam Air product , Data pro, cipla etc. D) Indian Institute For Finance & Management- From 2010 onwards the placement rate of the institute is increasing. In every batch it has the intake students of 60 (sixty). Some of the recruiters of the students of this organisation are Axis Bank, ICICI, Mahesh Bajaj, Amrit (food), Hayat Hospital Ltd., ICA (Panbazar), Various BPO, Nokia, Reebok etc. Analysis- The Management Students of the Guwahati city is recruited by the both government and private organisation as well. The following list gives a picture of the placement scenario of the Guwahti City, where four management Institutes have been taken as sample .
184
Name of the Institutes Recruiters A) Assam Institute of SBI, UBI, SBI Life Management Insurance, ICICI Bank, HDFC, Axis, CRISIL, Gati Ltd, Berger paints, ICI Ltd., Nestle B) The North Eastern IDBI Bank, LIC, ICICI, Regional Institute of ICICI Prudential, HCL, Management (NERIM) Adidas, Samsung Electronics, TATA, BAJA Allianze, LG, Kotak, SBI Life Insurance, Hindustan Unilever Limited, Asian Paints, Pepsi, Ericsson, Coca-Cola, Aviva, CANON, HDFC Bank etc. C) The Asian Institute of Bharati Airtel, ITC Ltd, Management & Aircel, Hyundai, USHA, Technology Nerolac Paints, HDFC, ICICI Bank, Horlicks , Wipro, Dulux, Dalmia Cement, Sony, Cadila Pharma, ING Vysya, Cipla etc. D) Indian Institution for Axis Bank, ICICI, Mahesh Finance & Bajaj, Hayat Hospitals, Management Nokia, Reebok etc.
Remarks
100% placement
95% placement
It has been observed that numbers of recruiters are increasing day by day. However, the Management Institutes of the Guwahati city is facing lots of challenges regarding the placement of the students. Some of them are (i) An acute demand supply mismatch have been observed in Guwahti city regarding management Institutions. A large numbers of Institution have grown up of different capacities in the city, whereas member of recruiters are less, lead to gloomy placement Scenario in the city. (ii) The present global Economic recession has affected the placement scenario of the management institute as the corporate organization have curtailed the number of employees in their respective organisations. Lack of MNCs, organizations and projects in North East India have affected the placement scenario of the management Institute. Conclusion- Management education have become quite popular in the North eastern part of India and in Guwahati city as well. And a large number of management students of Guwahati city have been placed in various Government and private organization across the globe. But all organization want good managers these days, so improvement and addition in skill and quality of
185
management students will certainly lead to better placement. It has been expected that with globalization of the Indian economy,more number of MNCs are entering the city will increase the rate of employment of the management students. The upcoming Look East Policy will make North East India a business and Commercial Hub and Guwahati city, the gateway of North east India will surely be benefitted.. So, employment prospects are likely to be high in near future. Importance of management education is increasing day by day. So, it is high time for the Institutions as well the students to improve their quality for recruitment in various organization as specific knowledge and skill dominating the present day job market all over the world.
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Mathur S.S;(2011) Teacher and Secondary Education, Shri Vinod pustak Mandir. Mahanta N.N, (2012). Philosophical and Sociological Dimensions Of Education, Mani Manik Prakash, Guwahati. Prospectus, (2013). Assam Institute of management, Guwahati. Prospectus, (2013).Asian Institute of management & Technology. Prospectus, (2013). North Eastern Regional Institute of Management. Prospectus,(2013). Indian Institute for Finance and Management. Sarkar, Sharma, Gupta, (2012). Principles of Management, Kalyani Publishers. www.google.com.
Role of Education in Preventing Sk in Cancer

* Megha Das **Ratnesh Das ***Kamlesh Das
========================================================== Abstract- Skin cancer is the most commonly diagnosed cancer in populations of predominantly Caucasian origins. As the main cause of skin cancer is excessive sun exposure among a sun-sensitive population, most skin cancers are theoretically avoidable, and prevention is an important topic for public health purposes. The development of skin cancer may be limited by effective primary prevention campaigns, causing people to protect themselves from the sun as well as harmful electromagnetic radiations and chemicals. In order to be effective, the right people need to become aware of the risks and benefits; they also need to be convinced that they can take effective protective measures. Secondary skin cancer prevention aims to avoid skin cancer morbidity and mortality and is, therefore, mainly aimed at early detection of cutaneous melanomas. This paper highlights various aspects of skin cancer and role of education for preventing the society from skin cancer. Keywords- Cutaneous Melanomas, Environment, Electromagnetic radiations, Education. ========================================================== Introduction- Cancer is a disease caused due to immortality of the cells. The term cancer is not indicative of one disease but refers to more than hundred forms of diseases having certain key commonalities. In healthy cells, cell multiplication is controlled by proto-oncogene and tumor suppressor proteins. During the cancerous state the proto-oncogene change to oncogene and decrease the amount of tumor suppressor proteins in the cell ,thus causing uncontrolled multiplication. It has been well established that cells which dont adhere to normal regulation of multiplication leads to development of carcinoma. Hence, all cancer cells are capable of becoming malignant and possess the ability to transmit to other areas of the body. As a result cancer is a complex multifactorial disease in which a group of cells display uncontrolled and unwanted growth. In spite of good advancements for diagnosis and treatment, cancer is ===========================
* ** *** Department of Education, Dr.Harisingh Gour University, Sagar (M.P.) Department of Chemistry, Dr.Harisingh Gour University, Sagar (M.P.) Department of Botany , Government P.G.College, Bina (M.P.)
187
still a big threat to our society. This is the second most common disease after cardiovascular disorders for maximum deaths in the world. It accounts for about 23 and 7% deaths in USA and India, respectively. The worlds population is expected to be 7.5 billion by 2020 and approximations predict that about 15.0 million new cancer cases will be diagnosed; with deaths of about 12.0 million cancer patients. The prevalence of cancer in India is estimated to be around 2.5 million, with about 8, 00,000 new cases and 5,50,000 deaths per annum.Cancer is caused by both external factor (tobacco, infectious viruses, chemical pollutants and radiations) and internal factors (mutations, hormonal imbalances etc.While cancer can develop in many parts of the body, the most common form is skin cancer, especially since the skin is considered the largest organ in the body and it is the organ most exposed to the harsh environment. Skin cancers are named for the type of cells that become malignant (cancer). The three most common types are: Melanoma: Melanoma begins in melanocytes (pigment cells). Most melanocytes are in the skin. Melanoma can occur on any skin surface. In men, its often found on the skin on the head, on the neck, or between the shoulders and the hips. In women, its often found on the skin on the lower legs or between the shoulders and the hips. Melanoma is rare in people with dark skin. When it does develop in people with dark skin, its usually found under the fingernails, under the toenails, on the palms of the hands, or on the soles of the feet. Basal cell carcinoma: Basal cell skin cancer begins in the basal cell layer of the skin. It usually occurs in places that have been in the sun. For example, the face is the most common place to find basal cell skin cancer. In people with fair skin, basal cell skin cancer is the most common type of skin cancer. Squamous cell carcinoma: Squamous cell skin cancer begins in squamous cells. In people with dark skin, squamous cell skin cancer is the most common type of skin cancer, and its usually found in places that are not in the sun, such as the legs or feet. However, in people with fair skin, squamous cell skin cancer usually occurs on parts of the skin that have been in the sun, such as the head, face, ears, and neck. Unlike moles, skin cancer can invade the normal tissue nearby. Also, skin cancer can spread throughout the body. Melanoma is more likely than other skin cancers to spread to other parts of the body. Squamous cell skin cancer sometimes spreads to other parts of the body, but basal cell skin cancer rarely does. When skin cancer cells do spread, they break away from the original growth and enter blood vessels or lymph vessels. The cancer cells may be found in nearby lymph nodes. The cancer cells can also spread to other tissues and attach there to form new tumors that may damage those
188
tissues. The spread of cancer is called metastasis. Environmental Risk Factors Associated With Skin Cancer- World wide skin cancer epidemic has many causative factors including age, family history, genomic changes etc. But mainly it is caused by environmental factors among which pollutants, pesticides and radiations are the major contributors (a) Chemicals- Few people realize that many of the everyday things we are exposed to may be chemicals that cause cancer. Throughout our lives we are exposed to a wide variety of chemicals. They are in cleaning products, in pesticides used to grow the produce we purchase for our families, medications and even in things we consider innocuous such as candles. Smoking- Smoking is one of the most common chemicals that cause skin cancer. However, a common misconception is that it only causes lung cancer. Research has shown that it can actually cause many more cancers than this. Leukoplakia and erythroplakia are oral precancerous lesions. Smoking is one of the main risk factors for these conditions. In some cases, these develop into skin cancer inside the mouth. According to a study published in Nature Reviews Immunology in 2002, smoking can also have more damaging effects. Researchers in New Mexico found that nicotine, one of the main compounds found in cigarette smoke, suppresses the immune system. This leaves the body vulnerable to cancer and other diseases. Alcohol- A study published in Cancer Epidemiology, Biomarkers & Prevention, explored the link between alcohol use and basal cell carcinoma. The researchers found a definite association. However, they did note that alcohol from beer did not affect basal cell carcinoma risk. There was an inverse relationship between women who drank red wine and cancer risk; the same was not true of male red wine drinkers. Alcohol use is also a risk factor for a condition called actinic cheilitis. This precancerous lip condition develops into squamous cell carcinoma in six to ten percent of cases. Alcohol use should be limited to help reduce your risk of cancer. Coal Tar Product- Coal, tar and pitch are all polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs). According to the Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry, a part of the United States Department of Health and Human Services, some people exposed to PAHs later developed cancer. In laboratory studies, some PAHs caused stomach, lung and skin cancer. To protect against these chemicals that cause cancer, care should be taken to limit exposure. If working in an industry that exposes you to these chemicals, wear protective equipment whenever possible. The Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) have set limits to limit exposure. Soot- Soot also contains PAHs. It has been linked to lung cancer. While some soot exposure is unavoidable, it should be avoided whenever possible. The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) has worked to protect
189
the public with strict rules. However, there are some companies who try to get around the rules. Ideally, you want to live in an area that does not have this type of pollution in the air. Creosote- Creosote can refer to more than one thing. The most commonly used is coal tar creosote, a wood preservative. It can also refer to the carbon buildup in chimneys or the creosote bush, sometimes called chaparral. Like coal tar, creosote contains PAHs. According to EPA data, there is evidence that creosote is carcinogenic. When purchasing wood, consider untreated varieties. If you must purchase treated, look for a safer alternative. To prevent exposure when cleaning the chimney, wear a mask and gloves. You can also pay a professional to do the job! Arsenic- Arsenic is a naturally occurring component of the earths crust and is found in rock, soil, plants, water and in the air. It can be dispersed and transported by volcanic eruptions, soil and rock erosion and through water via rivers and underground streams. Our modern world increases the levels of inorganic arsenic (the most toxic) in our environment by industries such as glass manufacturing, timber preservation, metal smelting, burning fossil fuels, mining and in pesticides, such as rat poison and weed killers. Arsenic in our water supply is closely regulated to ensure toxic levels are kept to a minimum, however in some areas of the world such as South America and Bangladesh, levels can be much higher. In high doses, it can have devastating effect on the human body. According to Cancer Research UK, it can increase your risk of non-melanoma skin cancer. Long term exposure to arsenic has also been linked to liver cancer. Exposure should be limited as much as possible and protective gear should be used if your work requires exposure to this or other chemicals that cause cancer. Paraffin Wax- Some of the candles you have in your home may be made of paraffin wax. Recent research has found that paraffin wax candles give off toxic fumes when they are burned. These fumes have been linked to cancer. The researchers did note that occasional candle usage was not something to be concerned about. However, those that use candles regularly should use caution. When purchasing candles, select ones made of beeswax and soy. The researchers stated that these did not give off toxic fumes like paraffin wax did. Also, if you regularly use candles, do so only in a well ventilated room to minimize the fumes you are exposed to. Motor Oil Motor Oil- Mineral-based motor oils are made from petroleum. When used as designed to help lubricate the engine of your vehicle, it can expose you to potential carcinogens. The used oil contains PAHs, additives, metals from the motor parts and small amounts of automobile fluids including gasoline and antifreeze. In animal research studies, long-term exposure to used oils caused skin cancer (8). Exposure can occur in one of three
190
ways, while changing the oil in your vehicle, breathing the chemicals in through exhaust fumes or when it has contaminated soil or water. When changing the oil in your car, you should be careful to avoid getting it on your hands. If it does touch your skin, wash it immediately. Used oil should be disposed of properly to prevent soil or water contamination. (B) Ionising Radiations- Radiations penetrate biological matter and alter the cells and its constituents by causing chemical, molecular and physical damage resulting in cell death or genetic mutation. Since ionizing radiations are sufficiently high-energy radiations they disrupt atoms and constitute one of the most dangerous type of radiation for all living organisms. Commonly known ionizing radiations present in environment are: Natural resources like sun (Ultraviolet radiations) Industrial sources like nuclear explosion and power station accidents Medical sources- X-ray Domestic sources like cathode ray tubes(computers and TVs),some smoke alarms, and fluorescent dials Manmade nuclear fission products Frequent exposure to X-ray and gamma rays are significant and causative environmental factors for skin cancer. Radiation therapy done for diseases like tuberculosis has also been proven to cause skin cancer. (C) Electromagnetism-Electromagnetic fields (EMFs) are long waves forms of non-ionizing radiations. Natural resources like sun and earths magnetic field and man made resources like high-voltage power lines, power transmission stations, electrical appliances such as computers,hairdryers,TVsets and microwave ovens emit EMFs.EMFs interfere with normal production of melatonin which has been found significant in development of skin cancer. Researchers at Battell Pacific Northwest Laboratory in Richland,Washington,have shown that EMFs suppress the levels of hormone melatonin which is produced by pineal gland in the central part of the brain and regulates the functioning of the immune system. Melatonin is also able to suppress ultraviolet (UV)induced damage to skin cells and shows strong antioxidant activity in UV exposed cells. Low levels of melatonin have been linked to skin cancer,breast cancer, as well as prostrate cancer.Thus EMFs are hypothesized to cause skin cancer by alteing melatonin levels. Need of Education for Preventing Society from Skin Cancer -Skin care is one of the most common type of cancer seen in the world today. Surprising it is mainly caused due to negligence in our daily life activities such as exposure in sun light for a long time, use of chemicals which act as carcinogen for our body or improper handling of devices generating electromagnetic raditions etc.All these evidences suggests the need of educating people for preventing them from dangers of skin cancer. Skin is
191
largely preventable, and if caught early, its usually curable. Therefore it is necessary to educate people about various ways for skin cancer prevention. There is need to start awareness campaign like The American Cancer Society which promotes the slogan Slip! Slop! Slap! and Wrap which is a catch phrase that reminds people of the 4 key ways they can protect themselves from UV radiation: Slip on a shirt, Slop on sunscreen, Slap on a hat, and Wrap on sunglasses to protect the eyes and sensitive skin around them from ultraviolet light. Apart from this it is needed to educate people about the early symptoms and pro-diagnosis of skin lesions for early detection and cure. Not only this, other agents which may be responsible for causing skin cancer may be highlighted through media and educational activities to make people aware of this disease. Interventions in primary schools may promote sun protective behaviors among children in kindergarten through 8th grade. These interventions would include at least one of the following activities: 1. provision of information to children (through instruction, small media, or both); 2. activities to influence childrens behavior (e.g., modeling, demonstration, or role playing); 3. activities to change the knowledge, attitudes, or behavior of caregivers (e.g., teachers or parents); and 4. Environmental and policy approaches (e.g., providing sunscreen, increasing availability of shade, or scheduling outdoor activities to avoid hours of peak sunlight). Conclusion- Skin cancer forms a serious health issue creating a significant health burden in almost every country of the world. There are various major and minor risk factors that induce skin carcinoma. Various studies have provided sufficient and convincing evidence to demonstrate that environmental pollutants and excessive sunlight are the major causal factors. The rate of mounting skin cancer is directly proportional to the rate of increasing pollution in the environment and depletion of ozone layer. However skin cancer is curable if diagnosed earlier also it could be controlled by minimizing environmental pollution and taking precautions in daily life activities. For that there arises a need for educating about skin cancer, its causative agents, diagnosis, treatment etc, through awareness campaigns at school levels, and community levels. Thus education would become a boon for several lives and prevent them from ill effects of skin cancer.
192
====================== References1. Abegunde D, Mathers C, Adam T, Ortegon M, Strong K (2007) The burden and costs of chronic diseases in lowincome and middle-income countries. The Lancet 370,1929-38. Alabaster O (1972) Colorectal Cancer: Epidemiology risks and prevention. JP Lippincott, Philadelphia. Ali I, Rahis-ud-din, Saleem k, Aboul-Enein HY, Rather MA (2011) Social Aspects of Cancer Genesis. Cancer Therapy 8, 6-14. Anand P, Ajaikumar BK, Sundaram C, Kuzhuvelil BH, Sheeja TT, Oiki SL, Sung B, Bharat BA (2008) Cancer is a Preventable Disease that Requires Major Lifestyle Changes. Pharm Res 25, 2097-2116. Baan R, Straif K, Grosse Y (2007) Carcinogenicity of alcoholic beverages. Lancet Oncol 8, 292-3. Banker DD (1955) J Post Grad Med 1, 108. (Cited in Nagrath SP, Hazra DK, Lahiri B, Kishore B, Kumar R (1970) Primary carcinoma of the lung: Clinicopathological study of 35 cases. Indian J Chest Dis 12, 15-24. Belpomme D, Irigaray P, Hardell L, Clapp R, Montagnier L, Epstein S, Sasco AJ (2007) The multitude and diversity of environmental carcinogens. Environ Res 105, 414-429. Carmaeia B (1993) Molecular mechanisms in cancer induction and Prevention. Environmental Health perspectives supplements 101, 237-245. Doll R, Peto R (1981) The causes of cancer: quantitative estimates of avoidable risks of Cancer in the United States today. J Natl Cancer Inst 66, 1191-308. Kotnis A, Sarin R, Mulherkar R (2005) Genotype, phenotype and cancer: Role of low penetrance genes and environment in tumor susceptibility. J Biosci 30, 93-102. Parkin DM, Pisani P, Ferlay J (1999) Global Cancer Statistics.C A Cancer J Clin 49, 33-64. Parkin DM, Bray F, Ferlay J, Pisani P (2005) Global cancer statistics 2002. CA Cancer J Clin 55, 74-108. Parkin DM, Muir CS, Whelan SL, Gao YT, Ferlay J, Powell J (1992) Cancer Incidence in Five Continents Vol. VI.
2. 3. 4.
5. 6.
7.
8. 9. 10.
11. 12. 13.
Status of Public Libraries in Karnal District

* Sandhya Rani
========================================================== Abstract- Attempts to examine the statues of public libraries in Karnal in terms of physical facilities, manpower, collection development, collection organization, finance, automation, services offered, etc. Based on the result of the survey and major findings. This paper tries to assess the current situation of Public Libraries in Karnal. ========================================================== Introduction- According to Dr. S.R. Ranganathan, Any library established or maintained by a local library authority, including travelling libraries and services, the Public Library is a place for all community members irrespective of age, sex, religion, language, status and education supported by a mandate of law. The year 1972 is play an important role in the history of Public Library because Raja Rammohun Roy Library Foundation came into existence. Public Libraries in Karnal- Karnal was of the Districts from seven Districts of Haryana on 1 November, 1966 when Haryana became an independent state from composite Punjab and known as a city of DaanveerKarna. The District is famous all over the world for its production of Rice, Wheat and milk there are many research institutes like NDRI, CSSRI, Wheat Research Directorate, Sugarcane Breeding Institute, National Bureau of Animal Genetics Resources etc. There are four Public Libraries in Karnal and One Municipal Public Library in Karnal and Nelokheri also. In spite of these Public Libraries, there is a Library in Karnal Jail. This library is very useful for the prisoners of Jail. It is also mentioned here that the municipal public library was situated in Karnal when the Haryana and Punjab was joint. Objectives- This study has been conducted to assess the current situation of the public libraries in Karnal. Here, we have tried to point out the problem of different aspects of these libraries. The specific objectives of the present study were to know the following aspects of the functioning of the libraries:1. Collection development policy and practice 2. Availability of staff members in the library. 3. Annual budget 4. Various library services being provided. ===========================
* Research Scholar (M.Phil), Department of Library & Information Science, K.U.Kurukshetra.
194
5. Year of Established. 6. Status of computerization in libraries. 7. Library membership fee. Scope- This study includes the Municipal Libraries of Karnal and District Public Library. There are four Public Libraries and two Municipal Libraries in Karnal District. Methodology-This research paper was designed to know the status of Public Libraries in Karnal District. There are four Public Library and one Municipal Library in Karnal city and one Municipal Library in Nelokheri (Sub. Division of Karnal). It was decided to study these Public Libraries situated at Karnal to use questionnaire for data collection. The questionnaire was designed making self-use of various sources mentioned under literature review and practical experience of the authors. The questionnaire was put up to the authority of these public libraries personally and support collected. Table No. 1, Library Collection
Library Collection Books Reference Collection Newspapers Maps/Atlas Magazine Microfilm CD-Rom Database Audio-Visual Materials Back Volumes DLK 34,000 --PPLK 60,000 1500 PCTLK 22,500 --PPK 10,000 ---GMLK 10,500 --VRMLN 100 ---
10 --10 -----
14 --35 -----
10 --26 -----
10 ---7 -------
8 ---------
-----------
---
20
---
----
---
---
---
---
---
---
----
DLK=District Library, Karnal; PPLK=Partap Public Library, Karnal; PCTLK=Purshtuam Charitable Trust Library, Karnal; PPK=Pass Pusthaklya, Karnal; GMLK=Gandhi Municipal Library, Karnal; VRMLN=Veer Raghuvinder Mahajan Library, Nilokheri. The affluence of a library can be accessed by its collection. Library collection is a sum of the total of library materials that make up the holding of a particulars library. Table-1 shows that Partap Public Library has largest collection of text books i.e. 60000 followed by District Library with 34000 books, Purshtuam Charitable Trust Library with 22500 books, Ghandhi Municipal Library with 10500 books and Pass Pusthaklya with 10000 books. Veer Raghuvinder Mahajan Library has the smallest collection of 100 books. It is also observed from above table that only Partap Public Library has the reference collection and audio-visual materials. Regarding newspapers and
195
magazines Pratap Public Library has the maximum collection with compare to others. Table 2, Library Staff
Posts Sr. Librarian Jr. Librarian Asstt. Librarian Librarian Library Attendant Library Cleaner Restorer Peon Sweeper Chowkidar 01# DLK 01 PPLK 01 PCTLK --PPK 01* GMLK ---VRMLN ---
01*
01
---
---
---
---
---
----
---
---
---
---
-----
01 ---
01 ---
-----
-----
01** ---
---
---
---
---
---
---
01 01
--01 01 01
---------
--01 -----
----------
---------
Table-2 shows that Partap Public Library has enough library staff and District Library is also follow this. But there is no Librarian in all four libraries. The meaning of the above stars is as:- *means that post sanctioned but not filled. # means that this post is Sweeper-cum-chowkidar. ** A.S.I works on the post of librarian. Veer Raghuvinder MahajanLibray have no staff and this library were handed over to the Senior Citizen of Nilokheri by the Nagar Palika, Nilokheri. Table 3, Annual Budgets
DLK Rs. 50,000/PPLK Rs. 1,00,000/PCTLK Rs. 35,000/PPK Rs.4,00,000/GMLK Rs.1,00,000/VRMLN No Budget
It is mentioned here that all public libraries have their budget in spite of Pass Pusthaklya. This library is run by the donation of social workers and S.P. Karnal. Table 4 Circulation System
Computerized Register Reservation of Books Open during lunch time DLK No Yes No PPLK Yes Yes Yes PCTLK No Yes No PPK No Yes No GMLK No No No VRMLN No Yes No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
196
Table-4 shows that out of 6 public libraries only four library have circulation system. It is observed that Ghandhi Municipal Library is closed from a long time & Vir Raghuvinder Mahajan Library is handed over to the Senior Citizen of Nilokheri so these library has no circulation system. Table 5 Library Access
Open Access Close Access DLK Yes --PPLK Yes --PCTLK Yes --PPK Yes --GMLK --Yes VRMLN --Yes
Table-5 shows that out of 6 public libraries only four library have open Access system and Ghandhi Municipal Library & Vir Raghuvinder Mahajan Library were followed close access system. Table 6 Catalogue Code
Code followed ACCR-II CCC No information DLK Yes ----PPLK Yes ----PCTLK ----Yes PPK ----Yes GMLK ----Yes VRMLN ----Yes
Table-6 shows that two library have followed catalogue code and four libraries have no information about catalogue code. Table 7 Scheme for classification
Scheme DDC CC UDC No scheme DLK Yes ------PPLK Yes ------PCTLK ------Yes PPK ------Yes GMLK ------Yes Yes VRMLN -----
Table-7 shows that two libraries have catalogue and other four libraries have no information about Catalogue Code. Table 8 Year of established/now status of Building
Year/ Status Year Own Building Rent Building DLK 1984 Yes --PPLK 1968 Yes --PCTLK 1982 Yes --PPK 1965 Yes --GMLK 1981 Yes --VRMLN 1993 Yes ---
197
Table-8 shows, all public library has their own building and this shows that the oldest public library is Ghandhi Municipal Library, Karnal. Table 9, Automation
Status of Automation Fully Automated Partially Automated Not Response DLK --Yes --PPLK Yes ----PCTLK ----Yes PPK ----Yes GMLK ----Yes VRMLN ----Yes
Table-9 shows that only Partap Public Library, Karnal is fully automated and District Library, Karnal is partially automated and other libraries have no response about the area of automation. Table 10 USE OF LIBRARY SOFTWARE
Use of Library Software In-house build Readymade No Response DLK --Yes --PPLK --Yes --PCTLK ----Yes PPK -----Yes GMLK ----Yes VRMLN ----Yes
Table-10 shows that only Partap Public Library, Karnal & District Library, Karnal are used the library software and remaining libraries do not use any software. Automation Facilities- None of the public libraries have networking facilities, internet facilities to the users, online facility, CD-ROM search facility and are not the member of any library Networks Table 11- Library Membership fee.
Rs. Annually fee DLK No fee PPLK 60/PCTLK 50/PPK 50/GMLK --VRMLN No fee
Table-11 shows that District Library, Karnal has no annual fee but get a security from the users. Veer Raghuvinder Mahajan Library, Nilokheri is oftenly closed so there is no membership fee and all other public libraries take a minor annual fee from the user + security charges extra.
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. VenkaappaiahVelaga & Madhusudhan M.(2006). Public Library Legislation in the New Millennium, New Delhi: Book, P- 39. www.karnal.govt.in/location.asp Deswal, Arpana R(2010). Status of Public Libraries in Haryana: An Analytical Study. ILA Bulletin; 46(1-2): P-17-22.; Yadav K.C, Haryana: Itihaas&Sanskriti. Manohar; New Delhi, 1982, P- 342-343.
Encouragement of Physical Education and Physical Fitness in Modern Society

*Hasan Mehdi **Lilly Pushpam Isaac
========================================================== Abstract- Today, preparing individuals for meaningful. Self-directed existence is viewed as a primary focus of education. When properly taught, physical education, with its emphasis on building a physically, emotionally - mentally, and socially fit society, plays an important role in the educational process. Physical Fitness in one's richest possession; it cannot be purchased, to be earned through a daily routine of physical exercise.It is self-evident that fit citizens are nation's best asset and weak ones its liability, It is therefore the responsibility of every country to promote physical fitness of its citizens as it is the basic requirement for most of the tasks to be undertaken by an individual in his daily life. ========================================================== The World Health Organization has set a target that every person in the world should become health-conscious by 2000 A.D.; and it is a right step in the realization of the objective, health for all, The international Olympic Committee has signed an agreement with W.H.O for furthering the cause of health for all and sport for all by 2000 A.D. This agreement is clearly directed towards attaining total fitness of all individuals by the end of the century. To attain this objective the citizens of the world are to be made healthy and, fitness-conscious and for this purpose, scientific programmes and criteria to evaluate fitness are to be formulated to cater to all individuals belonging to both sexes and of all ages. As a primitive objective of physical education the attainment of total fitness has overwhelming implications for growth and development of youth. A Child who is fit enjoys robust health, a time looking physique, a satisfactory level of social and emotional adjustment, and a proficiency in the basic skills of movement. Physical fitness is positive qualities, extending on a scale from death to abundant life All living individuals, thus ===========================
* ** Lecturer, Department of Physical Education, Maulana Azad Institute of Humanities Science and Technology, Mahmudabad, Sitapur. Assistant Professor, Department of Physical Education, Tamil Nadu Physical Education and Sports University Chennai-60012
199
have some degree of physical fitness, which varies considerably in different people and in the same person from time to time. Physical Fitness is an essential quality of man. The worlds leading philosophers have stressed the importance of physical fitness in living a productive and meaningful life. The Greek philosopher, Aristotle stated that the body is the temple of the soul, and to reach harmony of body, mind and spirit, the body must be physically fit. John Locke, an English philosopher wrote that a sound mind in a sound body is a short but full description of a happy state in this world, he that has these two have little more to wish for. According to Williams Physical fitness is essential not only in terms of general health, but also for the special physical requirements for competitive sports and certain highly specialized and demanding occupations. As a result of current work, particularly in the field of ergonomics and physical education, it is becoming increasingly obvious though, not generally appreciated that the achievement and maintenance of high levels of physical fitness produce significant efforts on the working of the human body. Physical fitness in on a continuum and is often defined in relation to a persons life style and energy needs. Physical fitness is commonly defined as the ability to handle normal physical demands of life, to have ample energy to perform variety of leisure time activities, and still be able to function effectively in emergency situations The American Association of Health physical education and recreation defines fitness as a state. Which characterizes the degree to which a person is able to function efficiently. Fitness is an individual matter. It implies the ability of each person to live most effectively within his potentialities. Ability to function depends upon the physical, mental, emotional, social, moral and spiritual components of fitness all of which is related to each other and is mutually interdependent. Physical fitness is more than cardio-vascular fitness. Most experts agree that fitness has many different components of which cardiovascular fitness is only one. From a public health perspective, strength muscular endurance flexibility and body composition also merit consideration. History points out that the people and communities which cared for their physique and engaged in various physical activities remained strong and prosperous, whereas those which neglected the health and fitness aspect had waned and perished. The great Roman civilization crumbled and came to an ignominious end precisely because its people became disproportionately affluent and took to a life of wanton luxury. They lost touch with physical exercises and sports and became soft in mind, flesh and spirit. The lesson is borne out in. Rome as it has been in many other civilization, which have fallen along the way that for a nation to remain strong and to endure it must be physically as well as morally fit. The story of physical education and sports in Indian is strewn with ups and downs In turmoil-torn periods Indian society paid some attention to physical fitness while in periods of security and religious abundance it shifted its attention to
200
intellectual and spiritual attainments Thus neglecting the most vital aspect of physical awakening as a result of which Indian had to bear the brunt of foreign intrusion and invasion till the nineteenth century apart from other modernitys the British also brought to Indian their love of outdoor activity, games and sports, No doubt, the foreign rulers declared physical exercise an important aspect of general education, they made no serious attempt to make it a compulsory subject in school and colleges and a way of life for the common masses. After independence, Educational reconstruction became a necessity. The center shouldered considerable responsibility in re-organizing and expanding various programmes of physical education with the object of developing physical, mental and social aspects of the youth making them worthy citizens of democratic India, The University education commission (1948) and secondary education commission (1950) suggested measures for developing physical education for the youth of different stages of education The all Indian council of sport was set in 1954 to suggest measures for development of sports the first national plan of Physical Education was prepared by Central Advisory Board of Physical Education and recreation in 1956 which emphasized the need for physical education in the educational institutions in the country The steps for improvement were also suggested in the plan. In 1959 the Government of Indian formed a committee under the chairmanship of Dr. H.N. Kunzru to evaluate various schemes of Physical education and recreation. The Kunzru Committee recommended an integrated programme of physical education with a uniform compulsory curriculum for all. The first All Indian Seminar on Physical Education for the Principals of Physical Education Institutions was held in the year 1958. At the Young Men Christian Association, College of Physical Education, Madras. The purpose of the Seminar was to draw up sound principles and procedures to develop physical education and recreation on a nation-wide basis. The seminar also suggested the conduct of the physical fitness test as prescribed in the National Plan at various places in the country to ascertain its validity and to set norms for different age groups. An All Indian Seminar for state inspectors of Physical Education and the University Directors of Physical Education was held at Mahabaleswar in 1958 It was organized by the Union ministry of Education. The objective of the Seminal was to discuss the then existing system of inspection and supervision of physical education and also to discuss the development of physical education activities at college/ university level and in rural areas. The seminar recommended the inclusion of physical education as one of the curricular subjects in schools and at all levels on par with the other subjects. National Physical Efficiency Drive Was launched in 1959-60 by the Union ministry of Education with an aim to create fitness consciousness and enthusiasm amount the people of our country for better and healthy living. In order to put the scheme on more scientific lines and on sound footing. It was entrusted to the Lakshmibai National College of Physical
201
Education, Gwalior, in the year 1972. This scheme was renamed as National Physical Fitness programme (NPFP) to make it more effective in the country. The National policy framed in 1980 recommended that physical education and sports must be made a compulsory subject in all schools and colleges. At least two disciplines in sports must form an essential subject in the educational institutions. The National education policy which was designed by the government of Indian in 1985 also gave adequate importance to the programmes of physical education and physical fitness at the institutional level and stipulated that every educational institution should have adequate sports facilities and scientific programmes to enable every school-going child to participate in games and sports and fitness activities of his/her choice. In order to spread the concept of mass sports and physical fitness for all, the Government of India sponsored a programme of Mass Gymnastic and fitness activities (Bharatiyam). The first pilot project of this programme was held in December 1987, at Trivandrum, Which involved about 7,000 school children and the success of the programme provided encouragement for spreading the fitness culture in the entire country. In order to involve masses in the programme of mass fitness, efforts were made through Sports Authority of Indian and Lakshsmbai National College of Physical Education, Gwalior to train teachers from different state/Us in mass fitness activities. As of today about 20,000 teachers have been oriented in the country who in turn have involved about 20 lakh school going youth in the tender ate group of 8 to 14 years in different mass fitness activities.
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Charles A . Bucher and D.A Wuest, Foundation of Physical Education and Sport 10th ed. (st. Louid : Mosby College publishing, 1987) A.K.Uppal, Physical Fitness: How to develop (New Delhi: Friends Publication, 1992) Donald K. Mathews, Measurement in Physical Education (London : W.B. Sauners Company, 1978) H. Harrison Clarke, Application of Measurement of Health and Physical Education 5th ed. (Engleweed Cliffs, N.J. : Prentice Hall Ins., 1976) Robert J. Antonacci et al., Physical Education for Life (New York: McGraw Hill Book Co., 1969) J.C.P Williams, Sports Medicine (London : Adward Aronot Ltd., 1962) P.M Swegin et al., Physical Best Instructor Guide (Reston V.A. AAHPER, 1989) American Association for Health, Physical Education and Recreation, Application of Measurement to Health and Physical Education (Englewood Cliffs, N.J. : Prentice Hall Inc., 1967) American Alliance for Health, Physical Education Recreation and Dance, Health Related Fitness Test Manual (Teston, V.A. : AAHPERD, 1980) Earle F. Zeigler, History of Physical Education and Sports (Englewood Cliffs, N.J : Prenticer Hall Inc, 1979) M.L. Kamlesh, Physical Education : Facts and Foundation (Faridabad : P.B.
9. 10. 11.
202
12. 13.
14.
15.
16. 17.
Publication, 1988) A National Plan of Physical Education, Ministry of Education, Government of India (New Delhi : Government of Indian press, 1956) Report of Kunzru Committee for Coordination and Integration of Schemes Operating in the Field of Physical Education, Recreation, and Youth Welfare, Ministry of Education, Govt. of India (New Delhi : Government of India press, 1964). Report of All Indian Seminar on Physical Education for Principals of Physical Education Institutions, Ministry of Education, Govt, of Indian (New Delhi: Govt, of Indian Press, 1959) Report of All India Seminar on Physical Education for State Inspectors and University Directors, Ministry of Education, Government of Indian (New Delhi: Govt. of Indian Press, 1959) National Physical Efficiency Drive, Ministry of Education and Youth Services (Faridabad; Government of Indian Publication, 1969) J.C Aggarwal and S.P.Agarwal, National Policy on Education (New Delhi Concept Publishing Company, 1988).
(vkbZ-,l-ch-,u- 978&81&87364&59&7)

(ISBN 978-81-87364-60-3) mDr lanHkZ iqLrdksa esa izdk'ku gsrq vki viuk rF; ijd ,oa rdZ ;qDr 'kks/k i= Hkstdj bl vdknfed dk;Z esa lg;ksx dj ldrs gSaA fgUnh Hkk"kk esa 'kks/k i= ,e-,l- oMZ esa QkUV d`frnso 010] djsDVj lkbt 14] Mcy Lis'k_ vaxzsth Hkk"kk esa VkbEl U;w jkseu QkUV lkbt 14] Mcy Lis'k esa HkstsaA

The Development of Physical Fitness Through Yoga Training

* Parixitsinh D . Mandora
========================================================== Abstract- The purpose of the study was to find out the development of physical fitness of school children through yoga training. To achieve the purpose of the study 60 male students were selected from Sonawala High school of kheda and their age ranged between 14 to 17 years. The selected subjects were divided into two equal groups of 30 subjects each. One was treated as experimental group and the other was control group. The experimental group was underwent the yoga training for 6 days a week for a duration of 6 weeks. The yoga training consists of different yoga(asana) exercises. The session was for one hour in the evening. The pre test and post test were conducted for the both groups. AAHPERD test was used for the measurement of physical fitness. The difference between the pre test and post test means of each group was calculated by applying T- test. It was concluded that yoga training had significant improvement in the physical fitness of experimental group than control group. ========================================================== Introduction- Physical fitness as a term refers to the total dynamic physiological state of individual. There are number of physical fitness components e.g. speed, flexibility, strength, endurance, power, agility, reaction time, cardio vascular endurance. Physical fitness is a trunk of a tree that supports many branches which represent all the activities and make life worth living, intellectual life, spiritual life, occupation and social activities. It is ones richest position; it cant be purchased but can be earned through a daily routine of physical exercises. Training denotes the process of preparing one for same task. Training is a systematic activity of long duration progressively to achieve the goal for any sports. Developing an individual physical fitness is one of the major objectives of the physical education. Physical fitness is one of the potential characteristics of every human being. Physical fit citizens are the major assets for a strong nation and hence the physical fitness of the youth should be national concern. Childrens physical fitness is of interest to educate us to improve health and ===========================
* Associate Professor, Swaminarayan Arts College, Ahmedabad. Gujarat. Affiliation for PhD Research : JJT University, Jhunjhunu, Rajasthan, India.
204
prevent diseases. Ayurved is a science of life having its roots in Vedic literature and inheritance continued since Vedic times. Similarly yoga also finds roots originating from Vedic period. Since a time immemorial yoga have proved to be beneficial for human existence. Yoga provides an ideal and healthy life and its important for the overall development of health. Yogic practices getting popular are looked upon. Its systematic for the improvement of physical fitness of an individual. Yet we lack in the experimental evidence about the utility of physical exercise and yogic exercises for promoting physical fitness. Despite this fact many people misunderstand yoga even in India. If we were to take a cross-section of society and make a general survey of the publics opinion about yoga we would find many misconceptions about yoga. In order to bring yoga to life and to really gain profit by it one must take it to heart in every sense of word and live it as an essential part of ones daily life. As per Indian tradition Yoga, especially Hathayoga, comprises of different yogic exercises viz., asana (body postures), pranayama (controlled regulation of breath), bandha (physiological locks or holds of the semi-voluntary muscles), kriyas (cleansing process), and mudras (attitude which spontaneously arouses meditation). Yogic exercises are also becoming popular in the area of games and sports and also in the curriculum of Indian schools, colleges and universities.Yoga offers tremendous health and wellness benefits. Yoga is becoming increasingly popular among athletes and sports enthusiasts. Yoga is a time honoured tool for integrating the physical, mental and spiritual aspects of life. Yoga practise might in the turn benefit from the influence of other activities. Especially in athletics yoga can be done at a high or low intensity that can provide a workout for best fitness. MethodologySubject:- The study was conducted on 60 male students of sonawala school, kheda and their age ranged from 14 to 17 years. The subjects were equally divided into one experimental group and the other was treated as control group. Data collection :- The pre-test and post-test was conducted for AAHPERD youth physical fitness test before and after 6 weeks of yoga training programme. The difference between pre test and post test means of each group were tested by applying T- test and the level of significance was set at 0.05 level. Criterion measures
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Variable Muscular strength Abdominal muscular strength Agility Explosive leg strength Speed Cardiovascular Endurance Seat and reach test Measurement Unit Number of pull ups in 60 seconds Number of bent knee sit ups in 60 seconds 4*30 M Shuttle run time was taken in 1/100 seconds Standing broad jump 50 yard run test time was taken in 1/100 seconds 600 yards run time was taken in minutes and seconds Best result was recorded
205
Administration of Training- The training schedule was prepared for the experimental group namely yoga training group. The control group was not involved in any training. The time for training was in the evening from 5 to 6 p.m for one hour. The experimental group were underwent yoga training for 5 days a week with a set of following yoga exercises. 1. Dhanurasana 5. Matsyasana 2. Chakrasana 6. Ardhapadmasana 3. Shavasana 7. Mayurasana 4. Padmasana 8. Utkatasana Result- The result of the study development of physical fitness through yoga training is presented in table. Table-1, Significance of difference between pre -test and post- test means of a experimental group and control group for the development of physical fitness.
No Activity Group Pre- PostMean test test difference Mean Mean
2.25 1.7 42.78 45.23 11.77 11.69 1.50 1.63 8.50 8.53 134.29 143.78 21.62 24.65 4.38 2.05 47.05 41.20 11.55 12.45 1.74 1.64 8.34 8.59 134.65 139.26 24 23.01 2.04 0.44 4.33 3.70 0.21 0.74 0.16 0.018 0.127 0.09 1.37 4.251 1.47 1.62
SD
tratio
9.57* 1.57 5.65* 4.67* 1.90 4.94* 6.90 0.91 1.07 1.12 0.61 0.97 3.90 4.19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Pull-ups Bent knee seat ups Shuttle Run Standing broad jump 50 yard Run 600 yard Run Seat and reach test
Experimental Control Experimental Control Experimental Control Experimental Control experimental Control Experimental Control Experimental Control
1.25 1.51 4.2 4.58 0.62 0.80 0.12 0.12 0.67 0.44 12.3 12.58 1.99 2.11
Significant at 0.05 level Table-2 Significance of difference between post test means of an Experimental group and control group for development of physical Fitness.
No Activity Post test mean Experimental Control group group 4.27 2.03 47.2 41.37 11.57 12.41 1.73 1.648 8.44 8.61 135.65 137.26 23 21.02 Mean ratio 2.23 4.33 0.95 0.22 0.67 12.23 5.89 SD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Pull Ups Bent Knee Seat ups Shuttle run Standing Broad jump 50 yard Run 600 yard Run Seat and reach test
3.85* 5.07 3.48 1.52 1.02 1.14 0.01
Significant at 0.05 level
206
Graphical presentation of Mean difference of experimental group and control group on different variables of physical fitness
Result 1. The experimental group trained with Yoga training found significant improvement as compared to control group in muscular strength of shoulder was found through the training of yoga training. 2. The experimental group trained with yoga training was shown significant improvement as compared to control group in abdominal muscular strength by applying bent knee sit ups test. This significant improvement in abdominal muscular strength was due to yoga training. 3. The experimental group was shown significant differences as compared to control group in agility by applying shuttle Run test. These differences were due to yoga training. 4. Explosive strength of leg of experimental group was shown improvement after six weeks of yoga training than control group. The result shows that the improvement in explosive strength was due to yoga training. 5. There was improvement in speed of experimental group than control group after six weeks of yoga training. 6. There were no significant differences between experimental group and control group on cardiovascular endurance after six week of yoga training. 7. From the mean differences of seat and reach test it could be concluded that there was improvement in experimental group than control group due to six weeks of yoga training. Discussion- From the finding of above analysis and statistical information it shows that the yoga training shown more effective for the development of abdominal muscular strength, muscular strength of shoulders and explosive
207
leg strength and flexibility than speed. When there was no effect on cardiovascular endurance. Overall statistical analysis and finding of the study it could be concluded that there was improvement in physical fitness due to yoga training. Recommendations- Based on the result of the study, the following recommendations were drawn, 1. It is recommended that the more studies may be conducted to verify these results using longer period of training duration. 2. It is recommended that researches also may be conducted on the different age group. 3. The similar study may be conducted on female students as subjects. 4. The similar study may be conducted with large number of samples.
====================== References1. 2. Anne, Besant (2006) An introduction to Yoga Theo-sophical Digest (2nd quarter) 18,2, p. 96. B K Acharya, 2010, "Effect of Pranayama (voluntary regulated breathing) and Yogasana (yoga postures) on lipid profile in normal healthy junior footballers International Journal of Yoga, 3(2): P 70. Clarke, H Harrison and Clarke, David H. Application of measurement to physical Education: New jersey: 1987. Devinder K. Test and measurement, New Delhi: DVS publication,1996. Yogendra,Jaydeva (2001). Yoga way of life. Yoga and total Health. 8,p. 14. Uppal A. K. Physical Fitness How to develop. New Delhi: Friends Publication India,1992.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Historical Study of Development of the Game of Volleyball in Indore

* Vijay Francis Peter
========================================================== Abstract- The game of volleyball originated in U.S.A. but it developed rapidly in other countries like Japan. USSR, Poland and India . In India, first it introduced in the earlier part of the twentieth century by H. C. Buck in Y M. C. A. Madras. Indore District Amture Volleyball Association was formed in 1942 but came into existence in the year 1976. The management of the association is looking after by the past players. Rapidly growth of the number of clubs affiliated with the I.D.A.V. A. Quantity of National produced by the Indore Volleyball association are very high. The promotion schemes to identify talent and organized coaching camps found to be inadequate presently. ========================================================== Introduction- The game of Volleyball was invented in 1895 by Mr. William G. Morgan, a Physical Director of the College of Physical Education, run by, Y.M.C.A.at Holyoke, Massachusetts, U.S.A. He named it minttonete, game in the beginning and later on Dr. A. T. Halsted of Springfield c its name to volleyball, as then the basic idea of play was to volley the ball back and forth, over the net. Volleyball is a game played on a rectangular court not exceeding 18 meter in length and 9 meter in which. used by , team having six players to a side by volleyball a large inflated ball with the hands over net 8 feet high. It is one of the best games and ranks first in the world in popularity. The game offers opportunities for the development of strength, endurance, speed, agility and neuromuscular skills and coordination of all parts of the body. The defense calls for quick thinking and immediate action. In India the game of volleyball was introduced by Y. M. C. A. Madras in early parts of the twentieth century. It was taken to the schools, colleges, universities and private clubs by the trained physical education. In the year 195 1, volleyball federation of India was formed. The founder president and secretary were principal F. C. Arora and the late Mr. S. K. Basu. Volleyball federation of India controls volleyball game in the India and Delhi, Tamilnadu, Kerala, Andhra Pradesh, Services and Railways have contributed in producing international players and have won maximum number of championships. Jimniy George, Balwant Singh Ballu ===========================
* School of Physical Education, Devi Ahilya Vishwavidyalaya, Indore (M.P.)
209
are the recipients of Arjuna Award. Indian Volleyball teams have toured U.S.S.R., Japan .Indonesia, Thailand. Ce\ 7 lon. China and France in the various competitions and test matches . A number of test matches and exhibition matches have been planed in India upto 1970 the standard of the game was quite good but due to dissension in the Federations the standard is deteriorating gradtiativ and India could not participate in the sixth Asian game in 1970. There is no dearth of talent facilities in India. For a long time, the play of volleyball was confined to Holyke in the gymnasium where Morgan was the chieftain. Folks watched the play and in time the game was taken up at Spring field and other Massachusetts and New England cities. Dr. A. T. Halsted of Springfield after watching, play at the new sports suggested that its name be changed to volleyball. since the basic idea of lay was to volley the, ball back and forth. over the net. Eventually, volleyball game was stretched out from the gymnasium to the outdoor courts and beaches. Then the amazing growth in the popularity stared. Youngster .generally were chief among the pioneer outdoor players but in time, adults saw that volleyball rightly played could result in a game with thrilling possibilities. As time want on the number of courts had to be increased to accommodate the increasing army of players. By 1922 numerous courts were installed by municipal and school authorities. And in the same year a national championship was arranged by Y. M. C. A. volleyball game by both the sexes. After the World war, 11. the game had been adopted by many countries. American soldiers at play added to the popularity of the sports among foreigners. It is neighborhood 5,000,000 since it is one game that can be played by youngsters prior to their teams, in to the teens, and for forty to fifty year after. The men conspicuously. Identified with the sport, wrote a new rules book. In 1022 the Y. M. C. A. conducted a tournament to determine the national, championship, with the Pittsburgh central Y. M. C. A. the inner. Volleyball is recognized as an international game . Representatives of 106 countries assembled at the time of Olympic games in 1936 at Berlin and a controlling body named the Imitational Volleyball Association was formed in 1947 with its headquarters at Paris (France). The first President was Mr. Paul Libaud, Paris (France). The very first world volleyball championship was held in 1947 at Prague, when twelve countries participated. Russians were the first recipients of the trophy defeating Czechoslovakia in the final Since 1964 (Tokyo Olympics) volleyball has become Olympic game for both men and women. The first Asian championship was held in the year 1955 at Tokyo and India conquered the title and Japan finished second. Asian championship has now become the integral part of the Asian game. Methodology- The procedure adopted for this study was invariably based on the following method used for collecting the data. (1) Selected reading from texts. Periodicals articles, reports of volleyball association of Indore and sports boards.
210
(2) (3)
Interviews Self made questionnaire Authors make self-made in this a containing number of easily and quickly answerable questions. Though some of them were very lengthy were carefully prepared to seek all possible relevant information on the problem from the respondents. The questionnaire administered and to be responded is as follow. Questionnaire was sent to the presidents secretary and treasurer of the volleyball association of Indore to find Out the background of the formation the District Amture volleyball association of Indore. Conclusion- The game of volleyball originated in U. S. A. but it developed rapidly in other countries like Japan. USSR, Poland and India . In India, first it introduced in the earlier part of the twentieth century by H. C. Buck in Y M. C. A. Madras. Indore District Amture Volleyball Association was formed in 1942 but came into existence in the year 1976. The management of the association is looking after by the past players. Rapidly growth of the number of clubs affiliated with the I. D. A. V. A. Quantity of National produced by the Indore Volleyball association are very high. The promotion schemes to identify talent and organized coaching camps found to be inadequate presently.
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Arlett John, The Oxford Companion to Sports and Games, Oxford University Press, London , New York , Toronto 1975. Bown and Rowland, "Cricket: A History of its Growth and Development Throughout the World". Dhanraj Hubert V., Volleyball for Men and Women ., Y. M. C. A. Publishing House, Massev Hall, Jai Sinp h Road , New Delhi-1, 1969. Sotir Nicolas , Winning Volleyball , translated by, John D. Syel-, National Ltd., published in Great Britain , July 1973. David Manual Raj. "The Origin and Historical Development of Silambam Fencing An Ancient Self Defense Sports of India" Dissertation Abstracts International (November 1977). Sovenir, Pro-Olympics Asia Zone Volleyball Games for Men and Women at New Delhi in 1963 published by Delhi Volleyball Association, 1963.
6.
Psychol ogical Wel l-bei ng A Study of P .T.C. and B. Ed. College Students
* Jignesh P. Panchal
========================================================== Abstract- The purpose of the present study was to investigate the impact of sex, type of faculty and residential status of students on Psychological Well-being. The sample for the study comprised of 120 male and 120 female college student from Anand city selected from various P.T.C. and B. Ed. colleges. Personal data sheet and Bhogle and Prakash (1995), Psychological Well-being scale were used to collect the required data. A2x2x2 factorial design was planned where type of faculty, sex and residential status were considered as independent variables and Psychological Well-being as dependent variables. Accordingly data were analysed with 2x2x2 ANOVA. Results revealed no significant difference between the male and female students. There was higher level of Psychological Well-being among the students of B. Ed. stream and students residing at their homes as compared to the students of P.T.C. stream and students residing at hostels respectively. ========================================================== Introduction- Colleges are institutions or organizations which prepare students for the degree. In some cases, colleges prepare students for the degree of a university of which the college is a part, in other cases, colleges are independent institutions which prepare students to sit as external candidates at other universities or have authority to run courses that lead to the degrees of those universities. In general use, a college is an institution between secondary school and university. Nowadays we find a completely different scenario among the male and the female college going students. They are surrounded by many kinds of problems, not only in relation to the extremely high pace of the ongoing competition but also many social and personal problems causing not physical but also psychological weakness. The psychological well being of the students get affected in such relations and situations. Psychological well-being indicates physical and mental wellness. Sinha (1990) has stated that psychological wellbeing is difficult to define. It has been taken to consist of discomfort or desirability and from any disturbance of mental functions. It is a somewhat malleable concept which has to do with peoples feelings about everyday life activities. ===========================
* Ph.D. Student, Singhania University, Rajasthan
212
Such feelings may range from negative mental states or psychological strains such as anxiety, depression, frustration, emotional exhaustion unhappiness, dissatisfaction to a state which has been identified as positive mental health (Jahoda, 1958; Warr, 1978). A research in psychological well-being of college students has gained momentum since a long time. Studies on indicators of psychological well-being demonstrate greater anxiety (Dhillon and Jasra, 1992) and depression (Venkoba Rao, 1989; Mathur and Sen, 1989; Baum and Boxley, 1983), Lower life satisfaction (Chadha, 1991; Bhardwaj, Sen and Mathur, 1991), and more adjustment problems among the male and female college students both. (Singh, Singh and Dawra, 1983; Chandrika and Ananthraman, 1982). Aims of the study: 1. To study the difference in psychological well-being of P.T.C. and B. Ed. college students. 2. To find out the difference in the psychological well-being of Male and Female college students. 3. To study the difference in psychological well-being among the Hostel and Home residential college students. MethodSample - Sample in this study consisted of 240 subjects, 120 P.T.C. and 120 B. Ed. College students from Anand city. These college students in the sample were selected from various P.T.C. and B. Ed. college of Anand city. Both male and female students consisted of 60 Male and 60 Female students each having 30 hostel students and 30 home residing students. Measures : 1. Personal Data Sheet- A personal data sheet developed by the investigator was used to collect information about Type of Faculty P.T.C. and B. Ed., Sex and residential status. 2. Psychological well-being Scale- Psychological well-being scale developed by Bhogle and Prakash (1995), was used to measure Psychological well-being. The questionnaire contains 28 items with true and false response alternative. It covers 13 dimensions of psychological well-being. The maximum possible score is twenty eight and minimum is zero. High score indicates high level of psychological well-being. The test - retest reliability coefficient is 0.72 and internal consistency coefficient is 0.84. The author has reported satisfactory validity of the questionnaire. Result and DiscussionTable No. 1, Means and difference of mean on psychological well-being of students.
Independent Variable A1 (P.T.C.) A2 (B. Ed.) B1 (Female) B2 (Male) C1 (Hostel) C2 (Home) N 120 120 120 120 120 120 Mean 20.23 21.48 20.73 20.98 18.69 23.02 Difference of Mean 1.25 0.25 4.33
213
Table No. 2
Summary of the 2x2x2 analysis of variance based on psychological well-being of P.T.C. and B. Ed. students with respect to types of faculty. Sex and residential status(N=240)
Source of Variation A (Types of faculty) B (Sex) C (Residence) AxB AxC BxC AxBxC SSW SST Sum of Square 95.00 4.00 1122.34 124.70 59.00 10.84 19.84 1644.17 3079.90 df 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 232 239 Mean Sum of Square 95.00 4.00 1122.34 124.70 59.00 10.84 19.84 7.09 F 13.41** 0.57 158.37** 17.60** 8.33** 1.53 2.80
NS = Not Significant, ** p < 0.01 From table No. 1 it can be seen that the mean scores of psychological well-being of male and female college students of P.T.C. and B. Ed. streams are 20.23 and 21.48 respectively. The difference between them is 1.25. From the results it can be calculated that science students have more psychological well being than the P.T.C. students. According to Table No. 2 that F value of psychological well-being of male and female students of P.T.C. and B. Ed. faculties were 13.41, which shows significant difference at the level of 0.01. Table No. 2 shows that F value of psychological well-being of male and female students residing in hostels and at homes is 158.37, which shows significant difference at the level of 0.01. Table No. 1 indicates that mean scores of psychological well-being among the male and female students residing at hostels and at homes are 18.69 and 23.02 respectively. The difference between the mean score of psychological well-being of the hostel students and students living at homes is 4.33 which shows psychological well-being is more in the students residing at homes. From Table No. 2 it can be observed that F values obtained from four interactions AxB and AxC was significant and the BxC but AxBxC are not significant. Thus, it can be said that the type of faculty, sex and regidance, and their interaction with one another do not affect psychological well-being.
====================== References1. Suvera, P. S.,(2001). Religious behavior, death anxiety and psychological well-being: A comparative study of institutionalized and noninstitutionalized aged, Unpublished M.Phil. Thesis, Saurashtra University, Rajkot. Patel, K. S. (2008). A study of psychological well-being and Death anxiety among Institutionalized and non-institutionalized aged, Unpublished M. Phil. Thesis, Sardar Patel University, Vallabh Vidhyanagar.
2.
214
3. 4.
5. 6. 7.
8.
9.
10.
11. 12.
Warr, P. B. (1978). A study of psychological well-being. British Journal of Psychology, Vol.69, PP.111-121. Singh, J. G., Singh, S., and Dawara, V. (1983). Adjustment problem of old people. Indian Journal of Clinical Psychology, Vol.10(1), PP.127131. Sinha, D. (1990). Concept of psychosocial well-being: Western and Indian perspectives. NIMHANS Journal, Vol.8, PP.1-11 Venkoba Rao., A. (1989). Psychiatry of old age in India, Ahmedabad/ Bombay: Torrent Laboratories/Sun Pharmaceuticals. Bhogle, S. and Jay Prakash, I. (1995), Development of the psychological well-being questionnaire, Journal of Personality and Clinical studies, Vol.11 (1&2), PP.5-9. Mathur, D., and Sen, A. (1989). Depression in elderly and some of its psychological concomitants: A study of efficacy of the age-care centre. Indian Journal of Community Guidance Service, Vol.16, PP.27-39. Chandrika, P., and Ananthraman, R. N. (1982). Life changes and adjustment in old age. Journal of Psychological Researches, Vol.26, PP.137-141. Dhillon, P. K. and Jasra, A. (1992). Personality, anxiety and self-concept: A study across age variation and social class. In P. K. Dhillon (Eds.) Psychological aspects of aging in India (PP.119-136). New Delhi: Concept Publishing. Jahoda, M. (1958). Current concepts of positive mental health. New York: Basic Books. Douglas, C. K., (1980). Adulthood and ageing, Canada. Johan Wiley and sons.
Antibacterial activities of Calotropis procera Linn

*Abhilasha Shrivastava **Suchita Singh, ***Sanchita Singh
========================================================== Abstract- Methanol and aqueous extracts of leaves of Calotropis procera Linn. were subjected to the antibacterial activities. For antibacterial activities test, the extract was subjected to its effectiveness against Grampositive and Gram- negative bacteria in agar diffusion method. The zones of inhibition produced by the crude methanol and aqueous extract against few sensitive strains were measured and compared with those of standard antibiotic Gentamycin. It is evident that both extracts are active against the bacteria at low concentrations. Key words- Antibacterial, Calotropis procera Linn. ========================================================== Introduction- Medicinal plants are usually used for Ayurvedic, Unani and other treatments in rural areas. Calotropis procera Linn. Commonly known as Arka, is an important medicinal plant both for Ayurveda and traditional science of ethnomedicine. Arka was found sculptured on Shiva temple [Gupta 1996] symbolizing mythological and the medicinal importance enjoyed by the plant. The number of plants with medicinal properties included in the Materia Medica of traditional medicine in this sub continental present stands at about 2000 [Chopra, J. et.al 1958]. Calotropis procera Linn. A wild growing plant of family Ascelepiadaecae. Different parts of the plants have been used in Indian traditional system of medicine for treatment of leprosy, ulcers, tumors, piles and disease of spleen, liver and abdomen [Kirtikar. et.al 1935]. Phytochemical studies of Calotropis procera have afforded several types of compounds such as Cardenolide, triterpinoids, alkaloids, resins and proteolytic enzymes in latex, flavonoids, tannins, sterol [Ajay k. Yadav et.al 2010]. The root of the Calotropis procera Linn. is used by various tribes of Central India as a curative agent for jaundice [Kumar VL et.al 2006]. So, the present work was designated to investigate the antibacterial activities of Calotropis procera Linn. to know the scientific basis of the traditional use of this plant. Materials and Method===========================
* ** *** Department of Biotechnology, Science College Rewa (M.P.) Department of Biotechnology, A.P.S. University Rewa (M.P.) Department of Biotechnology, A.P.S. University Rewa (M.P.)
216
Plant MaterialsFresh leaves of Calotropis procera Linn. were collected from Lucknow. The dried leaves of Calotropis procera Linn. were ground into fine powder with the help of grinder. About 400gm of powdered material was extracted by soxhlet apparatus with 90% methanol at 550C temperature. The extract thus obtained was concentrated by using a rotary evaporator to get a viscous mass. The viscous mass was then kept at room temperature under a ceiling fan to get a dried extract (about 16% yield). The extract thus obtained was used for pharmacological screening. Determination of Antibacterial ActivitiesNutrient agar media was prepared by adding water to a dehydrated product that contains all the ingredients. Practically all media are available commercially in powdered form [Pelczar, M. J. et.al 1993]. Three types of discs were prepared for antibacterial screening: one gram sample extracts was dissolved in 10ml of ethanol to prepare sample solution, 0.03gm/10ml gentamicin standard disc used as positive control to ensure the activity of standard antibiotic against the test organisms as well as for comparison of the response produced by known antibacterial agent with that produced by test samples, and third one was a blank sample (only ethanol) which was used as a negative control to ensure that the residual solvents was not active. Specific organisms were inoculated into previously sterilized nutrient agar media, mixed thoroughly and transferred immediately to the sterile petridish in an aseptic condition. It was stored in an incubator for about 24 hours to allow the proper growth of microbes. Prepared sample solutions were applied to the corresponding holes with the help of a micropipette. The plates were then allowed to stand to diffuse the sample solution into the antibiotic medium at room temperature for 2 hours. The plates were then incubated at 370C for overnight. After proper incubation, clear zones of inhibition around the point of application of sample solution were formed. These inhibition zones were measured by slide calipers and expressed in millimetre [Bauer, A. W. et. al 2006]. ResultFor Antibacterial TestThe results of the antibacterial activity measured in terms of diameter of zone of inhibition in mm. Antibiotic discs of Gentamycin was used as standard comparison purpose methanol and aqueous extract showed antibacterial activity against gram positive and gram negative bacteria. Aqueous extract showed higher antibacterial activities than methanol extract. Table 1: Antibacterial activity of methanol and aqueous extract of leaves of Calotropis procera.
217
Diameter zone of inhibition in mm Name of bacteria Gentamycin (30g/ml) Gram positive bacteria Staphylococcus aureus Staphylococcus epidermidis Staphylococcus saprophyticus Staphylococcus pyogenes Gram negative bacteria Plesiomonas shigelloides Pseudomonas aeruginosa Salmonella typhi Shigella boydii Shigella dysenteriae Shigella flexneri Shigella sonnei Vibrio cholera 21 18 30 21 Methanol extract (500g/ml) 8 8 Aqueous extract (500g/ml)
9 11 21 9
14 27 30 22 24 21 24 27
5 8 8
6 10 10 10 9 9
(-) represents No inhibition Discussions- Crude methanol extract showed antibacterial activity against S. aureus, S. epidermidis, P. Shigelloides, S. dysenteriae and Vibrio cholera. Aqueous extract of Calotropis procera showed antibacterial activity against S. aureus, S. epidermidis, S. saprophyticus, S. pyogenes, P. Shigelloides, S. dysenteriae, V. Cholera, S. flexneri, S. sonnei and P. aeruginosa. S. typhi and S. boydii didnot show any activities against methanol and aqueous extract of Calotropis procera. Both methanol and aqueous extract of Calotropis procera shown significant antibacterial activity against few gram positive and gram negative bacterial strains. So, further toxicological study is required to establish the therapeutic uses of the plant with its active principles.
====================== References1. 2. Ajay, K. Yadav, et.al / Drug Invention Today (2010). 2 (2), 185-190. Anil, Ku. Sharma, Rajeev, Kharb, and Rajandeep kaur (2011). Pharmacognostical
218
3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
aspects of CALOTROPIS PROCERA (Ait) R. Br. International Journal of Parma and Biosciences; ISSN 0975-6299; vol 2/ Issue 3. Bauer, A.W, W.M.M, Kirby, J.C, Sherris and M.Turck (1996). Antibiotic susceptibility testing by a standardized single disc method. Am. J. Clin. Pathola, 45:493 -496. Chopra, J. and S. Rajasekharan (1958). Indian Pharmacological Aspects, 55:8785. Gupta, S.M. (1996). Plants in Indian temple art, B R Publications, New Delhi. Kirtikar, K.R. and B.D. Basu (1935). Indian medicinal Plants, PP; 1606 Kumar VL, Arya S. (2006). Medicinal uses and Pharmacological properties of Calotropis Procera. Recent progress in Medicinal Plants, 373-388. Pelczar M.J., J.R.Chan, E.C.S. Noel and K.R. Krieg (1993). Microbiology fifth edition Tata Mc Graw- Hill Publishing Company Ltd. New Delhi. PP 103-105, 510-539.
Volume-IX, Coming in September, 2013 ISSN 0975-4083


Chief Editor
Concept of Sustainable Development for Conservation of Environment

* Madhu Sthapak
========================================================== Abstract- Sustainable development is the concept of needs and limitations imposed by technology and society on the environment's ability to meet the present and future needs. World Commission on Environment and Development (WCED) has defined sustainable development as "a process of change in which the exploitation of resources, the direction of investments. The orientation of technological development and institutional change are all in harmony and enhance both current and future potential to meet human needs and aspirations." Thus. The concept of sustainable development provides a framework for the integration of environmental policies and development strategies having implications at international, national, regional and local levels. Development should not endanger the natural systems that support life on earth. Many people in the in the industrial world today operate with the frontier mentality, which is a human centred view based on the three erroneous basic ideas:The world has an unlimited supply of resources for human use; Humans are apart from nature, and Nature is something to overcome. ========================================================== Introduction- With this attitude towards nature, technological advances increase our ability to use earths resources and thus, increase the damage. However. The realization is growing fast that we are in a world of limits, and ever-increasing growth of material consumption can only damage, the lifegiving physical components of the environment. Hence, the concept of sustainable development leads us to new resource consumption strategies which are: Conservation or reduction of excessive resource use. Recycling and reuse of materials and More use of renewable resources like solar energy rather non-renewable resources such as oil and coal. Sustainable development also requires meeting the basic needs of all deprived people in this world and extending to all, the opportunities to satisfy their aspirations for a better life. Otherwise the world, in which poverty and ===========================
* Professor of Botany, Government Arts and Commerce College, Sagar (M.P.)
220
inequity are endemic, will always, be prone to ecological and other crisis. In Gandhijis words, Earth provides enough to satisfy every mans need but not any mans greed. 1. Frontier society or nlentaliry :- Humans are supreme and apart from not are 2. Sustainable Society :- Conservation, recycling and reuse of earths resources 3. Promotion of common interests :- There is need for economic and social justice within and amongst nation Sustainable development refers to a mode of human development in which resource use aims to meet human needs while ensuring the sustainability of natural systems and the environment, so that these needs can be met not only in the present, but also for generations to come. The term sustainable development was used by the Brundtland Commission, which coined what has become the most often-quoted definition of sustainable development: development that meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs.A sustainable system generally can be defined in environmental terminology as a living system which operates in a way that it does not use up resources more quickly than they can be naturally replenished; a sustainable economic system operates in a way so that expenditures are either equal or less than the income. Sustainable social systems maintain that all members are allowed to contribute, thereby synthesizing the final product Sustainable development ties together concern for the carrying capacity of natural systems with the social challenges faced by humanity. As early as the 1970s, sustainability was employed to describe an economy in equilibrium with basic ecological support systems.Ecologists have pointed to The Limits to Growth, and presented the alternative of a steady state economy in order to address environmental concerns. The concept of sustainable development has in the past most often been broken out into three constituent parts: environmental sustainability, economic sustainability and sociopolitical sustainability. More recently, it has been suggested that a more consistent analytical breakdown is to distinguish four domains of economic, ecological, political and cultural sustainability. This is consistent with the UCLG move to make culture the fourth domain of sustainability Environmental sustainability is the process of making sure current processes of interaction with the environment are pursued with the idea of keeping the environment as pristine as naturally possible based on ideal-seeking behavior. Thus, environmental sustainability demands that society designs activities to meet human needs while indefinitely preserving the life support systems of the planet. This, for example, entails using water sustainably, only utilizing renewable energy, and sustainable material supplies (e.g. harvesting wood from forests at a rate that maintains the biomass and biodiversity). An
221
unsustainable situation occurs when natural capital (the sum total of natures resources) is used up faster than it can be replenished. Sustainability requires that human activity only uses natures resources at a rate at which they can be replenished naturally. Inherently the concept of sustainable development is intertwined with the concept of carrying capacity. Theoretically, the long-term result of environmental degradation is the inability to sustain human life. Such degradation on a global scale could imply extinction for humanity. Environmental sustainability is the long-term maintenance of ecosystem components and functions for future generations. In addition, environmental sustainability is the process of making sure current processes of interaction with the environment are pursued with the idea of keeping the environment as unspoiled as naturally possible. It maintains that the Earths resources must not be depleted faster than they can naturally be replenished. Depletion of our finite resources inevitably tries the ability of human civilizations to persist Environmental sustainability organizations: Bioneers- Working to preserve biological and cultural diversity Center for a New American Dream- New American Dream helps Americans consume responsibly to protect the environment, enhance quality of life, and promote social justice. Climate Leadership Initiative- Help government, business, and communities adopt sustainability-based thinking, policies, and programs. Climate Solutions- Promotes a regional approach to global warming solutions Friends of the Earth (FOE)- FOE is a national environmental organization dedicated to preserving the health and diversity of the planet for future generations International Institute for Environmental Development (IIED)Promotes sustainable patterns of world development through collaborative research, policy studies, networking and knowledge dissemination. International Union for the Conservation of Nature (IUCN)- Seeks to conserve the integrity and diversity of nature and to ensure that any use of natural resources is equitable and ecologically sustainable. Northwest Earth Institute- A pioneer in taking earth-centered education programs to people where they spend their time-in their neighborhoods, workplaces, homes, schools, and centers of faith. Pacific Northwest Pollution Prevention Resource Center (PPRC)- The Northwests leading resource for promoting a cleaner environment through pollution prevention. PPRC provides high quality, unbiased information, facilitates information exchange, and catalyzes pollution prevention projects. Renewable Energy Policy Project (REPP)- Supports the advancement of renewable energy technology through policy research. Sustainability organizations seek to implement sustainability strategies which provide them with economic and cultural benefits attained through
222
environmental responsibility. Recently, the natural environment has become a key strategic issue in both the business and academic communities. Through implementing sustainability strategies, firms can integrate long-run profitability with their efforts to protect the ecosystem, providing them with opportunities to achieve the traditional competitive advantages of & cost leadership and market differentiation via environmental responsibility. Sustainability strategies have been persistently employed in a number of organizations. Environmental sustainability is the process of making sure current processes of interaction with the environment are pursued with the idea of keeping the environment as pristine as naturally possible based on ideal-seeking behavior. Thus, environmental sustainability demands that society designs activities to meet human needs while indefinitely preserving the life support systems of the planet. This, for example, entails using water sustainably, only utilizing renewable energy, and sustainable material supplies (e.g. harvesting wood from forests at a rate that maintains the biomass and biodiversity). An unsustainable situation occurs when natural capital (the sum total of natures resources) is used up faster than it can be replenished. Sustainability requires that human activity only uses natures resources at a rate at which they can be replenished naturally. Inherently the concept of sustainable development is intertwined with the concept of carrying capacity. Theoretically, the long-term result of environmental degradation is the inability to sustain human life. Such degradation on a global scale could imply extinction for humanity.
Consumption of renewable resources More than nature's ability to replenish Equal to nature's ability to replenish Less than nature's ability to replenish State of environment Environmental degradation Environmental equilibrium Environmental renewal Sustainability Not sustainable Steady state economy Environmentally sustainable
Environmental issues are harmful aspects of human activity on the biophysical environment. Environmentalism, a social and environmental movement that started in the 1960s, addresses environmental issues through advocacy, education and activism. Current problems faced by the environmentThe carbon dioxide equivalent of greenhouse gases (GHG) in the atmosphere has already exceeded 400 parts per million (NOAA) (with total long-term GHG exceeding 455 parts per million). (Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change Report) This level is considered a tipping point. The amount of greenhouse gas in the atmosphere is already above the threshold that can potentially cause dangerous climate change. We are already at risk...Its not next year or next decade, its now. Report from the UN Office for the Coordination of Humanitarian Affairs (OCHA): Non-hydroelectric renewable
223
energy refers to electricity supplied from the following renewable sources of power: solar, geothermal, biomass, landfill gas, and wind. Although installation of these renewable energy resources is growing, non-hydro renewable energy is currently responsible for less than two percent of the electricity generation in the United States. Air emissions associated with generating electricity from solar, geothermal, and wind technologies are negligible because no fuels are combusted in these processes. The average air emissions rates in the United States from non-hydro renewable energy generation are 1.22lbs/MWh of sulfur dioxide and 0.06 lbs/MWh of nitrogen oxides. Conclusion- Hence, the concept of sustainable development leads us to new resource consumption strategies which are: Conservation or reduction of excessive resource use. Recycling and reuse of materials and more use of renewable resources like solar energy rather non-renewable resources such as oil and coal. Sustainable development also requires meeting the basic needs of all deprived people in this world and extending to all, the opportunities to satisfy their aspirations for a better life. Otherwise the world, in which poverty and inequity are endemic, will always, be prone to ecological and other crisis. In Gandhijis words, Earth provides enough to satisfy every mans need but not any mans greed
====================== References1. Stead, W.E. & J.G. Stead (1995)An Empirical Investigation of Sustainability Strategy Implementation in Industrial Organizations. Research in Corporate Social Performance and Policy, Supplement 1, pp. 43-66 Green Building Pages accessed 18 November 2010. van Marrewijk, M. and M. Werre (2003) Multiple Levels of Corporate Sustainability. Journal of Business Ethics , Vol. 44, no. 2/3, Corporate Conference 2002: The Impact of CSR on Management Disciplines (May, 2003), pp. 107-119 Rod Macrae, Ecological Agriculture Projects, 1990 Rod Macrae, Ecological Agriculture Projects, 1990 2002 Green Building Pages. All rights reserved.,Green Building Pages 2002 Green Building Pages. All rights reserved.,Green Building Pages United Nations General Assembly (1987) Report of the World Commission on Environment and Development: Our Common Future. Transmitted to the General Assembly as an Annex to document A/42/427 - Development and International Co-operation: Environment. Retrieved on: 2009-02-15. Anderson, D. R. (2006). The critical importance of sustainability risk management. Risk Management. Vol. 53, no. 4. United Nations General Assembly (1987) Report of the World Commission on Environment and Development: Our Common Future. Transmitted to the General Assembly as an Annex to document A/42/427 - Development and International Co-operation: Environment. Retrieved on: 2009-02-15. Anderson, D. R. (2006). The critical importance of sustainability risk
2. 3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9. 10.
11.
224
12. 13. 14.
management. Risk Management. Vol. 53, no. 4. Rennie, E. (2008). Growing Green, Boosting the bottom line with sustainable business practices. APICS Magazine. Vol. 18, no. 2. Sustainable Business Movement, accessed 18 November 2010., Sustainable Community Initiatives, accessed 18 November 2010.


Chief Editor
Transferrin Polymophism in Channa Punctatus

* Umesh Shukla
========================================================== Abstract- Agar and starch gel electrophoresis have shown great poetential in discerning populations through identifications of hemoglobin, muscle myogen and transferrins. The later protein is an iron binding -globulin which can be located in electrophorograms either by autoradiography or specific staining reagents. Using transferrins as the marker, population studies have been made on several fish species, including cod, eel and tunas. Transferrin polymorphism have also been reported to occur in sera of several freshwater fishes. In this account, we report transferrin phenotypes of Channa punctatus. ========================================================== In all 151 fish were analysed; 86 from Rewa and 65 from Sidhi, Madhya Pradesh. Sera were obtained from blood clots of individual fish which were bled by severing the caudal peduncle. A few crystals of ferric ammonium sulfate were added to sera gels were made and electroporetized essentially in the system of Davis. Transferrin bands were visualized as faint green bands by soaking the gels in hydroxilamine hydrochloride and nitroso R regent system. Sera showed the existence of transferrin groups. The comparison of their relative mobilities shows the observed groups are the combination of at least 3 transferrin zones. The fastest has been designated AA and the next as BB. The slower-most transferrin CC could not be observed, but on the basis of the existence of BC occurrence as a population unit in other localities can be predicted. Table-1, Genotype composition and gene frequencies of Channa Punctatus transferrins as compared to the Hardy-Weinberg proportions
Collection site No. of samples analysed AA Obs. 36.0 86 Exp. 37.8 9.08 0.01 37.0 0.61 Obs. 30.0 65 Exp. 28.4 6.44 0.03 27.0 0.94 6.0 0.0 26.0 3.0 4.673 0.661 0.315 0.023 BB 6.0 CC AB BC X2 TA TB TC Phenotypes Alleles
Rewa (M.P.) Sindhi (M.P.)
0.0 42.0 2.0 5.052 0.662 0.325 0.011
===========================
* Assistant Professor, Department of Zoology, Agra College, Agra (U.P.)
226
Obs. Observed; Exp. Expected. Assuming the genetic control by three codominant alleles, and applying the Hardy-Weinberg law, the distribution of genotype in the sample was calculated (Table I). The observed values of TA, TB are in agreement with those calcuated on the basis of Hardy-Weinberg principle and equilibrium existed in the case of their heterozygote TAB also. In the case of BC heterozygote, the calculated value shows difference with that of the observed. This fact and the difference with that of the observed. This fact and the apparent failure to detect C genotype may indicate the extremely low representation of this group of transferrin in this area. The excess of dificiencies in heterozygotes may occur owing to differential fertility, viability or changes in composition of population on account of new recruitment or loss of fish through migration to other ponds. It should be expected in this case, since the composition of population in perennial ponds may change during monsoon months when connections are made with other water sources which would disturb the equilibrium. The detection of transferrin polymorphism even in such a small sample as the one investigated is of interest. The occurrence of more than one transferrins in sera of this species indicates that like other fish species the marker exists in multiple forms and that the higher extent of polymorphism is not confined to marine fishes. Since individual difference are not discernible on the basis of morphometric character, the study suggests the importance of using transferrin as the index of variations in population units.
====================== References1. Manwell, C. and Baker, C. M. A. (1970), in Molecular Biology and Origin of Species : Heterosis, Protein Polymorphism and Animal Breeding, Sidgwick and Jackson, London, p. 100. Tsuyuki, H. and Robberts, E. (1969), J. Fish. Res. Bd. Canada, 26, 2633. de Ligny, W. (1968), Proc. 11th European Conference on Animal Groups and Bichemical Plymorphism, P.W.N., Wara, pp. 527. Giblett, E.R., Hickman (1959), C.G. and Smithies, O., Nature, p 1589. Nyman, L. and Westin (1969), L., Rept. Inst. Freshwater Res., Drottingholm, 49, 165. Blumberg, B.S. (1960), Proc. Soc. Biol. Med., 104, 25. Moller, D. (1966), Nature, 212, 824. Drilhon, A., Find, J. Boffa, G., Amouch, P. and Drouhet (1966), J. Compt. Rend. Acad. Sci., Paris, 262, 1315. Barrett, I. and Tsuyuki (1967), H., Copeia, 3, 551. Fujino, K. and Kang, T. (1968), Genetics, 39, 79. Kirpichnikov, V.S. (1973), In Genetics and Mutagenesis of Fish, ed. J. H. Schroeder, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, p. 223. Davis, B.J. Ann. N.Y. (1964), Acad., Sci., 121, 404.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Pond Fish Culture in Rural areas of Bhopal District

*Chourey Pratibha, **Durga Meena, ***Geeta Saxcena, ****Alok Verma
========================================================== Abstract- Present study highlights the development of pond fish culture through the grassroots level. The study was conducted in rural area of Bhopal. The result of the study reveals that, Management and cultural factors affected pond fish production. The study also indicated that higher production could be achieved by to implementation some techniques, which are discuses in this paper. Key-Words- Pond fish culture, management practices. ========================================================== Introduction-Bhopal city is capital of M.P. is known as city of Lakes owing to the occurrences of large no. of water bodies situated in and around the city. At Present, 5906 ha. Water areas available in Bhopal district and the total fish production of 2011-2012 are 810.10 tones. Pond fish culture can generate income and employment in rural areas of Bhopal and improve the quality of life of the rural poor. Fish culture in ponds is an old profession with earliest practices going back to prehistoric time. Pond fish culture is being promoted widely in Asia, Africa and Central America as a method of improving the nutritional levels of present and future population. Objective of the study: Study of fish culture practices in rural areas of Bhopal. Analysis the factors, which are affecting fish production. Analysis, how to increase fish production in study areas. Methodology- The field study was conducted in 4 ponds which are situated in rural area of Bhopal, they are Manikhedi pond,Int khedi pond,Bakania pond and Khedi pond. The information for study was collected from the primary data and secondary data. The main objective of the field study was to make analysis of activities of rural pond fishery. Information was collected through a ===========================
* Research Scholar, Government Science and Commerce College, Benazir, Bhopal (M.P.) ** Research Scholar, Government Science and Commerce College, Benazir, Bhopal (M.P.) *** Head, Department of Zoology, Insititute of Excellence Higher Education College, Bhopal(M.P.) **** Department of Zoology,Raja Bhoj Govt.College,Mandideep(M.P.)
228
structured questionnaire, observation and interviews method. Observation- All these water bodies are given to fishery society on leased (patta).Jan pad panchyat are authorized bodies and responsible for auctioning of water bodies. All the detail of fisheries information is mentioned below table no.1 and 2. Table 1:- Fisheries details of study area.
Questions of questionnaire Block Total area(Ha.) Water Area (ha.) Water availability in pond Name of Society Manikhedi pond Bersia 60 ha. 47 ha. 12 months Int khedi pond Funda 15 ha. 10 ha. 9 months Bakania Pond Funda 10.64 ha. 10.64 ha. 12 months Khedi Pond Bersia 14 ha. 10 ha. 12 months
Ownership members Name of species IMC, Common carp Fishing 4-5 times frequency per week Catch per 70-80 kg netting Members are Untrained trained/untrained
Ambedkar machua sahkari samittee 25
Triloki matasya samittee 25 IMC 2-3 times
Rajiv Gandhi Adarsh machua machua samittee samittee 11 IMC 2-3 times 10 IMC 4-5 times
10-15 kg Untrained
35-40 kg Untrained
25-30 kg Untrained
(Source: primary data) Table 2: Estimated stocking density in water bodies.

Name of Pond Area of Pond In Ha. Present seed stocking 3,00,000 50,000 1,50,000 60,000 Standard rate Standard of of seed Stocking Stocking (fry) (ha.) 10000 4,00,000 10000 10000 10000 1,50,000 1,06,400 1,40,000
Manikhedi Pond Int Khedi Pond Bakania Pond Khedi Pond
40.00 15.00 10.64 14.00
(Source: primary data) Result and Discussion- In the study area, fish farmers are used poor quality of artificial feeds, arbitory stocking of fish seeds, and also fish farmers are not trained for fish culture. Adjustment of species ratio is the main criteria for optimum fish production, similarlary Jena (2008) observed that a proportion of 30 40 % surface feeders (silver and catla), 30-35 % mid water feeder (rohu and grass carp) and 30-40 % bottom feeder (common carp and mrigal)
229
are commonly adopted depending on the productivity of the pond. Both size and density of fish are important to achieve high yield. Fingerling of 150 mm in size constitute the best stocking material according to Jena (2008) but it is difficult to obtain them and hence fish seed of 60-100 mm is generally stocked.Sarkar(2002)reported that stocking of small size of fishes may result higher mortalities and slow grow during the initial months.Fish production also affected by knowledge of fish farmers about fish culture. Shashikant et al (2001) survey work clearly indicated that the FFDA fish farmers were having better knowledge about fisheries practices as compared to non FFDA farmers. A significant difference in the knowledge of fish culture management practices between. Conclusion- Pond fish culture mostly depended upon selected fish seed, manure and fertilization, artificial feeding, pond management and fish farmer awareness. Pond fish production may be enhance, to avoid arbitory stocking fish seed, size and density of fish seed both are properly managed and fish farmer should be well trained for fish culture. Acknowledgement- Iam thankful to Department of zoology Govt.science and commerce college,Benazir,Bhopal to provide me all these facilities to complete this study.
====================== References1. Jena,J.K.(2008) Sustainable Carp Culture.TrainersTraining Programme on Recent trends in Aquaculture and Fisheries Development,Organised by CIFA,Bhubaneswar UNDP & Directorate of Fisheries,Govt. of Orissa,17-20 march:11-14. Sarkar,S.K.(2002)Fresh water fish culture.Vol.1.,Daya Publishing Houses Dehli. Shashikant,S.K.,Mahajan Srivastav,B.S. Kirar and R.K. Shukla(2001)Impact of fish Farmers Development Programme of FFDA on the Knowledge of selected fisheries management Practices of small,marginal fish farmers and fishermen of Balaghat District,Madhya Pradesh.Journal Inland Fish.Soc. of India,34(2):4350.
2. 3.
Assessment of the Indian species of Digenetic Trematodes of Plagiorchiidae Family in Vindhyan Region of Madhya Pradesh
*Pushpa Singh **Pushpendra Singh
========================================================== Abstract- Digenea is well known group of platyhelminthes since remote past. Before critical Assessment of species, genera of family Plagiorchiidae, it is essential to give an account of 18 Indian species of digenetic trematodes of plagiorchiidae family were studied from Vindhyan region of Madhya Pradesh and arranged according the latest systematic position are given in this paper. ========================================================== Introduction- Vindhyan region, where this research work is being done, is a place of great antiquity. This is the original home of Tansen. Who bejewleled the court of Akber, the Great. It was, here, that the worlds first while tigerMahan was caught and his progeny is now the delight of many zoos, all over the world. In the suburb of Rewa, there is a village called Mukundpur. It is here that the one of the last Mugal kings- Akbar Ali was born. Rewa is the head quarter of Rewa commissionary. The area of this district is 22,468 s.q. miles. The main objective of his study were to evaluate the present state of knowledge of the species of digenetic trematode parasite of plagiorchildae family of Vindhyan region. As such the present studies of the Indian species of digenetic trematodes of plagiorchiidae family from certain vertebrates host of Vindhyan region for which the author feels that it would certainly add further more data to the knowledge of the subject to this significant area. Regarding the classification of digenetic trematoda the position of the systematic unit is in state of flux. Tripathi (1991, 1994) has given extensive review on the systematic of digenetic trematodes of Madhya Pradesh the author has given the justification of utilizing the present classification suggested by Mehra and Amply followed Mehras classification for the present paper. Material and Method- The parasite where collected from different vertebrates hosts ranging from fishes, amphibians and Reptiles. These vertebrate host were collected from different localities of Vindhyan region ===========================
* ** Department of Zoology, Govt. Vivekanand P.G. College Maihar, Satna (M.P.) Department of Zoology, Govt. Vivekanand P.G. College Maihar, Satna (M.P.)
231
Nehru Nagar, Nipania like, Lakhauribag, of Govindgarh, Satna, Maihar, Sidhi and various other localities with in 35-60 Km is distance from Rewa.On procuring the vertebrates hosts. they were Identified and examined carefully, firstly the buccal cavity was opened and examined. Then the Alimentary canal was taken out and cut into suitable parts. Every part was separately examined most of the collection of parasites was made from the alimentary canal. other organs of host like liver, Kidney, lungs, urinary bladder, oviduct, cloca, eyewall and orbits were also examined. Result and Discussion- The present study deals with the assessment of the Indian species of the digenetic trematodes of plagiorchiidae family of Vindhyan region. The author has attempted here to discuss the various views regarding the 18 Indian species of Digenetic trematodes of playorchiidae family in vindhyan region. Digenea occurring in different localities of Vindhyan region. As such 18 species of the family plagior chiidae were collected and Identified for their studied which include 8 genera as shown the list of table-1.
Table 1, Indian species of digenetic trematodes of Plagiorchiidae family.
S.No. Classification of the Trematodes & Authority Plagiorchis stunkardi Dwivedi, 1970 Bilorchi mehrai Dwivedi, 1963 B. rewai Pidiha, 1977 Tremiorchsi ranarum Mehra and Negi, 1926 T. vanarum Verma, 1930 T. mehrai Rai, 1962 Astiotrema spinosa Chatterji, 1933 A. giganticum Tiwari, 1958 A mehrai Tiwari, 1958 A. loossii Mehra, 1931 A rewaiensis n. sp. A longicirra Hakeem, 1987 Xenopharynx solus Nicoll, 1912 X. jagtai n. sp.
Encyclometra colubrimurorum Rud 1819, Dollfus, 1937 E. trilobus Hakeem, 1987 Spinometra chauhani Pidiha, 1977 Telorchis chauhani Dandotia, 1975
Host
Location
Locality
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10 11. 12. 13.
Chamaeleon calcavatus Kachhuga intermdia Kachhuga kachhuga Rana tigrina Rana tigrina Bufo melanosticus Dryophis mycterizans Kachhuga kachhuga Kachhuga dhongoka Kachhuga intermedia Kachhuga kachhuga Kachhuga kachhuga Tropidonotus pisccator P. piscator
T. piscator
Intestine Gall bladder Gall bladder Intestine Intestine Intestine Rectum Intestine Instine Intestine Intestine Intestine Gall bladder
Jabalpur Rewa Jablpur Satna Sirmour Rewa Sirmour Rewa Jabalpur, Mauganj Pipariya Jabalpur Rewa Jabalpur Sidhi Jabalpur Maihar Raipur Rewa Jabalpur Jhiria, Rewa Rewa Ghoghar , Rewa Jabalpur Rewa
Year of collection and recorded by 1993 Dwivedi 2000 Patel 1993 Dwivedi 2000 Patel 1975 Pidiha 2002 Patel 1964 Dwivedi 200 Patel 1964 Dwivedi 2002 Patel 1962 Raj 2002 Patel 1963 Dwivedi 2001 Patel 1964 Tiwari 2000 Patel 1958 Tiwari 2000 Patel 1963 Dwivedi 2001 Patel 2000 Patel 1988 Tripathi 2001 Patel 1963 Dwivedi 1989 Tripathi 2001 Patel 2000 Patel
1958 Saksena 1972 Tripathi 1987 Dwivedi 2002 Patel 1987 Tripathi 2001 Patel 1975 Pidiha 2000 Patel 1975 Dandotia 2002 Patel
14.
15.
Gall bladder
Oesophagus, Stomach
Rewa
Raipur, Rewa Betual Jabalpur Chindwara Rewa Dihia, Rewa Gwalior Rewa
16. 17. 18.
T. piscator Kachhuga kachuga K. kachhuga
Stomach Intestine Intestine
232
Mostly Identified the host of Digenetic trematodes are Kachhuga Kachhaga in 6 types of trematodes are founds, tropidenotus Pisccator in 3 types of trematodes, Rana tigrina 2 types of trematodes, Kachhuga intermedia 2 type of trematodes speices and other host of one species founds in digenetic trematodes. The total 18 Indian species of digenetic trematodes of plagiorchiidae family which were collected and Identified in during present investigation.
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Britt, H.G. (1947) Chromosomes of digenetic trematodes. Amer Nature, 81: 276296 Dwivedi M.P. and Chauhan, B.S. (1970) On Some digenetic Trematodes Part III J. Zool. Soc. India 22 (1&2) : 165-172 Hakeem, Khema (1989) Studies on the trematode parasite of certain vertebrates of Rewa region, Ph.D. Thesis A.P.S. University, Rewa (M.P.) Mukherji, R.P. and Ghos, R.K. (1970) Studies on some amphibians trematodes from Uttar Pradesh and West Bengal. Ind. J. Hdm. 22(1) : 61-78 pp. Tripathi N.P. (1989) studies on a new trematode spelotrema Jagatai sp. Nov. from various monitor from Rewa (M.P.) IV National convention of Indian Helminthologists, H.S.I. NoP. 26, 18. 1989 Tripathi, N.P. (1992) Studies on digenetic trematodes, their morphology, systematic, cytology and phylogenetic relations, D.Sc. Thesis A.P.S. University Rewa (M.P.) , 1992. Tripathi, N.P. (1993) Studies on a new Trematode Astriotrema rewaiensis n. sp. from the intestine of Rana tigrina (Trematoda : plagiorchiidae) Dr. C.B. Shrivastava. Tripathi N.P., Singh, Mamta and Mathur Rachna (1995) Ecological studies of Digenetic trematodes of alimentary canal to amphibians host of Rewa region. (Trematoda : Digenea) Proc. 9th all India cong. of zool. ESP. 12 : pp 73 Burdhuan University (West Bengal) Sept. 26-28, 1995. Yamaguti, S. (1971) Snapsis of Digenetic trematodes of vertebrates, vol. I & II keeguku publ. co. Japan.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Mathematical Modelling: Applications

* Rupa Salhotra
========================================================== Abstract- Mathematical models are designed to describe physical system by equations or more in general by logical and computational structures. Mathematical modelling operates as a science by means of methods and mathematical structures with well defined objectives. Mathematical modelling consist of simplifying real world problems and representing them as mathematical problems, solving the mathematical problems and interpreting these solutions in language of the real world. Conversion of the real world phenomenon under certain conditions into mathematical formulation is known as mathematical modelling. ========================================================== Mathematical modelling prepares the way for better design or control of a system. It allows the efficient use of modern computing capabilities and successful in many further applications.The use of mathematics in solving real world problems has become widespread especially due to the increasing computation power of digital computer and computing methods both of which have facilitated the handling of lengthy and complicated problems. Mathematical modelling is basically of two kinds 1. Empirical model- This method of modelling is based on experiments. Large numbers of experiments are performed to study the variation of the physical quantity with respect to another physical quantity. Variation of a physical quantity with respect to another is being represented graphically. Based on these graphs the mathematical equation is derived which helps us in optimization of any problem. 2. Theoretical models- In this modelling variables are used to denote physical quantity (for example: displacement, time, temperature, etc.) and the variation of these physical quantities are represented in the form of mathematical equation. The graphical representation of this equation helps us in optimization of any problem. Modelling process can be divided into three main steps Formulation Solution Evaluation ===========================
* Assistant Professor Mathematics, Govt. Navin Kanya Mahavidyalaya, Raipur
234
Types of modelling1. Linear or non linear 2. Static or dynamic 3. Discrete or continuous 4. Deterministic or probabilistic Some of the applications of mathematical modelling in various fields of science, arts and environment are Computer vision Robotics Computer animation Protein folding Spreading of infectious diseases Animal and plant breeding Chemical equilibrium Molecular modelling Realistic computer graphics Labour data analysis Wind channels Optimal routing Automatic translation Earthquake prediction Structural optimization Climate prediction Blood circulation models Analysis of election Environmental modelling Water resources Forestry
====================== References11. 2. Mathematical modelling in social and behavioral Sciences;Wei-Bin Zhang, Ritsumeikan Asia Pacafic University, Japan. Mathematical modelling and new theories of learning,Jo Boaler, Stanford University, Teaching mathematics and its applications,vol20,issue3,2001,p.121128
Science and Society

*S.K. Srivsatava **Reena Singh
========================================================== Abstract- Science has played huge and important role in the development of our society, making the life more easier and comfortable. But, global warming has now become a major problem for our survival, in the present scenario of globalization. We should think for development of society, checking the global warming leading to a peaceful environment. ========================================================== Science has played a major role to uplift the status and life style of human being. It has improved the living standard of mankind multifolds in multiferous direction. It has created the life more easier in different aspects of society and civilization. Apart from improving the quality life, it is successful in improvement of cultural and civilization aspects, avoiding prejudice and solving social problems. It has improved the living standard of rural and urban people in India, with homogeneous development of rural and urban areas. Science with success has served the society in various aspects of life as Agriculture, food, health, clothing, information, transport etc. In the field of science, failures are stepping stones of success, success is neither immediate nor certain and sometimes it takes several years and sometimes entire life. The successful implementation of scientific researches are very much helpful in improving the status of society to a greater extent. The present paper deals with the study of the impact of sciences mainly chemistry on the society in the modern scientific age of globalization. Chemistry is an old science that influence every aspect of life on earth and it is also a mother science, may be called as central science. It stands at the pivot of science. On the one hand it deals with Biology and provides explanations for how molecules determine the processes of life. On the other hand it mingles with Physics as well as Mathematics and finds explanations for chemical phenomena in the fundamental processes and the particles of the universe. Chemistry has made an impact on almost every aspect of daily life from toothpaste to life saving medicines, and the essential feature of this central science is synthesis of different molecules. Modern ===========================
* ** Reader (Chemistry), Smt. Indira Gandhi Govt. P.G.College Lalganj, Mirzapur Smt. Indira Gandhi Govt. P.G.College Lalganj, Mirzapur (U.P.)
236
chemistry is 200 year old which is much more accelerated with organic synthesis in past about 90 years. It is the science of molecules and their transformations leading to different shapes and colours having different properties for the betterment of mankind and society. One or two atoms can convert a fuel to a poison, change a colour, render an inedible substance edible, or replace a pungent odour with a fragrant one. That changing a single atom can have such consequences is the wonder of chemical world. It can be summed up in the famous advertising slogan used by du Pont: Better Things for Better Living through Chemistry-Particularly through Organic Chemistry. It has a unique place in our pattern of understanding of universe. The essence of chemical science thus finds its full expression in the words of Leonardo da Vinci; Where nature finishes producing its own species, man begins, using natural things, and in harmony with this very nature, to create an infinity of species. There are tremendous changes in our life-style in the last 50 years. One of the most significant changes has been the gradual replacement of natural material, such as wood, wool and cotton with man made synthetic polymers; leading to a plastic society. Tereylene (Decron or Teron) is the most important polyester which has revolutionized the cloth industry. The polymer melt can be spun into fibres and combined with naturally occurring fibres and cotton. The composition of cotton and polyester yields a fabric (e.g. 60/40 cloth-Terecot), that dries quickly without wrinkling, yet still retains the coolness and comfort of 100% cotton. Some of the polymers like Nylon-6,6, Teflon, Bakelite etc. are very much useful to the mankind in various aspects. Nylon-6,6 was developed as a synthetic fibre for production of stockings and other wearing apparels. It was introduced to the public at the New York Worlds fair in 1939. It is used to make fibres for clothing and carpeting, filaments for fishing lines and ropes, bristles for brushes, and molded objects such as gears and bearings. For the better application no lubrication is required, because nylon surfaces are inherently slippery. Teflon is familiar because of its use as non-stick coating, particularly for cooking utensils. Nirlep non-stick frying pans have Teflon coating. Because of its low chemical reactivity, excellent toughness, electrical and heat resistance, it is widely used as insulation for electrical items and in the manufacture of gaskets and vales. Bakelite is widely used for making molded products such as handles on electrical and cooking utensil, electrical plates and switches and as a bonding adhesive in plywood. Epoxy Resins are well known for their bonding properties, are used in adhesives such as Araldite, Fevicol etc. So, various polymers being synthesized have huge applications, making the life more easier, comfortable and economical. Polythene is widely used in packaging, house ware, such as buckets and dustbins, cable insulation and flexile bottles etc. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) is used in imitation leathers, floor covering, corrugated roofing material etc. With the addition of plasticizer, it has a rubber like texture, widely used in squeeze
237
bottles, pipes etc. But, excessive use of these polymers (Polythene etc) have created a major problem of their disposal resulting the pollution problem and global- warming. Science plays a huge and important role in society with relation to shelter and clothing. We have come up with new paints and epoxy sprays that protects shelters from wear and tear inflicted by rain, wind, sun and pollution. These coating and paints are designed to make properties look better, perform better and last longer. Thermal chemical compounds may protect roof-tops and also help structures stay at right temperatures. These chemical compounds have been proven to reduce energy costs and to create a more comfortable shelter for use as a private residence, business headquarters or any other purpose. Chemical engineers who create fabric that offer special, stain-resistant properties are also designing technologically advanced fabric that come out of the dryer without wrinkles or creases. These new fabric are reducing the amount of time it takes to care for clothes; they are also helping the environment by making it easier for people to avoid dry-cleaning and other energy wasting cleaning methods. Today, chemical technology is revolutionizing the way people wear and take care of clothing. Each fabric can be chosen based on its aesthetic appeal, as well as its special chemical properties. Stain resistant fabrics contain a coating that will allow liquids, such as coffee or red wine, to roll off of the surface; make them easier to clean, in the event that a stain does transfer on to fibre. In the field of Agriculture, Urea synthesized by Friedrich Wholer in 1928, has played a very important role as a fertilizer. Several pesticides, insecticides etc. have been synthesized which helped in improving the crop production leading the development of villages and rural areas. Various chemical substances have been used in storage of seeds, grains and food processing for improving their shelf-life. They should be safely used only in desired quantity; can create problems for existence of mankind. There is a great tragedy in the history of India, on December 3, 1984 (Bhopal Gas Tragedy), Union Carbide pesticide plant released methyl isocyanate (MIC) gas, resulting in the exposure of over 5,00,000 people. MIC is an intermediate chemical in the production of carbamate pesticide. About 8,000 to 10,000 people died within 72 hours of tragedy and about 25,000 have since died from gas related diseases. Man needs Food, Health and Energy; and science plays a key role in it. Sir Alexander Fleming got the Nobel Prize for medicine in 1945 for discovery of penicillin. After that different antibiotics and life saving medicines have been synthesized. These chemicals and medicines are being successful in curing different harmful diseases, resulting the increase in average age and decrease in death rate in India.With the advancement of science, structure property correlation of materials could be better understood and the new discipline of science known as Materials science and Nano Science has been emerged. It
238
is claimed that 21st Century is the century of nano materials (The word nano is taken from Greek word Nanos meaning Dwarf. It is a prefix used to describe One billionth of something), The change in properties in Nano Regime with increased surface area leads to New chemical processes through changes in chemical reactivity, melting and boiling point etc. There is a growing need to develop clean, nontoxic and environmentally friendly (Green Chemistry) procedures for syntesis and assembly on nanoparticles. Carbon nanotubes are the natures finest gift to mankind, the most amazing and wonderful nano structure that the human being has discovered so far. Carbon naontube (CNTs) are the allotropes of carbon; such cylindrical carbon molecules have novel properties that make them potentially useful in many applications in nanotechnology, electronics, optics and other fields of materials science. Nano sizing causes changes in colour. Bulk gold is golden in colour whereas 1nm, 20nm and 100nm gold particle are brown-yellow, red and purple-pink colured respectively. Nano-gold is recent years has drawn more attention from researches as a potential catalyst in chemical processing, pollution control and fuel cell applications. Osaka National Research Institute in Japan, recently commercialized nano scale gold particles supported on ferric oxide as the ODOR EATERS in bath rooms. By changing the shapes of gold nano spheres into cylindrical gold nanorods, they can detect malignant tumars hidden deeper under the skin, as in case with breast cancer and selectively destroy them without harming the healthy cells. Zinc oxide is interesting compound widely used in medicinal purposes (cold, rashes, antiseptics, sunscrean lotions etc.), manufacturing of rubber as rubber cure (or as filler), and pigment for paints and coatings. It has promising signs in the filed of nanotechnology, that could replace silicon as the main substrate in chip manufacturing. Structured polymeric fibres with diameter to the nanometer scale results in a number of favourable properties such as increase in surface to volume ratio, decrease in pore size and a drop in structural defects, and superior mechanical characteristics. As a result these fibres are good candidates for use in number of areas such as high performance filtration, chemical-biological protective clothing and polymer composite reinforcement. Conclusion- In nut shell, science has played huge and important role in the development of our society, making the life more easier and comfortable. But, global warming has now become a major problem for our survival, in the present scenario of globalization. We should think for development of society, checking the global warming leading to a peaceful environment. In the words of Albert Einstein, If mankind is to survive, we shall require a substantially new manner of thinking. We must have high ambition and high thinking with patience to achieve something great useful to the society. Success is the best friend of patience and in fact, they are always together. Science with success in positive direction will definitely lead the society to a significant level with upliftment of
239
socio-economic status of the mankind. It is better to prevent the waste formation, rather than to treat or clean up waste after it is formed. We should develop and design such methods and reactions which are eco-friendly with no waste formation. It will be helpful in checking the pollution and global-warming leading to a clean environment. We should develop the concept of green chemistry for pollution prevention, with the mission to promote innovative chemical technologies that reduce or eliminate the use or generation of hazardous substance in the design, manufacture and use of chemical products. Green chemistry will be very much helpful in creating a clean and green society with green environment. Substances and forms of substances used in a chemical process should be chosen so as to minimize the potential for chemical accidents, including releases, explosions and fires. So, with the new concept of green chemistry and nano sciences, the society will be highly benefited with development and advancement, achieving a sustainable civilization. For a sustainable future society, it is necessary to redirect the traditional chemical industry towards one that is environmentally acceptable (green and clean) and in harmony with the society.
====================== References1. 2. CNR Rao, P.P. Edwards et. al, chem. Eur. J. 8(1), 2002, 28 Singh and Das, Materials Research Bulletin, 2008
Impact of Age in Adoption of Diversified Farming Technology in the Development of Rural Community *Jitendra Singh Bhadauria
========================================================== Abstract- Age of an individual is influencing factor in taking various decision in his life . The rate of working of steps involve in an innovation decision process are awareness, interest, evaluation, trail and adoption are influenced by the age factor. The level of these elements may differ in person to person according to their age. Difference of age may also reflect experiences of an individual. Keeping these things in mind a research was conducted in Western Uttar Pradesh with an specific objective to compare the social profile with age variables of the adopters & non-adopters to observe the role of Uttar Pradesh Diversified Agricultural Support Project (UPDASP) regarding rural development in Western Uttar Pradesh funded by world bank. In the study age taken as important variable that affects the adoption behaviour of technology and intensification of technology for the development of rural community. This research offers an important findings that is useful to understand how age of the people is influenced the adoption of technology. Locale of the research was selected purposively. To get first hand information 200 respondents (100 Adopters & 100 non adopters ) were interviewed from two blocks. The selection of respondents, villages, & blocks was made randomly. Data were collected with help of interview schedule then data were tabulated analised by using statistical tools. The respondents were belonging to Kshatriya Brahmin (Upper Caste), Jaat (Backward Caste), Chamar, Balmiki etc (Schedule Caste). To test the significant difference in the age between adopters & non-adopters regarding adoption of technology Null Hypothesis (H0) was formed. The findings of the study revealed that majority of the respondents were belonging with the age of twenty eighty years to forty eighty years and age variables was not effective in the adoption of diversified farming technology between two groups in the development of rural community. ========================================================== Introduction- Age is an important factor to learn and adopt the new technology. It affects the human body morphologicaly, physiologicaly and neurologicaly ===========================
* Assistant Professor & Head, Department of Agricultural Extension, Janata Mahavidyalaya Ajitmal, Distt. Auraiya (UP)
241
too. Generaly when people in the age of adult may learn more and more whereas in the old age learning process decrease. The factor of age is also related to the awareness and adoption of new technology for the development of human beings. Therefore, to asses the impact of age in adoption of technology under the Uttar Pradesh Diversified Agricultural Support Project a study entitled The Role of Uttar Pradesh Diversified Agricultural support project regarding rural development in Western Uttar Pradesh in district Baghpat was under taken with an specific objective to compare the social profile with age variables. In the study age was taken as important variable that effects the adoption behaviour of the technology and intensification of technology for the development of people. Through out the past decade, changing demographic patterns and cultural influences have led to an increasingly older workforce ( Sharit & Czaja, 1994, Warr, 1990 ) Although age difference have been of significant interest to the researchers for over six decades ( Girard, 1993, Mc Carty & Shrum, 1993, Minton & Schneiderays, 1980, Rhodes, 1983 ). There has been relatively little research on the enfluence of age on technology adoption decision. As result of todays fast paced and complex work environment, organization have often elected to deploy sophisticated information technology to help employee manages this complexity ( Gilroy & Desaie, 1986 ) Yet there is some evidence that age has an important influences on technology usages. A long time of research exists that looks socio cognitive changes among individuals based on chronological age. For many years researchers argued that aging was accompanied by a decline in intellectual ability of intelligence ( Wechsler,1958). Today there is less support for a unidimentional view of intelligence rather more contemporary views have focused on spesific type of abilities having different age while performance scores decline with age. (Botwinic, 1967, 1977 ). Likwise, crystallized intelligence does not change with age, while fluid intelligence can change or remain constant ( Baltes & Lindenberger, 1977, Horn,1977, Schaie & wills, 1986). Research Methodology-The purpose of this study is to present, impact of age on adoption of diversified farming system in rural india. This research investigated age difference in individual adoption and sustained usages of technology. Adopters and non adopters behaviour were studied at the point of adopters of diversified technology through Uttar Pradesh diversified Agricultural Support Project compare to rural people those were adopted the technlogy and compare between older people and younger people technology usages decision. Keeping in view the opinions were obtained through personal interview with the pre structured schedule. The data thus collected were coded, tabulated, analysed and interpreted in the light of objectives set up for the study. The survey was carried out in selected blocks of Baghpat district Uttar pradesh for collecting related information through direct interview. Selection of Area - District Baghpat of Western Uttar Pradesh was selected
242
purposively for these reason. 1. It is reported that district Baghpat has covered under Uttar Pradesh diversified project. 2. In the district most of the farmers were deeply interested to diversify their agriculture. . Researcher was familier with local dilect of the district. 4. Good transport facilities were available for conducting research work properly. 5. Communication facilities were more effective in Baghpat district. Selection of Blocks, villages and respondents District Baghpat has six blocks namely Baghpat, Baraut, Binouli, Chhaparauli, Khekra and Pilana. Two blocks namely Baghpat and Pilana were selected by using simple random method of sampling. The location of blocks is showing in figures. The list of villages procured from community development blocks head quarters and only ten village were selected from each block using simple random method were selected for the study. The lists of villagers were obtained from village development officer (VDO) for the selection of respondents. Simple random methods were used for this purpose. All the head of the families treated as respondents. Respondents participate in UPDASP called adopters and those were not participated in UPDASP called non adopters. For selection of adopters and non adopters, the list of each village containing the name of villagers divide in to two parts that is adopters and non adopters. Five adopters and five non adopters, total ten responded were selected from each selected village. Thus total hundred adopters and hundred non-adopters were selected randomly for further study. The block-wise selection of villages, adopters and non adopters are indicated in the table. Follwing table shows the name of villages in block Baghpat and number of adopters and nonadopters selected from the each villages. Table No. : 01 Showing number of villages, adopters, non adopters in Baghpat block.
S.N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Name of villages Chopara-Maheshpur Pabla-Begamabad Nethala Sarurpur-Kala Ladhawari Baghpat Kherki Meetali Gauripur-Jawahar Nagar Faizpur-Ninana Total No. of Adopters 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 50 No. of Nonadopers 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 50 Total 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 100
243
Follwing table shows the name of villages in block Pilana and number of adopters and nonadopters selected for the each villages Table No : 2 Showing number and village, No. of adopters, Non-adoptersin Pilana block.
S.N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Name of villages Dhikauli Chamarawal Saidpur Puthar Daula Baleni Khindora Dolcha Pilana Mukari Total No. of Adopters 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 50 No. of Nonadopters 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 50 Total 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 100
Thus total of twenty villages, two hundred respondents were selected for study. Following table shows the summariese date. Table No : 3 Showing summarise data of selected blocks.
S.N. 1 2 Name of Blocks Baghpat Pilana Total No. of villages 10 10 20 No. of adopters 50 50 100 No. of Nonadopters 50 50 100 Total 100 100 200
Result and Discussion- The age has been found to be an important factor effecting adoption of innovations in many studies. Age was measured as the number of years completed by the respondents at the time of data collection. The age distribution of adopters and non adopters are shown in the table. Table No : 4 Showing age of respondents
S.N. 1 2 3 4 5 Age interval (in years) 18 28 28 38 38 48 48 58 58 and above Total Adopters 12 40 38 6 4 100 Percentage 12 40 38 6 4 100 Non adopters 24 20 26 22 8 100 percentage 24 20 26 22 8 100
Above table shows that 12 percent adopters and 24 percent non adopters have age of 18 28 years. 40 percent adopters and 20 percent non adopters
244
in the age of 28 38 years. 38 percent adopter and 26 percent non adopters have in the age of 38 48 years. And 6 percent adopter and 22 percent non adopters have the age interval of 48 58 years. Only 4 percent adopters and 8 percent non adopters have the age of 58 years or more. Thus It may be concluded that majority of the respondents belong to adopters categories having the age interval of 28 38 years and 38 48 years. In order to find out if there was any significant difference between adopter and non adopters regarding their age, the following null hypothesis was to be tested. Null Hypothesis (Ho)- There was no significant difference between the age of adopters and non adopters. Table No : 5 Showing the total score, Mean score, standard deviation and variance of respondents age regarding their age.
S.N. 1 2 3 4 Particulars Total score Mean score Standard deviation Variance Adopters 3898 38.98 9.01 81.29 Non adopters 40.70 40.70 9.21 84.90
Observated t value 1.50 Tabulated t value 1.75 From the above calculation the calculated value of t is 1.50 which was less than table value of t 1.75 at 5% level of significance. Therefore the null hypothesis was accepted. Hence it was concluded that there was no significant difference regarding the age of two groups . Conclusion- Majority of respondents were belonging to the age of youth. 12 percent adopters and 24 percent nonadopters were the age of 18 to 28 years. 40% adopters and 20% non-adopters, whereas 38% adopters and 26% nonadopters were related to the age of 28 to 38 yrs and 38 to 48 yrs respectively. Only 10 percent adopters and 30% non-adopters were belonging to the age of more than 48 years. The study was also revealed that there were no significant difference between adopters and non-adopters regarding their age. Hence, conclusion had been drawn from the study that age is no hindering factor in the adoption of any technology for development of people in rural area.
====================== References1. Ahamad, A. and S. Isvilonanda (2003), "Rural Poverty and Agricultural Diversification in Thailan", paper presented at the second annual conference of Swedish School of Advance Asia and Pacific Studies (SSAAP) Lund Sweden, October 24-26. Aksoy, M.A. (2005), "The evolution of Agricultural Trade Flows", in M.A. Aksoy and J.C. Beghin (Eds.) (2005), Global Agricultural Trade and Developing countries, The World bank, Washigton, DC U.S.A.
2.
245
3. 4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
10. 11. 12. 13.
14.
15. 16.
17. 18.
19.
20. 21.
Anna, V. (1990) socioeconomic basis of women entrepreneurship SEDME 17 (1), 17-47. Baltes PB, Lundberg U. (1997) Emergence of a powerful connection between sensory and cognitive function across adult life span; A new window to the study of cognitive aging. Psycology and aging 12(1), 12 - 22. Botwinick J. (1967). Cognitive process in maturity and old age. Newyork; Springer. Botwinick (1977). Intellectual abilities. In Barren J E, Schaie K W, Hand book of the psychology of aging. Newyork. Czajas, Sharit J. (1993). Age difference in the performance of computer based work. Psychology of aging, 8, 59-67. Chitamber, J. B. (1990). Introductory Rural Sociology. Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi. Gangwar, B., S. K. Duhoon, D. K. Pandey (2006), "Diversification of Maize Based Cropping Stystem". Indian Farming, I. C.A.R., Vol. 56, No. 6, pp. 20-24, September. Ghurye, G.S. (1957). Caste and class in India, Popular Book Depot, Bombay. Gilroy F, Desaie H. (1986). Computer anixity; Sex, race and age. International Journal of man machine Studies, 35, 711 -719. Girard C (1993). Age gender and suicide; A cross national analysis. American Sociological review, 58(4),553 - 574. Michael G Morris; Vishwanath Venktesh, Personal Psychology; Age difference in technology adoption decision: Implication for a changing workforce. Summer 2000; 53,2; ABI/IHFORM Global page 375.Minton H L, Schneider FW.(1980). I L. Wave land. Nowok, P. J. (1982), "Adoption and diffusion of soil and water conservation practices" in B.C. English, J. A. Maetzole,, B. R. Holding, and E.O. Heady (Eds.) (1982), Future Agricultural Technology and Resource conservation, Iowa State University Press, Ames, Iowa, U.S.A., pp. 214 - 237. NPC (2004), " Vision 2020, Natural planning Commission, Govt. of India, Academic foundation, New Delhi. Pala, Mustafa, Ghoffari, A., and Ketata, Habib (2004) "Taking Research to farmer's field in Iran" ICARDA, Caravan, Review of Agriculture in the dry area, Issue No. 320/21, June/December. Paliwal C.B., I.A.S. Project coordinator UPDASP (2000), ''Project Summery'' Rohitashva Printers Aishbag Road Lucknow. Rai, Mangala (2006), "Evolution of Indian National Agricultural Research System". Hand book of Agriculture Indian Council of Agriculture Research, New Delhi pp. 1-16. Fifth edition. Ramesh Chand (1996), "Diversification through High Value Crops in Western Himalayan Region Evidence from Himanchal Pradesh, . Saini, Amrik S. and Rajveer Singh (1985) "Impact of diversification on Income, Employment and Credit Need of Small Farmers in Panjab", Indian Journal of Agricultural Economics, Vol. 40, No. 3, July-September, pp. 310-316. Ram, M. (1980) High yielding varieties of crops. Oxford, IBH, New Delhi, p. 3. Rao, C. S. and Raheza, P. C. (1965). Evaluation of extension methods for change in attitude towards improved family practices. Indian Journal of Agronomy, Vol. 3, p. 198.
246
22. 23.
24.
25.
Rhodes S. (1983). Age related difference in work attitude and behaviour; A review and conceptual analysis psychological Bulletine, 93(2),328-367. Roy, H. N. (1967). Diffusion of information and farmers response to an improved farm practices. Research Foundation Bulletin, B.A.C. Sabour, Vol. 7&9, pp. 116118. Saini, Amrik S. and Rajveer (1985). "Impact of diversification on Income, Employment and Credit Need of Small Farmers in Panjab", Indian Journal of Agricultural Economics, Vol. 40, No. 3, July-September, pp. 310-316. Schaie K W. Willis S L (1986).Can decline in adult intellectual funtioning be reversed, Developmental Psychology, 22, 223 - 232.
(vkbZ-,l-ch-,u- 978&81&87364&59&7)

(ISBN 978-81-87364-60-3) mDr lanHkZ iqLrdksa esa izdk'ku gsr q vki viuk rF; ijd ,oa rdZ ;qD r 'kks/k i= Hkstdj bl vdknfed dk;Z esa lg;ksx dj ldrs gSaA fgUnh Hkk"kk esa 'kks/k i= ,e-,l- oMZ esa QkUV d`frnso 010] djsDVj lkbt 14] Mcy Lis'k_ vaxzsth Hkk"kk esa VkbEl U;w jkseu QkUV lkbt 14] Mcy Lis'k esa HkstsaA

Effectiveness of Nutrition Education and Osteoporosis Risk factors in Premenopausal Women * Daisy Abraham ** Nanda Gurwara
========================================================== Abstract- A study was done to examine the effectiveness of nutrition education on dairy products and vegetables frequency consumption in premenopausal women. A teaching module on the importance of calcium intake and sources was imparted to 100 premenopausal women. The frequency consumption of dairy products, fruits and vegetables were collected and analysed before and after the administration of teaching module. After the teaching module, a statistically significant (P<0.05) increase in consumption for milk, dairy products , fruits and vegetables was found. The findings of the study conclude that teaching module can be an effective strategy to motivate premenopausal women toward dietary behavior modification to maximize bone peak bone mass and in turn reduce the risk of osteoporosis. Key Words- Dairy products, premenopausal women. ========================================================== Introduction- Osteoporosis is the most common metabolic bone disorder affecting millions worldwide, especially elderly. WHO defines it as bone mineral density that is 2.5 standard deviations or more below the mean peak bone mass. Currently it is estimated that over 200 million people worldwide suffer from this silent disease(1). Randell A et al state that osteoporosis is a global public health problem which affects 55% of American aged 50 and above. Of these 80% are women. It is estimated that 1 in 3 women and 1 in 12 men over age 50 worldwide have osteoporosis. It is responsible for millions of fractures annually mostly involving the lumbar vertebra, hip and wrist. In India, expert group peg the number of osteoporosis patients at approximately 26 million (2003 figures) with the numbers projected to increase to 36 million by 2013(2). Although the symptoms rarely appear before the age of thirty, the disease process begins much earlier.Two major stages of life are critical in the development of osteoporosis. The first is bone growth stage that occurs below the age of 30 (3,4).While the second stage is bone losing stage where bone ===========================
* ** Research Scholar Professor, Department of Home Science,Government Naveen Kanya Mahavidayalaya, Raipur (C.G.)
248
strength and density start to decline in later adulthood . Accordingly, reducing the risk of osteoporosis in later life requires the attainment of the highest bone density during the first three decades of life(5).Factors that may lead to less than optimal bone mass density development and consequently osteoporosis include among others low body mass index, low levels of physical activity, poor nutrition and other factors including smoking, caffeine, intake and the use of certain medications(6) To maximize bone mass, diet should deliver an adequate supply of dietary calcium, and vitamin D besides increasing physical activity during the first three decades of life (7). Thus calcium and vitamin D deficiencies during this period of life increase the risk of osteoporosis in older people(8). Available literatures were also clarified the importance of fruits and vegetables consumption in the prevention of the disease. Fruits and vegetables contain important modifiable protective nutrients for bone health such as magnesium, potassium, vitamin A, K, E, C and carotenoid (5). Previous studies have reported low degree of awareness about osteoporosis especially among women in developed countries (9), which highlighted the need for educational interventions that are directed toward increasing the populations knowledge of osteoporosis risk factors. These educational interventions have proved to be effective in changing the dietary habits to healthier ones as evident in a number of studies(10). Veena Shatrugna et al carried out a study among 289 women from low socio economic group. Of these 119 (41%) were post menopausal and 170(59%) we4re premenopausal. The findings of this study indicated that Indian women from low socio economic groups consumed diets that have inadequate calcium. ( 270 mg/day VS RDA of 600 mg to 1 gm) coupled with too few calories, poor quality proteins and have many vitamin and mineral deficiencies. The multiple regression analysis revealed that calcium intake was one of the important determinants of BMD ( (P<0.05). This study highlights the serious consequences of under nutrition deficient in terms of height, weight, BMI and low calcium intake on the bone health of poor socio economic group. Osteoporosis and bone thinning sets in by the age of 40 and above. Bone health is expensive to monitor, more difficult to treat and by the time osteoporosis and fracture sets in, the condition is irreversible.(11) Materials & Methods- The participants of the study consisted of 100 premenopausal young adults between the age of 30 to 45 years. Lectures were given once in fortnight for 30 minutes each. The participants were informed about their full freedom to either fill out the questionaire or not. The participants were allowed to complete a guided self filling questionnaire before the administration of teaching module on nutrition education. The base line questionnaire assessed the participants demographic charecteristics ( age, height, weight, family monthly income, number of family members) and consumption frequency of dairy products, fruits and vegetables. Consumption
249
frequency of dairy products (milk, curd, cheese and maava, khoa) fruit & vegetables was determined as one or more serving per day, 3-6 servings per week, 1-2 servings per week and once in a month or none. To examine the effectiveness of educational intervention on dietary behavior, participants were asked to complete the baseline questionnaire at the end of 06 months. Data Analysis- Data obtained from the questionnaire at the beginning of nutrition course was compared to those collected at end of 06 months. Proportion of participants in each category was compared before and after the teaching module at P<0.05 statistically. Results- Hundred premenopausal women have participated in the study. The average age was 35.7 2.1 years. The average body mass index was 21.6 3.4 Kg/sq.m. In 32% of participants, the frequency of milk and milk products was essentially one serving a month or none. In 23% of the participants, the intake of milk and milk products was 1-2 serving/day. After the course of nutrition, significant percentage of participants has shifted to more frequent consumption of milk and milk products ( 48% Vs 11 %) ( figure 1).
Figure -1 : Milk & Milk Products:
P E R C E N T A G E
60 50 40 30 20 10 0 1 2 3 4 23 22 15 19 11 3 48 32 Before After
Figure 1. Milk and milk products consumption of studied population before and after educational intervention. 1= one or more serving per day, 2 = 3-6 servings per week, 3 = 1-2 servings per week, 4 = once a month or none. Statistically significant increase in participants who took more servings of milk and yogurt and significant reduction in number of participants who consumed less frequent milk and milk products were found after educational intervention.
CONSUMPTION OF MILK & MILK PRODUCTS
Statistically significant increase in the participants consumption fruits and vegetables was also found. Majority of the participants have shifted to more frequent fruit and vegetable consumption group fig-2 and fig-3) Approximately 42% participants reported once or twice weekly consumption of fruit and only 22% reported once or twice daily consumption of fruits before the nutrition course. These percentages have changed to 19% and 40% after the administration of teaching module. The number of participants who reported that they consume fruits once a month or none were also significantly decreased (13% Vs 3%) after the administration of teaching module on nutrition.
250
Figure -2 : Fruit consumption:

P e r c e n t a g
50 40 30 20 10 0 1 35 22
40 23
42
19 13 6
Before After
Figure 2. Fruits consumption of studied population before and after educational intervention. 1= one or more serving per day, 2 = 3-6 servings per week, 3 = 1-2 servings per week, 4 = once a month or none. Statistically significant increase in number of participants consuming more fruits and significant decrease in number of participants who consumed less frequent fruits were found after educational intervention.
Consumption of fruits
Figure -3 : Vegetable consumption:

60 50 40 30 20 10 0 1 2 3 4 6 4 40 Before After
P e r c e n t a g
50
Figure 3. Vegetables consumption of studied population before and after educational intervention.1= one or more serving per day, 2 = 3-6 servings per week, 3 = 1-2 servings per week, 4 = once a month or none. Statistically significant increase in number of participants consuming more vegetables and significant decrease in number of participants who consumed less frequent vegetables were found after educational intervention.
Consumption of vegetables
For vegetable, on the other hand, a statistically significant increase in participants who consume once or more per day and 3-6 servings per week was observed after the nutrition course ( P<0.05) figure -3) Discussion- The results of this study provide evidence that administration of teaching module on nutrition education is a practical and an effective method to reduce osteoporosis risk factors among university female students. It seems to work through promoting positive dietary changes that can maximize peak bone mass. After the teaching, the consumption of dairy products, fruits and vegetables were markedly increased as compared to baseline. Calcium, the essential mineral of bone is mostly found in a one class of food, namely milk. Therefore milk and products are the major sources of dietary calcium. Although Calcium is also available in non milk sources including ragi, horse gram, vegetables like cauliflower leaves, colocassia leaves (arvi ka saag),these things are not consumed on a daily basis . There is a close relationship between vitamin K and osteoporosis. Vitamin K is involved in the formation of osteocalcin, and other proteins specific for bone formation(12)Vitamin C is an essential cofactor for formation of collagen, a protein that helps in strengthening bones.. In addition, it is a powerful reducing agent, capable of scavenging reactive oxygen species which are involved in the bone resorption.Vitamin A is needed for bone remodeling process but, high intake of this vitamin has been postulated to be associated with osteoporosis.
251
Minerals such as magnesium, sodium and potassium may also have a role in the development and prevention of osteoporosis. Magnesium and potassium help in maintaining bone mineral density while excess of sodium is associated with bone loss since sodium intake is a strong determinant of urinary excretion of calcium (13).Thusdietsrichinfruitsandvegetablesarealsoessentialfor bone health since they contain such bone protective nutrients . After the course of nutrition, the majority of participants have shifted to more frequent fruits and vegetable consumption group. This finding is in agreement with the finding of Ha and Caine-Bish. The population of premenopausal women are more susceptible to develop unhealthy dietary behaviors such as reduction in milk and increase in soft drinks intake which can predispose them for chronic diseases later in life . Based on the presented data, it seems that premenopausal women do not prefer milk or milk products since 32% take milk once a month or none . After the course of nutrition, the majority of participants have shifted to more frequent milk and vegetable intake. This finding indicates that nutrition education can make changes in the type of milk products and in the quantity of dietary calcium consumed too, and this finding is in agreement with Friedman and Snetselaar (14). The findings of this research indicate the followings. First, a high percentage of participants consume inadequate amounts of dietary Calcium and other protective nutrients essential for bone health which may predispose them for osteoporosis later in life. Such harmful dietary behavior may be attributed to reduced knowledge about osteoporosis risk-related dietary behaviors. Second, educational intervention is effective in reducing the risk factors of osteoporosis among the studied population. Third, premenopausal women are a proper life stage for nutritional education intervention because they are in an age of bone mass build up. Conclusions1. The premenopausal women responded well for educational intervention related to decrease the risk of osteoporosis. 2. The teaching module on nutrition course represents a simple and cost effective strategy to reduce osteoporosis risk factors in early decades of life through increases the awareness and educational knowledge of osteoporosis risk factors and motivate participants toward healthier dietary behavior modification.
====================== References1. 2. 3. 4. Deal CL (2007) " American Medical Journal" Vol 42, no.4 page no. 102-105. Randell A et al, (2005) "Journal of Osteoporosis Int.", Vol 54, no.2, page no. 427 - 428. National Institutes of Health (NIH) (2000). Consensus development Conference statement: osteoporosis prevention, diagnosis, and therapy, cited 20 Jan, 2011. Fulgoni VL 3rd, Huth PJ, DiRienzo DB, Miller GD. Determination of the Optimal
252
5. 6.
7. 8.
9.
10.
11. 12. 13.
14.
Number of Dairy Servings to Ensure a Low Prevalence of Inadequate Calcium Intake in Americans. J Am Coll Nutr. 23(6):651-9.Dec.2004.5 Dwyer J. Starting down the right path: nutrition connections with chronic diseases of later life. Am J Clin Nutr. 83(2):415S-420S. Feb.2006. Von Hurst PR, Wham CA. Attitudes and knowledge about osteoporosis risk prevention: a survey of New Zealand women. Public Health Nutr. 10(7):74753.Jul. 2007. Sue RW. Basic nutrition and diet therapy 11th Edition. Mosby 2001. Lanou AJ, Berkow SE, Barnard ND. Calcium, Dairy Products, and Bone Health in Children and Young Adults: A Reevaluation of the Evidence. Pediatrics. 115(3):736-43.Mar. 2005. Maalouf G, Gannag-Yared MH, Ezzedine J, et al., Middle East and North Africa consensus on osteoporosis. J Musculoskelet Neuronal Interact. 7(2):13143.Apr-Jun.2007. Jamal SA, Ridout R, Chase C, Fielding L, Rubin LA, Hawker GA. Bone mineral density testing and osteoporosis education improve lifestyle behaviors in premenopausal women: a prospective study. J Bone Miner Res. 14(12):2143-9. Dec.1999. Veena Shatrugra et al. Women's work and bone health: A Review Osteopros Int (2005) 16: 1827-1835 Luo LZ, Xu L. Vitamin K and osteoporosis. Zhongguo Yi Xue Ke Xue Yuan.Xue Bao. 25(3):346-9.Jun.2003. Ha EJ, Caine-Bish N. Effect of nutrition intervention using a general nutrition course for promoting fruit and vegetable consumption among college students. J Nutr Educ Behav 41(2):103-9.Mar-Apr.2009. Friedman LA, Snetselaar L, Stumbo P, Van Horn L, Singh B, Barton BA. Influence of intervention on beverage choices: trends in the dietary intervention study in children (DISC). J Am Diet Assoc. 107(4):586-94.Apr. 2007.
Status and Scope of Some Medicinal Plants in Madhya Pradesh

* Vishnu Kant Tiwari **Arpita Awasthi
========================================================== Abstract- Medicinal Plants have always been the principal sources of medicine since ancient past and presently they are becoming popular throughout the developed countries. Ayurveda and other Indian Literature mention the use of plant is treatment of various human ailments. The medicinal plant play on important role in the lives of Tribal and Rural people, particularly in Remote part of developing countries. The present investigation Indicates that Madhya Pradesh is rich in floristic diversity and among them, several plants have been claimed to possess medicinal properties. These plant are most effective and mostly used in the Treatment of various disease and disorder. The present revels the status and scope of medicinal plants in Madhya Pradesh. Key words- Status and Scope, medicinal plant, Tribal and Rural People Madhya Pradesh ========================================================== Introduction - Medicinal plants have always been considered as a healthy sources of life for the Trible and Rural people becomes, medicinal plants have curative properties due to the presence of various complex chemical substance of different composition, which are found as secondary metabolites in one or more parts of these plants. These plant metabolites, according to their composition, are grouped as alkaloids, glycocides, saponins, corticosteroids, essential oil etc. There are several thousand medicinal plants are very useful in healing various diseases. There are more than 5000 medicinal plants Listed in different classical and modern texts. Around 800 medicinal plants are active in all India Trade around 1500 species are documented in Indian system of medicine like Ayurveda and Unani around 400 species are used by rural communities in local health practices . The agromomical practice for growing few medicinal plants have been developed and now loclized in many part of ===========================
* ** Department of Botany Govt. T.R.S. (Autonomous Excellence) College Rewa (M.P.) Head, Department of Botany Govt. T.R.S. (Autonomous Excellence) College Rewa (M.P.)
254
our state medicinal plants are particularly important to the rural poor but some of the common medicinal herbs are also used by rural poor and rich people as like amla, Neem, Palash, Bhringraj, Isobgol, Reetha, Brahmi, Babul, Bail, Dalchini, Jatropha, Jaiphal, Ratanjut, Nagkeshar etc. The world health orgenization (WHO) estimated that nealry 80% of worlds population particularly in Developing countries depend upon Traditional/Indigenous medicine for their primary health care needs. A major segment of These involve the use of medicinal plant and employed as a medicine in different civilization of the world (Ved Prakash 1988) An urgent need was felt for scientific documentation of Indigenous Wedson Related to medicine virtues of Plants amongst the ethnic groups. The Study Area- Madhya Pradesh is lies in the Central part of Indian continent. It forms a part of the central highland region of our country and inhabited by a number of tribal and rural people. The present investigations have been carried out among the remote places scattered over different district of the state. The study sites were selected considering the distinct population of sites and population of the flora. The physiography of the study area is very rough and hilly. The area is cylindrical in shape and the drainage pattern is of centripetal type. Structure conformity, earth surface behaviour and geodynamic process as silting and erosion, consequently, tend to produce marked local climate or microclimate. Owning to its centripetal drainage pattern the area is subjected to continuos erosion. The soil of the study area is mixed black, medium black and brown sandy. It is rich in lime contents and potash but deficient in nitrogen, organic carbon and phosphorus. Methodology - During the course of present investigation following methods were adopted: The present investigation is based on Extensive survey and field work of remote place scattered over different district of the state during January 2012 to December 2012. During the field trip Author met with the villagers of various age group and interacted with them in details following standard etho-medicinal manual (Jain and Goel 1995) The information about medicinal uses of plants was obtained from the Tribal people, local inhabitants, Hakims and field workers. To the best of possibility after collection the specimen were identified with the help of flower (Duthie, 1994, Hooker 1872-1897 and Chopra et al . 1980) The collected and identified specimens have been deposited in the herbarium Botany Department , Govt. T.R.S. College Rewa. Confirmation of specimens were made with the hep of floristic literatures (Verma et al. 1985; Oommachan and Shrivastava, 1996) Medicinal Plant used in the treatment of various disease and discorder. Ayurveda and other Indian literature mention the use of plants in Treatment
255
of various human ailments. our M.P. State is rich in floristic diversity and among them, several thousand plants have been claimed to possess medicinal properties. These plants are most effective and mostly used in the Treatment of various disease and disorders which is mentioned in table. Status, Trade and commercial value of medicinal plants- An extensive field study was done to gather infromation on Trade and commercial value of the species. It has been observed that a number of species have been sold by the herbal traders. Out of these some species have got potential value and are commercial Importance. Medicinal plants are mostly collected from their natural habitat and occasionally from house plantation. Trade Information of these species has been included in Table. Medicinal plant used in the Treatment of various disease and disorder with status, trade and commercial value.
Botanical Name Acacia nilotica (L.) Del. Acacia catechu Willd. Achyranthes aspera L. Acorus calamus L. Aegle marmelos (L.) Corr. Allium sativum L. Aloe vera Mill. Amorphophallus bulbifer (Roxb.) Bl. Andrographis paniculata Burm F. Argemone maxicana L. Asparagus racemosus Azadirachta indica Juss. Bauhinia purpurea L. Bombax ceiba L. Butea monosperma Calonyction muricatum G. Don. Calotropis procera (L.) Br. Cassia fistula L. Cassia tora L. Catharanthus roseus L.Don. Centella asiatica (L.) Urban. Cilitoria ternata L. Cissus quardangularis Convolvulus arvensis L. Curcumba longa Vahl. Cuscuta reflexa Roxb. Cynodon dactylon L. Datura metal L. Eclipta prostata L. Emblica afficinalis Gaertn. Feronia limonica L. Ficus benghalensis L. Ficus racemosa L. Local Name Babool Khair Latjira Bach Bel Lahsun Gheekumar Suran Kalmegh Ghamoya Satavar Neem Kachnar Semal Palas Khotaliya Madar amaltas Chakura Sadabahar Brahmi Aparajita Harjoor Shankhapuspi Haldi Amarbel Doob Dhatura Ghamira Amla Kaitha Bargad Umar Family Mimosaceae Mimosaceae Amaranthaceae Araceae Rutaceae Liliaceae Liliaceae Araceae Acanthaceae Papavaraceae Liliacae Meliacae Caesalpiniaceae Bombacaceae Fabaceae Convolvulaceae Asclepidiaceae Caesalpiniaceae Caesalpiniaceae Apocynaceae Apiaceae Fabaceae Viataceae Convolvulaceae Zingiberaceae Convolvulaceae Poaceae Solanaceae Asteraceae Euphorbiaceae Rutaceae Moraceae Moraceae Parts Used Gum paste Bark Roasted seeds RhizomeJuice Disease Burn Diarrhoea Bronchitis Cough Asthma Fruit pulp Gastric disorder Fresh cloves URI Leaf pulp Burn & Migraine Roasted corm Piles Digestive disorder Plant Malaria, decoction Jaundice Leafsap Ringworm Root powder Leucorrhoea Debility Leaf & Seed Skin eruption oil Bark gargle Oral ulcer Bark sap Diarrhoea Bark extract Dysentery Pedicle Seed Appetizer Purgative Roasted Asthma flower Fruit pulp Gastric disorder Leaf juice Ringwaorm Leaf & Diabetes Flower Leaf extract Brain tonic Seed powder Purgative Stem extract Bone fracture Plant extract Brain tonic Rhizome Respiratory and powder Joint disorders Plant paste Bone fracture Plant extract Menstrual trouble. Leaf poultice Inflammation Plant Juice Cut & Wounds Fruit powder Gastric diorder Leaf past Boils Bark extract Malaria Unripe fruit diabetes Cost (Rs/Kg.) 20/150/15/& 20/70/25/100/25/30/25/35/50/40/30/25/30/20/20/15/15/30/20/35/30/110/40/20/30/30/90/40/20/25/-
256
Peepal Kalihari Chameli Ratnjot Mehandi Chansur Mahua Pudina Lajawanti Karela Munaga Kemanch Karayal Harsingar Tulsi Kewara sarpagandha Ritha Makoya akarkara Jamun Imli Harra Arjun Bahera Gokharu Khas Moraceae Liliaaceae Oleaceae Euphorbiaceae Lythrceae Brassiaceae Sapotaceae Lamiaceae Mimosaceae Cucurbitaceae Morinaaceae Fabaceae Rananculaceae Nyctaginaceae Lamiaceae Pandanaceae Apocynaceae Sapindaceae solanaceae Asteraceae Myrtaceae Caesalpiniaceae Combertaceae Combertaceae Combertaceae Zygophyllaceae Poaceae Bark decoction Tuber extract Leafchewing Seed Oil Leaf poultice Seed Poultice Roasted Leaf Juice Leaf exdtract Fruit powder Fruit pulp Seedpowder Roasted seed Leaf decoction Leaf extract Flower powder Root extract Fruit pulp Plant sap Plant extract Seed powder Fruit pulp Fruit powder Bark decoction Fruit powder Fruit powder Root powder Gonorrhoea Child birth Oral ulcer skin eruption Feet sore Inflammation Asthma Gastric disorder Piles Diabetes Appetizer Night dreams Constipation Joint diseases Cough & Fever Prickly heat Blood pressure Hair shampoo Viral hepatitis Toothache Diabetes Laxative Gastric disorder Blood pressure Gastric disorder Asthma &Cough Prickly heart 20/35/40/150/70/60/40/35/45/30/20/30/60/25/30/35/40/50/20/35/30/35/80/25/70/60/20/-
Ficus religosa L. Gloriosa superba L. Jasminum humbile L. Jatropha curcus L. Lawsonia alba Lamk. Lepidium sativum L. Madlnuca longifolia Roxb. Mentha arvensis L. Mimosa pudica L. Momordica charanthia L. Moringa olecifera Lam. Mucuna puriens Hk. Nigela sativa L. Nyctanthes arbor-tristis Occimum sanctium L. Pandanus fascicularis Lamk. Rauwolfia serpentina L. sapindus emerginata Solanum nigrum L. Spilanthes calva DC. Syzygium cumini (L.) Tamarindus indica L. Terminilia chebula Retz. Terminilia arjuna W. & A. Terminilia bellerica Gaertn. Tribulus terrestis L. Vereiveriza zizaniodes L.
Summary and Conclusion- The present work carries the result of status and scope of medicinal plants in Madhya Pradesh. It indicate the utilization of plants for the treatment of several diseases and disorders. The Tribal and rural people of the study area are mostly depending on herbal medicine to care various human oilments mostly medicinal plant parts are also concerned to prepare the drug. The present work included numerous valuable species of medicinal herb to care chronic disease.
====================== References1. Chopra, R.N., Nayar, S.L. and Chopra, I.C. (1980) Glossary of Indian medicinal plants. National Institute of science communication and information Resources (CSIR). New Delhi. Duthie, J.E. (1994). Flora of Uppaer Gangetic plains and of the Adjacent Shivalik and Subhimalyan Tract. Botanical Survey of India, Culcutta, reprinted 1994. Hooker J.D. (1872-1897). Flora of British India, 7 Vols. Reeve Co. Ltd. England. Jain, S.K. (1989). Medicinal plant . National Book Turst, New Delhi. Jain, S.K. and rao, R.R. (1987). a Hand Book of Field and Herbarium Methods. today & Tomorrow, New Delhi. Jain S.K. and De Philipps, R.A. (1991). Medicinal Plants of India Reference Publication, Algonac, M.I. Jain S.K. and Goel, A.K. (1995) Proforma in field work, pp. 142-159, In a Manual of Ethnobotany, Jain, S.K. (Ed.) Scientific Publishers, Jodhpur.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Phytogeography Observations of Dehradun District

* Chhaya Singh ** Satish Garkoti *** H. C. Pande
========================================================== Abstract- The paper deals with phytogeographical observations of Dehradun district where 10 different regions of India and its adjoining areas were compared with the Dehradun district and it was found that Kumaon region shared maximum number of species with the study area is being shared by while Andaman & Nicobar Island showed minimum number of species. Phytogeographical study provides the information of geographical distribution and affinities of the flora with different area. It helps to reveal the floristic similarities between the areas involved, to identify the centers of endemism and to re-assess the previous classifications. ========================================================== Introduction- Phytogeographically the Himalaya have been variously divided by different biogeographers Hooker, 1904; Clarke, 1898; Chatterjee 1940; Rao, 1974; Rau ,1978; Mani, 1978; Rodgers and Panwar, 1988. Most of them have divided Himalaya into Western Himalaya & Eastern Himalaya. The Western Himalaya consist of 2 separate phytogeographic regions i.e. (i) Kumaun Himalaya- Garhwal Himalaya sector (ii) North west Himalaya which comprises of the Himachal Pradesh and J & K state. The Kumaun and Garhwal sectors constitute a unique habitat and have contributed to the great biological diversity. The place of origin is affected by both latitudinal and attitudinally. Dehradun district part of Garhwal Himalaya is the region which houses numerous Pteridophytic species. The phytogeographical affinities of the Himalayan flora have been discussed by several workers Meher-Homji, 1973; Gupta, 1964; Hara 1966; Meusel, 1971; Rau, 1974 and Rao, 1994. The phytogeographical study provides the information of geographical distribution and affinities of the flora with different area. It helps to reveal the floristic similarities between the areas involved, to identify the centers of endemism ===========================
* ** *** Department of Life Sciences, Shri Guru Ram Rai Institute of Technology and Sciences, Patel Nagar, Dehradun, Uttrakhand Ministry of Environment and Forest, CGO Complex, New Delhi Botanical Survey of India, 192 Kaulagarh Road, Dehradun, Uttrakhand
258
and to re-assess the previous classifications but the phytogeographical study of fern and fern-allies still is not undertaken. Phyogeographical analysis- Being situated in the Himalayan region, Dehradun district shares a large number of species from surrounding areas. The account of 147 species of fern and fern-allies based on the collection housed in herbarium of Botanical Survey of India, Dehradun (BSD), Forest Research Institute, Dehradun (DD), Central National Herbarium, Howarh (CAL) and earlier records mainly from Clarke,1880; Beddome, 1883, 1892; Dhir and Sood, 1981; Khullar, 1994, 2000; Khullar et.al.1982, 1987, 2005 and Dixit, 1992; Martin 1909,Mehra 1939, Pande and Pande, 2002-2003;Stewart, 1942; Singh 1993, 2000.The comparative study of fern and fern-allies of the study area with that of 10 different region of India and its adjoining areas is listed in Table-1
Species 1 FERN-ALLIES Sellaginella adunca A.Br. ex Heiron Selaginaella chrysocaules ( Hook. et. Grev.) Spring Selaginella involens (Sw.) Spring Selaginella pallidissima Spring Selaginella subdiaphana (Wall. ex. Hook.et Grev.) Spring Selaginella vaginata Spring Equisetum diffusum D.Don Equisteum ramosissimumDesf. Equisteum ramosissimum ssp. Debile (Roxb. ex Vauch.) Hauke. FERNS Botrychium multifidum Gmelin) Rupr. Botrychium ternatum (Thunb.) Sw. Botrychium lunaria (L.) Sw. Botrypus lanuginosus (Wall .ex Hook. et Grev.) Holub. Ophioglossum petiolatum Hook. Ophioglossum reticulatum L. Osmunda claytonia L. Osmunda japonicaThunb. Osmunda regalis L. Loxogrammae involuta (D.Don) C.Presl. Arthromeris wallichiana (Spreng.) Ching Colysis elliptica (Thunb.) Ching Drynaria mollis Bedd. Drynaria propniqua (Wall. ex Mett.) Smith + + + + + + + Phytogeographical regions 2 3 4 5 6 7 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 8 + + + 9 10 + + + + + + + -
+ + + + + + + -
+ + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + -
+ + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + +
+ + + + -
+ -
+ -
+ + + + + + + + + + +
259
Drynaria propniqua (Wall. ex Mett.) Smith L. loriformis (Wall. ex. Mett.) Ching L.nudus (Hook.) Ching L. oligolepidus (Baker) Ching L.pseudonudusChing L.scolopendrium(Ching) Mehra&Bir Microsorum membranecum (D.Don) Ching Pichisermollia ebenipes (Hook.) Pic-Ser. P. malacodon (Hook.) Pic.Ser. Selliguea oxyloba (Wall. et Kuntze) Pic-Ser. P. stewartii (Bedd.) P. quasidivaritcata(Hayata) PicSer. Polypodiumdiastrum argutum (Wall. ex. Hook.) Ching Polypodiodes amonea (Wall. ex Mett.) Ching P. lachnopus (Wall. ex. Hook.) Ching P. microrhizoma (C.B.Clarke ex Baker) Ching Pyrrosia costata (Wall. ex C.Presl) Tagawa et K.Iwat. P. flocculosa (D.Don) Ching P. lanceolata (L.) Farwell P. porosa (C. Presl.) Hovek Lygodium flexosum (L.) Sw. Lygodium japonicum (Thunb.) Sw. Aleuritopteris leptolepis FraserJenk. A. ancepsBlanf. A. bicolor (Roxb.) Fraser.-Jenk. A. formosona (Hayata) Tagwa A. dubia (Hope) Ching A. grisea (Blanf.) Panigrahi A. rufa (D.Don) Ching C. subvillosa (Hook.) Ching P.nitidula (Wall . ex Hook.) Baker Onychium cryptogrammoides H. Christ O. japonicum (Thunb.) Kunze. O. siliculosum (Desv.) C. Chr Hypolepis polypodioides (Bl.) Hook Pteridium revolutum (Bl.) Nakai. Pteris biaurita L.
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
260
P. cretica L. P. dactylina Hook. P. multifidaPoiret. P. excelsa Gaud. P. aspericaulis Wall. ex J. Agardh P. stenophyllaWall.ex Hook. P. vittata L. Adiantum capillus-veneris L. A.edgeworthii Hook. A.incisum Forssk. A. lunulatum Burm. A.venustum D.Don Annogramma reichsteinii Fraser.Jenk. Coniogramme affinis Wall. exHeiron. C. pubescens Heiron. C. serrulata (Bl.) Fee. C. fraxinea (D.Don) Fee ex Diels C.intermedia Heiron Gymnopteris vestita (Wall. ex Moore) Underw. Vittaria flexuosa Fee Ceratopteris thalictroides Marsilea minuta L. Crepidomanes insigne Dennstaedtia scabra Wall. ex T.Moore Microlepia hirta(Kaulf) C. Presl Asplenium adiantum-nigrum L. A.ceterach L. A.dalhousiae Hook. A. ensiforme Wall. ex Hook.et Grev. A. indicum Sledge A.lacinatum D.Don A. nesii H.Christ. A. tenuifolium D.Don A. trichomanes L. subsp. quadrivalens D.E. Meyer A. unilateral Lamk. A. yunnanense Franch. Matteuccia orientalis (Hook.) Tev Woodsia elongata Hook. Athyrium aniospterum H.Christ. A. atkinsoni iBedd. A.attenuatum (Wall. ex C.B.Clarke) Tagawa A.falcatum Bedd. A.fimbriatum T. Moore. A.foliolosum (Wall.) T. Moore ex Sim.
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + -
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + -
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + -
+ + + + + -
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
261
A.mackinnoniorum (Hope) C. Chr. A. micropterum Fraser-Jenk. A.pectinatum (Wall.ex Mett.) T. Moore. A.rupicola (Edegw. ex Hope) C.Chr A.schimperi Moug. ex fee A. setiferum C.Chr A. strigillosum (T. Moore ex Lowe) T. Moore ex Salom Cystopteris dickieanaSim C.fragilis (L.) Bernh. Deparia allantodioides (Bedd.) M.Kato D.boryana (Willd.) M. Kato D.japonica (Thunb.exMurr.) M. Kato D. petersenii (Kunze) M. Kato Diplazium esculentum (Retz.) Sw. D.longifolium T.Moore D.maximum (D.Don) C.Chr D.spectabile (Wall.exMett) Ching Amilopteris prolifera (Retz.) Copel. Christella appendiculata (C.Presl) Holtt. C. arida (D.Don) Holtt. C.dentata (Forssk.) Brown. C.papilio (Hope) Holtt. Cyclogramma auriculata (J.Smith) Ching. Glaphyropteridopsis erubescens (Wall.ex Hook.) Ching Pronephrium nudatum (Roxb.) Holtt. P.penangianum (Hook.) Haltt. Pseudocyclosorus canus (Baker) Holtt. P.tylodes (Kunze) Ching Pseudophegopteris levingei (C.B.Clarke) Ching. P. pyrrhorachis (Kunze) Ching subsp. pyrrhorhacis. P. pyrrhorhacis ssp. Distans Fraser.Jenk Stenogramma mollissima (Kunze) Fraser.Jenk Hypodematium crenatum (Forssk) Kuhn ssp. Crenatum Peranema cyatheoides D.Don Cyrtomium caryotideum (Wall.ex Hook.et Greville) C.Presl.
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + -
+ + -
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
262
Dryopteris barbigera (T. Moore ex Hook.) O.Kuntze D. blanfordii (Hope) C.Chr D. caroli-hopei Fraser.-Jenk D. chrysocoma (H.Christ) C.Chr D.cochleata (Ham.ex D.Don) C.Chr D. juxtaposita H.Christ D. lepidopoda Hayata D. nigropaleacea (Fraser.-Jenk) Fraser.-Jenk D. ramosa (Hope) C.Chr D. redactopinnata D. sparsa (Ham. ex D.Don) Kuntze D.stewartii Fraser.Jenk D.subalcera H.Christ D. wallichiana (Spreng.) Hyland D. xanthomelas (H.Christ) C.Chr Polystichum discretum (D.Don) Smith P. lentum (D.Don) Moore P. longipaleatum H.Christ P. luctuosum (Kuntze) T. Moore P. mehrae Fraser.-Jenk. et Khullar P. neolobatum Nakai. P.nepalense (Spreng.) C.Chr P.obliquum (D.Don)T. Moore P. piceo-paleaceum Tagawa P.squarrosum (D.Don) Fee P.stimulans (Kunze ex Mett.) Bedd. P.thomsonii (Hook f.) Bedd. P.yunnanense H. Christ Tectaria coadunata (Smith) C.Chr Nephrolepis auriculata (L.) Trimen Oleandra wallichii (Hook.) C.Presl. Araiostegia beddomei (Hope) Ching A.hookeri (T.Moore ex Bedd.) Ching A.pseudocystopteris (Kunze) Copel. Leucostegia truncata D. Don Blechnum orientale L. Woodwardia biserrata C.Presl. Azolla pinnata L.
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + -
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + -
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + -
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + -
+ + + + + + + + -
+ + + + + + -
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + -
263
The total number of common species of Kumaon region with Dehradun district is 142. It is due to altitudinal variation of the district, climatic condition, topography etc resembles to that of the region whereas that of Andaman and Nicobar islands shares 9 species with that to the district as the region mainly supports tropical type of climate, surrounded by shallow waters and maximum altitude of the region varies up to 500m.
Thus from the above observation it can be concluded that the total number of species common with the study area is being shared by Kumaon region i.e. 80.6% while the minimum sharing is with Andaman & Nicobar island .i.e. 5.10% Acknowledgements- The authors are thankful to Dr. Paramjit Singh, Director, Botanical Survey of India, Kolkata, and Prof. P. C. Pande, Botany Department, Kumaon University, D. B. S. Campus, Nainital for encouragement.
====================== References1. Beddome, R. H. (1863-64) The Ferns of Southern India and Ceylon, 1-38, t.1-110, 1863; 39: 88, t.111-271(1864).Second ed. 1873.1-88, t.1-271.Gantz Brothers Madras.Reprint-Today & Tomorrows Printers Publishers, New Delhi, 1970.
264
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.
15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26.
Beddome, R. H. (1892) A Handbook to the Ferns of British India, Ceylon and Malaya Peninsula. Thacker Spink & Co., Calcutta Bir, S.S., Satija, C.K., Vasudeva, S.M. and Goyal, P. (1983) The Pteridophytic flora of mGarhwal Himalaya.Jugal Kishore & Co. Dehra Dun. Clarke, C. B. (1880) A review of the ferns of Northen India.Trans. Linn. Soc. London II Bot., 1: 425-611. Chatterjee, A. and Pakrashi, S.C (1991) The Treatise on Indian Medicinal PlantsVol 14 Publication and information Directorate, CSIR, New Delhi Chandra, S. (2000) The Ferns of Ind ia (Enumeration, Synonyms & Distribution ).International Book Distributors.Dehardun Dhir, K.K. (1980) Ferns of North-Western Himalayas. BibliothecaPteridologica J. Cramer, Vaduz (Germani) 1: 1-158 Dhir, K.K. and Sood, A. (1981) Fern- Flora of Mussoorie Hills. Bibliotheca PteridologicaJ.Cramer, Vaduz (Germany) 2: 1-99. Dixit, R.D. (1984) A Census Indian Pteridophytic Flora of India IV.Bull. Bot. Surv. India, Howrah. Dixit, R. D. and Kumar, R. (2002) Pteridophytes of Uttaranchal (A Checklist).Bishen Singh Mahendra Pal Singh, Dehra Dun (India). Gupta, R.K. (1964)The bio-climatic types of the Western Himalaya and their analogous types towards the mountain chain of the Alps and Pyrenes,. Indian For.90:557-577. Hara, H.(ed).(1966) The flora of Eastern Himalaya, University of Tokyo, Japan. Hooker, J.D. (1904) A sketch of the flora of British India, London.Pp.55 Khullar, S. P., Sharma, S. S. and Chaudhary, V. (1987) The Ferns of Garhwal- A checklist In: Western Himalaya Vol I (eds.) Y.P.S. Pangety, S.C.Joshi. GyanodoyaPrakashanNainital. Pp. 347-388. Khullar, S.P., Sharma, S. S. and Paramjit, S. (1982) Observation on the Ferns of Chakrata Hills, U.P (North West Himalayas) Proc. Indian Sci. Congr.,69(III): 67. Mani, M.S. (1968), (1973), (1982) General Entomology. Oxford & IBH Publishing Company, New Delhi, Bombay, Calcutta (India). Martin, J. (1909) List of Ferns in and around MussoorieJ. Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc., 19: 179-183. Mehra, P.N. (1939) Ferns of Mussoorie. Punjab Univ. Publ., Lahore (India) Pp. 1-29. Meher-Homji, V.M. (1973) Phytogeography of Indian Sub-continent. In: Mishra,K.C. (ed) Progress of Plant Ecology in India, Pp-9-33. Pande, H.C. and Pande, P.C. (2003) An Illustrated fern flora of the Kumaon Himalaya Vol.I, Bishen Singh Mahendra Pal Singh, Dehra Dun (India). PichiSermolli, R. E. G. (1977) TentamenPteridophytorum genera in taxonomicumordinemredigendiWebbia, 31(2): 313-512. Rau, M. A. (1961) Flowering Plants and Ferns of north Garhwal U.P., India.Bull. Bot. Surv. India.3&4: 215-251. Rau, M. A. (1974) Vegetation and Phytogeography of Himalaya. In:Mani,M.S. (ed.)Ecology &Biogeography in India.Pp-247-280 Junk. The Hague Rodgers, W.A and H.S. Panwar. (1988) Planning Wildlife Protected areas Network in India.Vol.1-2.Wildlife Institute of India, Dehradun. Singh, J.S and S.P. Singh (1987) Vegetation of the Himalaya.Bot.Review 53:80-92 Stewart, R. R. (1942) The ferns of Mussoorie and Dehra Dun (India) 150th Anniv. Vol. Roy. Bot. Gadn. Calcutta, 2: 159-170.

Research Journal of Social and Life Science Volume-14-1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Research Journal of Social and Life Science Volume-14-1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RNI NO.

Research Journal of Social and Life Sciences

Prof. Braj Gopal

Dr. Sandhya Shukla

Dr. Gayatri Shukla

Research Stud for i es re

Journal of Centre for Research Studies

Centre for Research Studies

Subject Experts/ Advisory Board

2.40 2.10 2.10 2.20 TBA

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

Contemporary Indian Society and Culture

izks- cztxksiky 'kqDy

Feminism: A Comparative Perspective

Women Empowerment: A Myth or a Reality

Volume-IX, Coming in September, 2013

A Registered Reviewed Research Journal

Please address all Communications -

Prof. Braj Gopal Shukla

Phone - (07662) 255177, 9425186437 E-mail - gresearchjournal@rediffmail.com gayatripublicationsrewa@rediffmail.com akhilesh_socio@rediffmail.com

Adolescents Problems: A Comparative Perspective

BF BFT BR BI BH BIS BS BHA

Maximum Score Obtained & there %

A Registered Reviewed Research Journal

Please address all Communications -

Prof. Braj Gopal Shukla

Phone - (07662) 255177, 9425186437 E-mail - gresearchjournal@rediffmail.com gayatripublicationsrewa@rediffmail.com akhilesh_socio@rediffmail.com

Psychoticism, Reinforcement and Vigil ance

Contemporary Indian Society and Culture

izks- cztxksiky 'kqDy

Sexual Harassment of Women at the Work Place in India- An Analytical Study

Empowerment of Women in Indian Society

Volume-IX, Coming in September, 2013

A Registered Reviewed Research Journal

Please address all Communications -

Prof. Braj Gopal Shukla

Phone - (07662) 255177, 9425186437 E-mail - gresearchjournal@rediffmail.com gayatripublicationsrewa@rediffmail.com akhilesh_socio@rediffmail.com

50(20.66) 192(79.34) 242(100)

3(15) 17(85) 20(100)

66(16.58) 332(83.42) 398(100)

*Figures in the Brackets Represent Percentage

322(80.90) 70(17.59) 6(1.51) 398(100)

45(11.31) 124(31.16) 34(8.54) 195(48.99) 398(100)

Table 5 Respondents Knowledge about Panchayati Raj Act

37(15.29) 17(7.02) 242(100)

44(11.06) 17(4.27) 398(100)

*Figures in the Brackets Represent Percentage

241(60.56) 157(39.44) 398(100)

103(26.14) 75(18.89) 213(53.52) 7(1.76) 398(100)

A Registered Reviewed Research Journal

Please address all Communications -

Prof. Braj Gopal Shukla

Phone - (07662) 255177, 9425186437 E-mail - gresearchjournal@rediffmail.com gayatripublicationsrewa@rediffmail.com akhilesh_socio@rediffmail.com

Contemporary Indian Society and Culture

izks- cztxksiky 'kqDy

Impact of RTI in Administrative Culture in India

2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013

20 479 950 1746 1301 880 1289 Month January February

20 479 950 1746 1301 880 1289 1543

A Registered Reviewed Research Journal

Please address all Communications -

Prof. Braj Gopal Shukla

Phone - (07662) 255177, 9425186437 E-mail - gresearchjournal@rediffmail.com gayatripublicationsrewa@rediffmail.com akhilesh_socio@rediffmail.com